Ms Cl3500n Ing

G081/G120/G121/G122/G139
SERVICE MANUAL
001481MIU
G081/G120/G121/G122/G139
SERVICE MANUAL
G081/G120/G121/G122/G139
SERVICE MANUAL
001481MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained

within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including
desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
2006 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE
G081
*G092
G120
G121
G122
*G123
G139
*G149
GESTETNER
C7116
COMPANY
LANIER
RICOH
LP020c
CL3000
SAVIN
CLP1620
C7417
N/A
C7416
LP122c
LP116c
LP116cn
CL3000e
CL2000
CL2000n
CLP18
N/A
CLP17
C7521n
LP222cn
CL3500N
CLP22
*NOTE: The G092,G123 and G149 models are not available in the U.S. Market.
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO.
*
1
2
DATE
2/2003
6/2004
1/2006
COMMENTS
Original Printing
G120/G121/G122/G123 Addition
G139/G149 Addition
G081/G120/G121/G122/G139
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1

1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-1
1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT.................................................1-2
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-3
1.2 MACHINE INSTALLATION........................................................................1-3
1.2.1 INSTALLING THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT ..............................1-3
1.2.2 INSTALLING THE TONER CARTRIDGE .........................................1-6
1.2.3 LOADING PAPER ............................................................................1-8
1.2.4 CONNECTING THE POWER CORD .............................................1-10
1.2.5 SELECTING THE PANEL DISPLAY LANGUAGE..........................1-11
1.2.6 PRINTING THE TEST PAGE .........................................................1-13
1.2.7 ADJUSTING THE IMAGE DENSITY ..............................................1-14
1.2.8 CONNECTING THE PRINTER TO A COMPUTER ........................1-16
Connecting the printer to a computer using a network interface cable1-16
Connecting the printer to a computer using a parallel cable ...............1-17
1.2.9 CONFIGURING THE PRINTER FOR THE NETWORK .................1-18
1.2.10 INSTALLING THE PRINTER DRIVERS AND UTILITIES.............1-21
1.2.11 METER CHARGE.........................................................................1-22
1.3 OPTIONAL UNIT INSTALLATION...........................................................1-23
1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION......................................................................1-24
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1
2.1 USER REPLACEABLE ITEMS..................................................................2-1

2.2 SERVICE MAINTENANCE........................................................................2-2
2.2.1 PM TABLE........................................................................................2-2
2.2.2 RECOMMENDED CLEANING PROCEDURE..................................2-2
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1
3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ......................................................3-1

3.1.1 TOOLS .............................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 LUBRICATION .................................................................................3-1
3.2 FUSING UNIT............................................................................................3-2
3.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT ............................................................................3-3
SM
G081/G120/G121/G122/G139
3.4 EXTERIOR COVERS ................................................................................3-3

3.4.1 FRONT DOOR WITH TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT...........................3-3
3.4.2 TRANSFER ROLLER ASSEMBLY...................................................3-4
3.4.3 RIGHT COVER.................................................................................3-4
3.4.4 REAR COVER ..................................................................................3-5
3.4.5 LEFT COVER ...................................................................................3-5
3.4.6 TOP COVER AND LCD PANEL .......................................................3-6
3.5 ECB AND DRIVE UNITS ...........................................................................3-7
3.5.1 ECB (ENGINE CONTROL BOARD) AND TEMPERATURE/
HUMIDITY SENSOR BOARDS .......................................................3-7
3.5.2 SUB FUSING-FAN AND SUB FUSING-FAN DUCT.........................3-8
3.5.3 TONER CARTRIDGE HOLDER .......................................................3-9
3.5.4 TONER CARTRIDGE DRIVE UNIT................................................3-10
3.5.5 PAPER PICKUP MOTOR AND MOTOR BRACKET ......................3-10
3.5.6 MAIN DRIVE UNIT .........................................................................3-11
3.5.7 BIAS UNIT ......................................................................................3-17
3.5.8 POWER SUPPLY FAN MOTOR AND PSU FAN MOTOR DUCT ..3-17
3.6 LASER SCANNING UNIT .......................................................................3-18
3.6.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS .....................................................3-18
3.6.2 LASER SCANNING UNIT...............................................................3-19
3.7 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................3-19
3.7.1 PAPER EXIT ..................................................................................3-19
3.7.2 DISASSEMBLY OF PAPER EXIT SUB ASSEMBLY......................3-22
3.8 PAPER FEED UNIT ................................................................................3-22
3.8.2 PAPER FEED UNIT DISASSEMBLY .............................................3-24
3.9 IH (INDUCTIVE HEATER) UNIT .............................................................3-27
3.10 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..............................................................3-28
3.10.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT................................................................3-28
3.10.2 POWER SUPPLY UNIT DISASSEMBLY .....................................3-29
3.10.3 MAIN CONTROL BOARD ............................................................3-30
3.10.4 NVRAM/EEPROM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ..................3-30
EEPROM on the ECB .........................................................................3-30
NVRAM on the Controller ...................................................................3-31
EEPROM on the ECB and the NVRAM on the Controller...................3-31
3.10.5 MAIN CONTROL BOARD SHIELD COVERS ..............................3-32
3.10.6 HIGH VOLTAGE BOARD AND REGISTRATION SENSOR
BOARD.........................................................................................3-33
3.11 TRANSFER BELT TENSION UNIT .......................................................3-34
3.11.1 TRANSFER BELT TENSION UNIT REMOVAL............................3-34
3.11.2 CHANGER SOLENOID AND CAM RATCHET SOLENOID .........3-35
3.12 PCU HOLDER .......................................................................................3-37
3.13 FUSING FAN MOTOR ..........................................................................3-39
3.14 SENSORS .............................................................................................3-39
3.14.1 FRONT AND RIGHT COVER OPEN DETECTION SWITCHES ..3-39
3.14.2 BY-PASS TRAY HOME POSITION SENSOR AND BY-PASS
TRAY PAPER DETECTION SENSOR BOARDS .........................3-40
3.14.3 WASTE TONER CARTRIDGE FULL SENSOR............................3-40
3.15 STANDARD PAPER CASSETTE..........................................................3-41
G081/G120/G121/G122/G139
ii
SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................4-1

4.1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................4-2
4.2 CONTROLLER ERROR ............................................................................4-6
4.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ................................................................4-10
4.3.1 BLANK PRINT ................................................................................4-10
4.3.2 ALL-BLACK PRINT.........................................................................4-10
4.3.3 MISSING CMY COLOR..................................................................4-11
4.3.4 LIGHT PRINT .................................................................................4-11
4.3.5 REPEATED SPOTS OR LINES ON PRINTS .................................4-12
4.3.6 DARK VERTICAL LINE IN PRINT ..................................................4-12
4.3.7 WHITE HORIZONTAL LINES OR BANDS .....................................4-13
4.3.8 MISSING PARTS OF IMAGES.......................................................4-13
4.3.9 DIRTY BACKGROUND ..................................................................4-13
4.3.10 PARTIAL CMY COLOR DOTS .....................................................4-13
4.3.11 DARK IRREGULAR STREAKS ON PRINTS................................4-13
4.3.12 CMY COLOR IRREGULAR STREAKS ........................................4-14
4.3.13 GHOSTING ..................................................................................4-14
4.3.14 UNFUSED OR PARTIALLY FUSED PRINTS ..............................4-14
4.3.15 IMAGE SKEW ..............................................................................4-14
4.3.16 BACKGROUND STAIN ................................................................4-15
4.3.17 NO PRINTING ON PAPER EDGE................................................4-15
4.3.18 IMAGE NOT CENTERED WHEN IT SHOULD BE .......................4-15
4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-16
4.4.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................4-16
4.5 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................4-18
Power supply unit ...............................................................................4-18
High voltage unit .................................................................................4-18
4.6 LEDS .......................................................................................................4-18
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 SERVICE MODE OPERATION ........................................................5-1
Entering the Service Mode....................................................................5-1
Accessing the Required Program .........................................................5-2
Inputting a Value or Setting for a Service Program ...............................5-2
Exiting Service Mode ............................................................................5-2
5.2 PRINTER CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE .............................................5-3
5.2.1 SERVICE (CONTROLLER SERVICE MODES) ...............................5-3
Bit Switch Settings ................................................................................5-5
Gamma Adjustment ..............................................................................5-7
5.3 PRINTER ENGINE SERVICE MODE......................................................5-10
SM
iii
G081/G120/G121/G122/G139
5.3.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE (2. ENGINE) ........................................5-10

SP1-XXX (Feed) .................................................................................5-10
SP2-XXX (Drum).................................................................................5-12
SP5-XXX (Mode) ................................................................................5-14
SP7-XXX (Data Log)...........................................................................5-20
5.3.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE ...................................................................5-24
Table 1: Paper Size Switch.................................................................5-26
5.3.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE ...............................................................5-26
5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE......................................................5-28
5.4.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE....................................................................5-28
5.4.2 ERROR RECOVERY......................................................................5-28
Engine Firmware.................................................................................5-28
Controller System Firmware: ..............................................................5-28
5.4.3 CONTROLLER/ENGINE FIRMWARE UPGRADE .........................5-29
Engine Firmware.................................................................................5-29
Controller System Firmware ...............................................................5-30
5.5 POWER ON SELF-TEST ........................................................................5-32
5.5.1 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTIC..............................................5-32
Overview.............................................................................................5-32
Detailed self-diagnostics .....................................................................5-33
5.5.2 ENGINE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ........................................................5-33
5.6 USER PROGRAM MODE .......................................................................5-34
5.7 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................5-35
Controller Board..................................................................................5-35
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................................6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH ...................................................................................6-2
6.2 DRIVE MECHANISM.................................................................................6-3
6.2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ...............................................................6-3
6.2.2 BK MOTOR DRIVE...........................................................................6-4
6.2.3 CMY MOTOR DRIVE .......................................................................6-5
6.2.4 BOARD STRUCTURE......................................................................6-6
Overview...............................................................................................6-6
Descriptions ..........................................................................................6-7
6.3 PRINT PROCESS .....................................................................................6-8
6.3.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................6-8
6.3.2 CHARGE ........................................................................................6-10
6.3.3 LASER EXPOSURE .......................................................................6-11
Laser scanning ...................................................................................6-11
Polygon motor and laser exposure .....................................................6-12
6.3.4 TONER SUPPLY ............................................................................6-13
Toner cartridge ...................................................................................6-13
Paddle shaft switching mechanism .....................................................6-14
Toner cartridge and toner end detection .............................................6-15
G081/G120/G121/G122/G139
iv
SM
6.3.5 DEVELOPMENT.............................................................................6-17
PCU and OPC drum ...........................................................................6-17
6.3.6 TRANSFER BELT UNIT DRIVE .....................................................6-19
Belt tension unit ..................................................................................6-19
Four phases........................................................................................6-20
Belt home position sensor...................................................................6-20
Monochrome printing and color printing..............................................6-21
6.3.7 BELT TRANSFER AND CLEANING...............................................6-23
Transfer from drum to belt ..................................................................6-23
Transfer from belt to paper .................................................................6-24
Belt cleaning .......................................................................................6-25
6.3.8 WASTE TONER CARTRIDGE .......................................................6-26
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-26
Sensor ................................................................................................6-27
6.3.9 FUSING ..........................................................................................6-28
Fusing process ...................................................................................6-28
Circuit board .......................................................................................6-29
6.3.10 PAPER FEED ...............................................................................6-34
Drive motors .......................................................................................6-35
Sensors...............................................................................................6-35
Paper size detection switch combination ............................................6-35
Registration clutch ..............................................................................6-36
Feeding envelopes..............................................................................6-36
Paper feed speed................................................................................6-36
6.3.11 STANDARD TRAY LOCK MECHANISM......................................6-37
6.3.12 PAPER EXIT AND PAPER SWITCHBACK ..................................6-38
Normal Printing Mode (Not Duplex Printing Mode) .............................6-38
Duplex Printing Mode (Paper Switchback)..........................................6-39
6.3.13 COLOR POINT ADJUSTMENT ....................................................6-40
Adjustment types ................................................................................6-40
Adjustment timing ...............................................................................6-41
6.4 CONTROLLER ........................................................................................6-42
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-42
6.4.2 BOARD LAYOUT............................................................................6-44
6.4.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING .........................................................6-45
RPCS Driver .......................................................................................6-45
PCL5c Driver ......................................................................................6-45
PS3 Driver ..........................................................................................6-46
CMS (Color Management System) .....................................................6-46
Gray Correction ..................................................................................6-46
BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)............................6-46
Gamma Correction..............................................................................6-46
Toner Limitation ..................................................................................6-47
Dither Processing and ROP/RIP .........................................................6-47
6.5 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS ..................................................................6-48
6.5.1 SAMPLE PRINT .............................................................................6-48
6.5.2 LOCKED PRINT .............................................................................6-48
6.5.3 PAPER SOURCE SELECTION ......................................................6-49
Tray Priority (Auto Tray Select)...........................................................6-49
SM
G081/G120/G121/G122/G139
Tray Lock ............................................................................................6-49

Manual Tray Select .............................................................................6-49
6.5.4 AUTO CONTINUE ..........................................................................6-50
Auto Tray Select .................................................................................6-50
Manual Tray Select .............................................................................6-50
ACS (Auto Color Sensing) Mode ........................................................6-51
Energy saver mode.............................................................................6-52
6.6 IEEE1394 INTERFACE ...........................................................................6-53
6.6.1 SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................................6-53
Hardware Specification .......................................................................6-53
System Requirements.........................................................................6-53
6.6.2 IEEE1394 SCSI PRINT ..................................................................6-53
6.6.3 BLOCK DIAGRAM..........................................................................6-54
6.6.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT .........................................................................6-54
6.6.5 REMARKS......................................................................................6-55
6.6.6 TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES ......................................................6-55
6.6.7 IP OVER 1394 ................................................................................6-56
6.7 USB .........................................................................................................6-57
6.7.1 SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................................6-57
6.7.2 USB 1.1/2.0 ....................................................................................6-57
6.7.3 USB CONNECTORS......................................................................6-58
6.7.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT .........................................................................6-58
6.7.5 REMARKS......................................................................................6-59
Related SP Mode................................................................................6-59
6.8 IEEE802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) .............................................................6-60
6.8.1 SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................................6-60
6.8.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM..........................................................................6-61
6.8.3 TRANSMISSION MODE.................................................................6-62
Ad Hoc Mode ......................................................................................6-62
Infrastructure Mode.............................................................................6-62
6.8.4 SECURITY FEATURES .................................................................6-63
Using the SSID in Ad hoc mode .........................................................6-63
6.8.5 TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES ......................................................6-64
Communication Status........................................................................6-64
Channel Settings ................................................................................6-64
Troubleshooting steps.........................................................................6-65
6.9 BLUETOOTH (WIRELESS).....................................................................6-66
6.9.1 SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................................6-66
6.9.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM..........................................................................6-66
6.9.3 COMMUNICATION USING BLUETOOTH .....................................6-67
Piconet................................................................................................6-67
Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS)...................................6-67
Profiles................................................................................................6-68
6.9.4 SECURITY FEATURES .................................................................6-68
Public and Private Mode .....................................................................6-68
PIN Code (Personal Identification Number) ........................................6-68
6.10 CONNECTOR PIN DESCRIPTIONS.....................................................6-69
CN1 (on ECB)/CN1 (on LSU) .............................................................6-69
CN2 (on ECB)/CN3 (on LSU) .............................................................6-69
G081/G120/G121/G122/G139
vi
SM
CN3 (on ECB)/CN2 (on LSU) .............................................................6-69

CN5 (on ECB)/CN1 (on high voltage board) .......................................6-70
CN6 PCU ............................................................................................6-70
CN7 Front/Right Door Sensor .............................................................6-70
CN8 Power Supply Unit Fan ...............................................................6-70
CN9 Fusing Fan..................................................................................6-70
CN10 (on ECB)/CN1503 (on Toner Empty Sensor Board) .................6-71
CN11 Toner Cartridge Cover Sensor..................................................6-71
CN12 (on ECB)/CN1 (on CMY Motor)/CN1 (BK Motor) ......................6-71
CN13 (on ECB)/CN1509 (PCU Home Sensor) ...................................6-72
CN14 (on ECB) / CN1510 (on TB Unit Cam Home Position Sensor)..6-72
CN15 (on ECB)/CN1601 (on Fusing Unit) ..........................................6-72
CN17 (on ECB)/CN1505 (on Paper Full/Jam Sensor) ........................6-72
CN18 (on ECB) / CN1506 (on Paper Empty/Registration Sensor) .....6-73
CN19 Pickup Solenoid ........................................................................6-73
CN20 Registration Clutch ...................................................................6-73
CN21 BK Solenoid ..............................................................................6-73
CN22 Paper Pickup Motor ..................................................................6-73
CN23 (on ECB)/CN1507 (on By-pass Tray Paper Detection
Sensor)/CN1512 (on By-pass Tray Home Position Sensor) ............6-74
CN24 Mono/Color Changer Solenoid..................................................6-74
CN25 TB Unit Cam Switching Solenoid ..............................................6-74
CN26 Switchback Solenoid.................................................................6-74
CN27 (on ECB)/CN1501 (on Color Registration Sensor)....................6-75
CN28 Paper Size Detector..................................................................6-75
CN29 (on ECB)/CN1 (on Humidity/Temperature Sensor)...................6-75
CN30 Sub Fusing Fan ........................................................................6-76
CN31 (on ECB)/CN1 (on Option Paper Feeder Unit)..........................6-76
CN32 (on ECB)/CN2503 (on Power Supply Board) ............................6-76
CN35 LSU Safety Interlock Switch......................................................6-77
CN38 Printer Control Board 1 of 3 ......................................................6-78
CN38 Main Control Board 2 of 3.........................................................6-79
CN38 Main Control Board 3 of 3.........................................................6-80
CN39 (on ECB)/CN1508 (on Duplex Unit Jam Sensor) ......................6-80
CN43 Toner Supply Solenoid .............................................................6-81
CN45, CN46 (on ECB)/CN3301 (on LCD Panel) ................................6-81
CN1502 Waste Toner Full Sensor ......................................................6-82
CN2001 AC Line .................................................................................6-82
CN2203 (on IH Power Board) .............................................................6-82
CN2204 IH Heater ..............................................................................6-82
CN1502 Power Switch ........................................................................6-82
CN1502 (on Power Supply Board)/CN2207 (on IH Power
Supply Board) ..................................................................................6-83
CN2506 Side/Front Door Interlock Switch ..........................................6-83
SM
vii
G081/G120/G121/G122/G139
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 7-1
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................7-1
1.1 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES..............................................................7-3
2. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .....................................................................7-4
2.1 PRINTER DRIVERS ............................................................................7-4
2.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE ..........................................................................7-4
3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION ....................................................................7-5
PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 3000 G342

SEE SECTION G342 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
G139
SEE SECTION G139 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
G081/G120/G121/G122/G139
viii
SM
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the printer power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the printer and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the printer and the paper tray unit are
supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the printer is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS
Toner, including monocomponent toner, and developer are non-toxic, but if you
get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye
discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If
unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS
1. The printer and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
the appropriate models.
2. The NVRAM module (option) installed on the controller has a lithium battery
which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an
identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM.
Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in
accordance with local regulations.
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite
suddenly when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of or recycle as required, used toner, developer, and organic
photoconductors in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic
supplies.)
3. Dispose of or recycle as required, replaced parts in accordance with local
regulations.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the
repair of laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit
can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified
Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field.
Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser
subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the
optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage
your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
Conventions in this Manual

This manual uses several symbols.
Symbol

What it means
Refer to section number
See Core Tech Manual for details
Screw
Connector
E-ring
Clip ring
Lengthwise, SEF (Short Edge Feed)
Sideways, LEF (Long Edge Feed)
TAB
POSITION 5
PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 3000 G342
G139 SECTION
TAB
POSITION 8
SPECIFICATIONS
TAB
POSITION 7
SERVICE TABLES
TAB
POSITION 6
TROUBLESHOOTING
TAB
POSITION 3
TAB
POSITION 4
TAB
POSITION 2
TAB
POSITION 1
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Installation
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range : 10 C to 32 C (50 F to 89.6 F)
2. Humidity Range
: 15 % to 80 % RH
3. Ambient Illumination : Less than 2,000 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)
4. Ventilation
: 3 times/hr/person
5. Avoid areas that are exposed to sudden temperature changes. This includes:
1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
6. Do not place the machine in an area where it will be exposed to any corrosive
gas (i.e. ammonia as used in a print shop).
7. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,500 m (8,125 ft.) above sea
level.
8. Place the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side should be
no more than 5 mm.)
9. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibration.
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back : Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left : Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
SM
1-1
G081/G120/G121/G122
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT

Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.
G081I710.WMF
A (left side) : Over 10 cm (4")

B (rear)
: Over 10 cm (4")
C (right side) : Over 55 cm (22")

D (front)
: Over 75 cm (30")
G081/G120/G121/G122
1-2
SM
MACHINE INSTALLATION
Installation
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
1. Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
2. Avoid multi-wiring.
3. Be sure to ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A
220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 6 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10 %
3. Do not set anything on the power cord.
1.2 MACHINE INSTALLATION

1.2.1 INSTALLING THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT & WASTE
TONER BOTTLE
[A]
1. Open the right cover [A] of the printer.

NOTE: The machine should NOT be
plugged into the power outlet
during installation.
G081I291.WMF
2. Pull out the green levers on the left

and right that are fastening the inner
cover [B].
[B]
G081I301.WMF
SM
1-3
G081/G120/G121/G122
3. Lift the inner cover [A] until it stays up.

[A]
G081I311.WMF
4. Remove the black photoconductor unit from its

packing materials.
[B]
5. Peel off the tape surrounding the

photoconductor unit, and remove the
top cover [B] on the unit.
NOTE: Do not remove the cover
attached to the bottom of the
photoconductor unit at this
time.
G081I680.WMF
NOTE: After taking the new

photoconductor unit out of the bag,
immediately install it. Do not expose it to
ambient light for prolonged periods.
NOTE: Before proceeding with the
actual installation of the
development units, observe
the locations for each
photoconductor unit as shown
in this illustration.
when ready, continue to step 6
on the following page.
! Photoconductor unit (black)
" Photoconductor unit (color)
G081/G120/G121/G122
1-4
1
G081I720.WMF
SM
Installation
[A]
6. While holding the photoconductor unit
from the bottom cover in your left
hand, match the green arrow at the tip
of the photoconductor unit [A] to the
rail inside the printer.
NOTE: Make sure the green arrow fits
securely on the rail before
proceeding to the next step.
Do not touch the surface of
the OPC drum(s) with your
hands.
G081I370.WMF
7. Slide the front of the photoconductor

carefully in. Slide the unit on the cover,
and then push the unit in until it stops.
NOTE: If you do not properly attach
the green arrow of the
photoconductor unit securely
to the rail, you may damage
the photoconductor unit.
G081I390.WMF
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to install the color photoconductor unit.

9. Lower the inner cover [B] slowly,
applying even pressure.
[B]
G081I410.WMF
SM
1-5
G081/G120/G121/G122
10. Push the green lever to fasten the

inner cover [A].
[A]
11. Locate and remove the Waste Toner
Bottle from its shipping materials.
12. Install the Waste Toner Bottle in the
appropriate location below the
photoconductor units (label-side out).
13. Slide the green locking lever to the
locked position.
NOTE: Refer to the Operating
Instructions Maintenance Guide, page 32, for added details.
14. Close the right cover [B] of the printer
slowly. The Waste Toner Bottle will
automatically be pushed upwards into
its proper position.
NOTE: You may wish to save the
lower photoconductor unit
covers and light-proof
photoconductor unit shipping
bags to use should removal of
these units become necessary
for servicing.
G081I420.WMF
G081I430.WMF
[B]
1.2.2 INSTALLING THE TONER CARTRIDGE
[A]
1. Open the upper left cover [A] of the

printer.
2. Remove the packing tape and foam
strips, attached to the tape, located
inside.
G081I441.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
1-6
SM
Installation
3. Locate and remove from the packing

materials one of the toner cartridges.
Hold the cartridge [A] horizontally as
illustrated, and shake it back and forth
[A]
about 10 times.
NOTE: Be careful of any loose toner
that may be present in the
toners shipping bag. If a
large amount of toner is
present inside the bag, check
to ensure that the cartridges
shutter is properly closed.
G081I460.WMF
[B]
NOTE: Do not open the shutter [B] on
the bottom of the toner
cartridge. Toner may spill out.
G081I470.WMF
4. Check that the toner color and location

are correct, and then insert the toner
cartridge vertically and slowly.
NOTE: Reading the labels on the
printer, you can check the
location for each cartridge.
G081I481.WMF
SM
1-7
G081/G120/G121/G122
5. Push the toner cartridge [A] in the

direction of the arrow to fasten the
toner cartridge.
[A]
G081I491.WMF
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to install the other cartridges.

[B]
7. Close the upper left cover [B] of the
printer.
NOTE: If the toner cartridges are not
set properly, you cannot close
the upper cover of the printer.
G081I500.WMF
1.2.3 LOADING PAPER

CAUTION: When pulling the paper tray out, be careful not to pull it strongly. Doing
so may cause the tray to fall causing personal injury.
1. Pull the paper tray [A] out of the printer
until it stops. Then tilt it upwards
slightly, and remove it completely.
Place it on a flat surface.
NOTE: You cannot pull tray 1 out if
the by-pass tray is open.
[A]
G081I930.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
1-8
SM
Installation
2. Remove any and all shipping tape

and shipping materials.
3. Press the PUSH sign [A], and adjust
the rear guide to the paper size you
want to load.
G081I931.WMF
PUSH
[A]
G081I924.WMF
4. Adjust the side guides to the paper

size you want to load.
5. Load paper into the paper tray with the

paper manufactures indicated printside up.
NOTE: 1) Make sure that the top of
the stack does not exceed
the limit mark [B] inside the
tray.
2) To avoid paper misfeeds,
the front and side guides
should be set exactly to the
paper size.
3) Do not load different kinds
of paper in the tray.
G081I932.WMF
[B]
G081I923.WMF
6. Slide the paper tray completely into the printer.

NOTE: Be sure to insert the paper tray correctly. Otherwise, misfeeds may
occur, or the front cover may touch the paper tray.
Also remember to only use quality and fresh laser paper that is
suitable for color laser printing. Doing this will help ensure quality and
consistent color print results.
SM
1-9
G081/G120/G121/G122
1.2.4 CONNECTING THE POWER CORD
CAUTION
1. It is dangerous to handle the plug with wet hands. Doing this may result
in receiving an electric shock.
2. When you pull the plug out of the socket, grip the plug, not the cord, to
avoid damaging the cord and causing a fire or an electric shock.
NOTE: 1) Be sure to firmly connect the power plug to the socket outlet.
2) The printer must be off when you plug-in or unplug the power cord.
1. Confirm that the printer's power switch
[A] is off.
G081I730.WMF
[A]
2. Locate and remove the power cord from the machines packing materials.
3. Attach the power cord to the socket on the back of the printer.
4. Plug the other end securely into the socket outlet.
G081/G120/G121/G122
1-10
SM
NOTE: 1) You can select one of the following languages (the default is English):
English, German, French, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish,
Spanish, Finnish, Portuguese, Czech, Polish or Hungarian.
2) If you use the English panel display, it is not necessary to do the
following procedure.
1. Turn on the printer.
G081I740.WMF
NOTE: After the machine warms up, Ready

appears on the panel display.
Ready
G081I901.WMF
[A]
2. Press the Menu key [A].
On Line
Menu
Escape
#Enter
Power
Error
Data In
G081I937.WMF
NOTE: The message appears on the panel

display.
Menu:
Paper Input
G081I902.WMF
SM
1-11
G081/G120/G121/G122
Installation
1.2.5 SELECTING THE PANEL DISPLAY LANGUAGE
3. Press the # or $ key to display

Language.
Menu:
Language
G081I903.WMF
4. Press the Enter key. The message appears on

the panel display.
NOTE: English is the default
Language:
%English
G081I904.WMF
5. Press the # or $ key to display the language you want to select.

6. Press the Enter key to select. An asterisk (*)
will be displayed next to the selected language.
Menu:
Language
G081I903.WMF
7. Press the On Line key or Menu key. Ready

(in the language you selected) appears on the
panel display.
Ready
G081I901.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
1-12
SM
NOTE: You can check if the printer works properly by printing a test page such as
the configuration page. However, you cannot check the connection
between the printer and the computer by printing the test page.
G081I740.WMF
NOTE: After the machine warms up, Ready

appears on the panel display.
Ready
G081I901.WMF
2. Press the Menu key.
Menu:
Paper Input
G081I902.WMF
3. Press the # or $ key to display "List/Test

Print."
Language:
List/Test Print
G081I905.WMF
4. Press the Enter key. The message appears on

the panel display.
5. Confirm that Config. Page is on the display,
and then press the Enter key.
SM
1-13
List/Test Print:
Config. Page
G081I906.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
Installation
1.2.6 PRINTING THE TEST PAGE
6. The test printing starts shortly after.
Printing...
G081I907.WMF
NOTE: If you cannot complete the test print,

check if an error message appears on the panel display. For more
information about error messages, see Section 5 "Troubleshooting" in
the Operating Instructions Maintenance Guide and Section 4 in this
support documentation.
7. Press the On Line key. Ready appears on
the panel display.
Ready
8. Turn off the printer's power switch.
G081I901.WMF
9. At this point in the installation, you may wish to check and ensure that the
firmware level is current. The firmware version is indicated on the top (third item
under System Reference) on the Configuration page.
Refer to the Firmware Update Procedure located in Section 5 of this manual.
Update the firmware if necessary. After completing the firmware update return
to this section and continue.
10. Next press the #" or $" key to display the Color Demo Page. Press the
Enter key. Check to ensure that this page appears as expected (all colors
present)
1.2.7 ADJUSTING THE IMAGE DENSITY

1. Press the Menu key. Menu appears on the
panel display.
Menu:
Paper Input
G081I902.WMF
2. Press the # or $ key to display

"Maintenance," then press the Enter key.
Menu:
Maintenance
3. Press the # or $ key to display Image

Density, then press the Enter key.
Maintenance:
Image Density
G081I908.WMF
G081I909.WMF
NOTE: The message appears on the panel

display.
Image Density:
Prt. Test Sheet
G081I910.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
1-14
SM
4. Press the Enter key. When the message

appears on the panel display, press the Enter
key.
Prt. Test Sheet

Press # to Start
G081I911.WMF
NOTE: The test printing will start shortly after.
Printing...
G081I907.WMF
5. Compare the colors on the printed image density test sheet with those on the
Image Density Adjusting Card.
6. Press the # or $ key to select the color
you want to adjust, then press the Enter key.
Image Density:
Black
G081I912.WMF
7. Press the # or $ key to set the image

density value, and press the Enter key. To
adjust another color, repeat steps 6 and 7.
Black:
(-10 +10)
0
G081I913.WMF
NOTE: 1) You can adjust the image density from -10 to +10. Increasing the
value darkens the printouts and decreasing the value lightens the
printouts.
2) Pressing the # or $ key increases or decreases the value by
one.
8. Print another image density test sheet and check if the colors on the test sheet
now mach those on the Image Density Adjusting Card. If they still do not match,
adjust the image density again.
9. Press the On Line key. Ready appears on
the panel display.
Ready
10. At this point in the installation turn to section

G081I901.WMF
1.3 Optional Unit Installation in this manual.
Perform any option installation necessary then return to this section and
continue to section 1.2.8 Connecting the Printer to a Computer found on the
following page.
SM
1-15
G081/G120/G121/G122
Installation
1.2.8 CONNECTING THE PRINTER TO A COMPUTER

Connecting the printer to a computer using a network interface cable
1. Confirm that the printer's power switch
[A] is off.
[A]
G081I730.WMF
2. Connect the network interface cable

[B] to the Ethernet port on the back of
the printer.
[B]
G081I934.WMF
3. Connect the other end of the cable to the network (for example, to a hub).
5. Check the LEDs on the Ethernet port.
! Lights when 100 BASE-TX is in use
and does not light when 10 BASE-T is
in use
" Lights when the printer is securely
connected to the network
6. Proceed to section 1.2.9.
G081/G120/G121/G122
G081I935.WMF
1-16
SM
Installation
Connecting the printer to a computer using a parallel cable

NOTE: 1) The parallel cable is not provided with the printer.
2) You must provide the appropriate parallel cable for the computer that
you are using.
3) The printers parallel connection is a standard bi-directional interface. It
requires a standard 36-pin parallel cable compliant with IEEE1284 and
the parallel port on the computer.
4) To avoid electrical interference, use a shielded cable.
5) Do not use a parallel cable longer than 2.5 meters (8.2 feet).
1. Confirm that the printers power switch
[A] is off.
[A]
2. Turn the computer off.
G081I730.WMF
3. Attach the parallel cable [B] to the port

of the printer. Secure the cable with
the metal fittings (bale-clips) as shown
in the illustration.
NOTE: The Voltage rating of the
parallel port for the computer
is: Max. DC 5 V.
[B]
G081I936.WMF
4. Attach the other end of the parallel cable to the parallel port of the computer.
Secure the cable. (2 screws)
5. Turn on the printer and the computer.
6. Proceed to 1.2.10.
SM
1-17
G081/G120/G121/G122
1.2.9 CONFIGURING THE PRINTER FOR THE NETWORK

When using the printer in a network environment, you must configure the printer
settings using the printers operation panel. The following list is the items you can
set and their default settings.
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
Network Boot
Frame Type (NW)
Active Protocol
Ethernet
011.022.033.044
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
None
Auto
TCP/IP
Auto
The procedure below shows an example to specify TCP/IP as the active protocol.
1. Press the Menu key. Menu appears on the
panel display.
Menu:
Paper Input
G081I902.WMF
2. Press the # or $ key to display Host

Interface, and then press the Enter key. The
interface setting menu appears.
Menu:
Host Interface
G081I914.WMF
3. Start the protocol for use.

1) Press the # or $ key to display Network
Setup, and then press the Enter key.
Host Interface:
Network Setup
G081I915.WMF
2) Press the # or $ key to display Active

Protocol, and then press the Enter key.
Network Setup:
Active Protocol
G081I916.WMF
3) Press the # or $ key to display TCP/IP,

and then press the Enter key.
Active Protocol:
TCP/IP
G081I917.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
1-18
SM
4) Press the # or $ key to display Active,

TCP/IP:
and then press the Enter key. In about two
seconds, the display returns to the "Active
&Active
Protocol" setting screen.
G081I918.WMF
NOTE: * shows the current setting.
5) Set the rest of the protocols for use.
6) When all settings for the protocol are done, press the Escape key. The Network
Setup setting screen appears.
NOTE: 1) The default settings for all of the protocols are Active.
2) It is recommended to set all the unused protocols to Not Active.
4. Set the IP address for the printer.

NOTE: Check the IP address with the network
administrator.
Network Setup:
1) Press the # or $ key to display IP
IP Address
Address, and then press the Enter key. The
G081I919.WMF
currently selected IP address appears.
NOTE: 1) When the Enter key is pressed, the cursor moves to the next field.
2) When the # or $ key is kept pressed for a few seconds, the value
changes by 10.
3) If DHCP is assigned the IP address can not be changed. Turn

DHCP off, then assign IP address.
2) Press the # or $ key to set the value for
the field.
IP Address:
199.022.033.044
G081I920.WMF
3) Press the Enter key. The cursor moves to the next field.
4) Repeat 2) and 3) to set the value for the rest of the fields.
5. Set Subnet Mask and Gateway Address by following the same procedure as
for setting the IP address.
NOTE: 1) Check the subnet mask value with the network administrator.
2) The gateway address is the address of the host or router that acts as a
gateway when interacting with work stations in another network. Check the
value with the network administrator.
3) If you are not sure of the addresses, do not set them.
SM
1-19
G081/G120/G121/G122
Installation
6. When using DHCP with TCP/IP protocol, set network boot, as follows.
1) From within Network Setups press the #
Network Setup:
or $ key to display to display DHCP, and
then press the Enter key. In about two
&DHCP
seconds, the display returns to the "Network
G081I922.WMF
Setup" setting screen.
NOTE: * shows the current setting.
Depending upon the firmware this setting may be located under
Network Boot.
7. When all of the settings are done, press the
On Line key. Ready appears on the panel
display.
Ready
G081I901.WMF
8. Print the configuration page to confirm the settings made. See 1.2.6 for printing
the configuration page.
G081/G120/G121/G122
1-20
SM
Install the printer drivers and software using the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers
and Utilities. The supported operating systems are Windows 95/98/Me, Windows
2000, Windows XP and Windows NT 4.0. (The procedure below may vary slightly
from the procedure you experience based on software version.)
Click Quick Install to install PCL5c and RPCS printer drivers.
When the TCP/IP protocol is used, SmartNet-Monitor for Client will be installed as
well. When using with TCP/IP protocol, confirm the following:
The printer is connected to a network with the network interface cable.
TCP/IP protocol is set up.
The IP address is set for the printer and the computer.
To install the PostScript3 printer driver, click the PostScript3 printer driver button.
For more information about the PostScript3 printer driver, see the Administrator
Reference or the Client Reference manual included on the CD-ROM labeled
Operating Instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Insert the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities into the CD-ROM
drive. Auto Run will start the installer.
Select a language, then click [OK]. The following languages are available:
Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English),
Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian),
Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues
(Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish). The default interface
language is English.
Select Quick Install. The software license agreement appears in the License
Agreement dialog box.
After reading the contents, click I accept the agreement, then click Next.
In the Select Printer dialog box, select the printer model you want to install.
NOTE: 1) For a network connection with TCP/IP, select the printer whose IP address
is displayed in Connect to.
2) For parallel connection, select the printer whose printer port is displayed in
Connect to.
6. Click [Install]. When finished, the Installation Completion dialog box appears.
NOTE: 1) Under Windows 2000, the Digital Signature Not Found dialog box may
appear when installing the printer driver. In this case, click Yes to continue
the installation.
2) Under Windows XP, the Hardware Installation dialog box may appear. In
this case, click Continue Anyway to continue the installation.
7. Click [Finish].
NOTE: A message telling you to restart the computer may appear. In this case,
restart your computer to complete the installation. If no message
appears, go to step 5.
8. Click Exit. The installation is now complete.
SM
1-21
G081/G120/G121/G122
Installation
1.2.10 INSTALLING THE PRINTER DRIVERS AND UTILITIES
1.2.11 METER CHARGE (MACHINE INSTALLATION)

If the customer has a service contract, change the settings of the following SP
modes depending on the contract type.
Item
Meter charge
SP No.
SP5-930-1
Counting method
SP5-045-1
Fax No. setting
SP5-812-2
Counter reset
SP7-825-1
Function
Specifies whether the meter charge
mode is enabled or disabled.
Meter charge mode enabled:
The Counter menu appears
immediately after the Menu key is
pressed.
The counter type selected by the
counting method (SP5-045-1) can
be displayed with the Counter
menu.
The counter values can also be
printed with the Counter menu.
The selected counter starts from a
negative number.
The PM warning is not displayed
when the replacement time
arrives.
Meter charge mode disabled:
The Counter menu is not
displayed.
The total counter starts from 0.
Specifies whether the counting
method used in meter charge mode is
based on developments or prints.
Important:
This SP can only be done before the
negative counters are reset with SP7825-001
Programs the service station fax
number.
The number is printed on the counter
list when the meter charge mode is
selected, so that the user can fax the
counter data to the service station.
Resets the counters to 0.
Important: This must be done at
installation after all the above settings
have been finished. The negative
counters used in meter charge mode
will be reset to zero.
Default
Off
Developments
NOTE: 1) The default setting for this machine is meter-charge mode off.
2) The meter-charge counter cannot be reset.
G081/G120/G121/G122
1-22
SM
OPTIONAL UNIT INSTALLATION
The following options are available for this machine. Refer to the appropriate units
Operating Instructions (Option Setup Guide) for how to install these options.
Paper Feed Unit Type 3000 Unit (G342)
AD440 Duplex Unit (G343)
Printer Hard Disk Type 3000 (G345)
IEEE802.11b Interface Unit Type A (Wireless LAN: G628)
IEEE1394 Interface Unit Type 4510 (G336)
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type A (G350)
128 MB DIMM Memory Unit Type C (G331)
256 MB DIMM Memory Unit Type C (G332)
NVRAM (User Account Enhancement Unit Type B G311)
Ethernet LAN option for G092 (G355)
NOTE: The model G092 is not available in the N.A. market
SM
1-23
G081/G120/G121/G122
Installation
1.3 OPTIONAL UNIT INSTALLATION
USER REPLACEABLE ITEMS
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 USER REPLACEABLE ITEMS
Item
Toner
PCU
Transfer Belt Unit
Waste Toner Bottle
Fusing Unit
Transfer Roller
Preventive
Maintenance
If the service contract requires that the user performs some of the PM, the user will
replace the following items.
Remarks
5K (C,M,Y,K)
13K (CMY,K)
83K
36K (B & W) 9K (Full Color)
100K
100K
NOTE: The transfer roller is supplied with the fusing unit.

Chart: A4 (LT), 5%
Mode: Three pages per print job
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
When the machines default settings are used, a message is displayed when a
maintenance counter reaches the value in the PM table shown on the next page.
Important: The customer must clear the maintenance counters for the above
items, except the PCUs (the machine automatically detects new
PCUs).
SM
2-1
G081/G120/G121/B122
SERVICE MAINTENANCE
2.2 SERVICE MAINTENANCE

2.2.1 PM TABLE
The following table lists the PM items that must always be done by the technician.
NOTE: The technician may also have to do the PM listed on the previous page, if it
is specified by the service contract.
Symbol
C: Clean
Item
Main unit
Registration Roller
Paper feed unit
Pickup Roller
By-pass tray
Pickup Roller
Separation pad
50K
EM
Remarks
Clean with water
Clean with water
C
C
C
C
Clean with water

Clean with water
NOTE: Cleaning the inside of the machine is recommended when replacing the
PCUs and transfer belt unit.
2.2.2 RECOMMENDED CLEANING PROCEDURE

1. Turn off the main switch.
2. Remove the waste toner bottle.
3. Remove the PCUs.
4. Remove the transfer belt unit. Do not touch the transfer belt surface.
5. Remove the fusing unit.
6. Slide out the standard paper cassette.
7. Clean the paper path.
8. Clean all printer rollers with a dampened cloth. Never apply alcohol to the
transfer roller.
9. Clean the laser unit windows with a blower brush.
10. Vacuum the interior of the printer.
11. Carefully clean the area surrounding the transfer roller.
G081G/120/G121/G122
2-2
SM
SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting
any of the procedures in this section.
NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.

! : See or Refer to
: Screws
Replacement &
Adjustment
Important: Before performing the following steps, layout several sheets of clean
paper and remove the 4 toner cartridges (cyan, magenta, yellow, and
black), waste toner bottle, and standard paper cassette from the
printer. Place the toner cartridge and waste toner bottle on the sheets
of paper.
: Connector
3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

3.1.1 TOOLS
Part Number
N8036701
G0219350
G0819310
Description
Flash Memory Card - 4MB
Loop-back connector - parallel
Color PCU Skew Adjustment Knob
Described
Section
5.4
5.5
3.12
Qty
1
1
1
The following are also recommended.

PCU shipping cover (for Black and Color); supplied with the PCU
3.1.2 LUBRICATION
Area
Lubricant Part
Number
52039501
Part
Main Drive Unit
Gear and Gear Shafts
Transfer Belt Drive

Unit
Paper Exit Roller
Grounding Spring Plate

Transfer Cam ( 4 pieces )
Planetary Gear Base B
Roller Supporting Portion
SM
3-1
Type of Lubricant
Grease G501
G0049668
52039501
Grease KS-660
Grease G501
52039501
Grease G501
G081/G120/G121/G122
FUSING UNIT
3.2 FUSING UNIT

CAUTION
1. The fusing unit is hot. To avoid personal injury, wait 1 hour for the
fusing unit to cool after turning the power off.
2. When replacing parts, use only the manufacturers specified
components.
3. After servicing, be sure to restore the insulators, shields, etc.
Open the front door.
[A]: Fusing unit connector
[B]: Release the two fusing unit
levers.
[C]: Fusing unit.
[B]
[C]
[A]
G081R900.WMF
[D]
NOTE: After removing the fusing unit,
use caution not to push the
thermostat [D][E]. The
thermostat is easily broken.
[E]
G081R104.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-2
SM
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
3.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT

Open the right cover.
Waste toner cartridge
Release the PCU holder.
Remove the black
photoconductor unit then the
color photoconductor unit.
[A]
(Press the green locking tab
down on the color PCU to fully[B]
remove.)
[A]: Transfer belt unit ( x 2)
NOTE: The two screws are
the green thumbscrews located at
either side of the
[B]
transfer unit [B].
When removing the
transfer belt unit, take care not to damage the transfer belt.
G081R901.WMF
3.4 EXTERIOR COVERS

3.4.1 FRONT DOOR WITH TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT
[A]: Front support lever
NOTE: Open the front door. Hold the
bottom end of the lever. Slowly
close the door, and the upper
end of the lever comes off the
door.
[B]: Lever spring
[F]
[C]: Left door-hinge (1 hook)
[D]: Right door-hinge (1 hook)
[E]: Plastic belt
[F]: Front door
[E]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
G081R902.WMF
SM
3-3
G081/G120/G121/G122
Replacement &
Adjustment
EXTERIOR COVERS
3.4.2 TRANSFER ROLLER ASSEMBLY

[B]
[J]
[I]
[K]
[H]
[G]
[F]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[G]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
G081R903.WMF
[E]
Transfer roller holder ( x 4)

Front door cover
Transfer roller paper guide
Transfer roller
NOTE: Using the provided green levers the transfer roller can be easily
unclipped from the bushings.
It is not necessary to remove the front door to replace the transfer
roller. Avoid touching the transfer rollers surface with your hands.
[E]: Transfer roller right bushing
[F]: Transfer roller left bushing
[G]: Transfer roller spring
[H]: Transfer roller plate
[I]: Lock lever spring
[J]: Front door lock lever
[K]: Plastic belt
[A]
3.4.3 RIGHT COVER

[A]: Cartridge lever (1 hook, x 1)
[B]: Plastic strap
[C]: Right cover (1 hook at the rear end)
NOTE: Release the three hinges [D].
[B]
[C]
G081R906.WMF
[D]
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-4
SM
EXTERIOR COVERS
Unplug the optional paper feed units harness connector (if present).
Open the right cover
[A]
[A]: Rear cover ( x 2 (self-tapping),
5 hooks [B])
NOTE: Use a small flat blade screw
driver to assist unclipping the
[B]
hooks. Be careful not to
damage the hooks or the
cover.
[C]: Cassette cover
[D]: Harness cover
NOTE: Use a penlight or other
suitable light source to view
how each cover hook is
[C]
clipped to the mainframe
before prying the clip to
release.
Replacement &
Adjustment
3.4.4 REAR COVER
[D]
G081R907.WMF
3.4.5 LEFT COVER

[A]: x 2
[B]: Release the two hooks.
[C]: Release the openings from the
two projections.
[D]: Left cover with the toner
cartridge cover [E]
[E]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[B]
[C]
SM
3-5
G081R904.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
EXTERIOR COVERS
3.4.6 TOP COVER AND LCD PANEL

[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[D]
[E]
G081R905.WMF
[A]: LCD panel (4 hooks [B], x 2)

[C]: Top cover (7 hooks [D])
NOTE: Use caution not to damage the paper exit sensor [E].
This cover is a very precise fit. Use extra caution and work alternately from
the right and left sides of the top cover to gradually release the cover from
the printer.
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-6
SM
ECB AND DRIVE UNITS
3.5 ECB AND DRIVE UNITS

3.5.1 ECB (ENGINE CONTROL BOARD) AND
TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR BOARDS
Rear covers (! 3.4.4)
Left cover (! 3.4.5)
Top cover (! 3.4.4)
[A]: Engine board shield cover
( x 8)
[B]: Engine control board
(All , x 7)
Replacement &
Adjustment
[A]
[B]
G081R912.WMF
NOTE: After replacing the ECB, remove the EEPROM from the old board and
install it on the new board. (If the EEPROM on the old board is defective,
replace the EEPROM (! 3.10.4).)
[C]
[E]
[D]
[C]: Engine board small bracket ( x 3, x 1)
[D]: Engine board large bracket ( x 6)
[E]: Temperature/humidity sensor board ( x 1)
SM
3-7
G081R913.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
ECB AND DRIVE UNITS
3.5.2 SUB FUSING-FAN AND SUB FUSING-FAN DUCT
[B]
[A]
[C]
G081R981.WMF
Rear covers (! 3.4.4)

Top cover (! 3.4.4)
[A]: Sub fusing-fan ( x 2, x 1)
[B]: Jam detection sensor board ( x 1)
[C]: Sub fusing-fan duct ( x 2, x 2)
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-8
SM
ECB AND DRIVE UNITS
3.5.3 TONER CARTRIDGE HOLDER

[B]
CAUTION: The toner cartridge

holder assembly
contains toner. Take
care not to spill toner
when handling the
toner cartridge holder
assembly.
[A]: Toner cartridge drive unit (
x 2, x 1)
[B]: PC guide ( x 1)
[C]: Toner cartridge holder
assembly ( x 2, x 1 [D])
[C]
A
[D]
G081R908.WMF
Lubricating
Lubricate the following parts (Grease G501) when replacing them (values in
parentheses indicate the amount of lubricant):
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
G081R973.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
SM
Shaft excluding both ends (0.1 cc)

Toner cartridge drive base (indicated with arrows) (0.05 cc x 4)
Gear (0.1 cc x 3)
Gear (0.1 cc)
3-9
G081/G120/G121/G122
Replacement &
Adjustment
ECB AND DRIVE UNITS
3.5.4 TONER CARTRIDGE DRIVE UNIT

[A]: Toner cartridge drive unit ( x 2,
x 1)
[A]
G081R910.WMF
3.5.5 PAPER PICKUP MOTOR AND MOTOR BRACKET

[A]: Paper pickup motor ( x 1,
x 2)
NOTE: The connector is at
CN22 on the engine
board.
[B]: Paper pickup motor bracket
( x 4)
[C]: Paper pickup drive gear
[D]: Grounding plate ( x 1)
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
G081R911.WMF
Lubricating
The outer cogs on the paper pickup drive gear [C] (0.1 cc)
The shaft on the paper pickup motor bracket [B] (0.05 cc)
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-10
SM
ECB AND DRIVE UNITS
3.5.6 MAIN DRIVE UNIT
[D]
[C]
G081R917.WMF
[E]
Fusing unit (! 3.2)

Toner cartridge holder (! 3.5.2)
Engine control board, engine board small bracket, engine board large bracket
(! 3.5.1)
Toner cartridge drive unit (! 3.5.4)
Paper pickup drive motor bracket (! 3.5.5)
[A]: Inner cover ( x 2, x 2)
[B]: Fusing unit grounding plate
[C]: Main drive unit ( x 7, x 3)
NOTE: There are 2 motor cables [D] and 1 sensor cable [E].
SM
3-11
G081/G120/G121/G122
Replacement &
Adjustment
[A]
[B]
ECB AND DRIVE UNITS
[A]: Drive unit bracket ( x 8)

[B]: Grounding plate ( x 1).
[A]
[B]
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
Feed idle gear

Cam gear
Left PC idle gears
Right PC idle gear
Left transfer-unit idle gears
Right transfer-unit idle gear
Joint gear
G081R918.WMF
[J]
[F]
[I]
[G]
[H]
[G]
G081R914.WMF
Lubricating
[E]
[C] [D]
Lubricate the following parts (Grease 501) when replacing them (values in
The shaft of the feed idle gear [C] (0.05 cc)
The shaft of the cam gear [D] (0.05 cc)
The shafts of the left PC idle gears [E] (0.05 cc x 4)
The shaft of the right PC idle gear [F] (0.05 cc)
The shafts of the left transfer-unit idle gears [G] (0.05 cc x 2)
The shaft of the right transfer-unit idle gear [H] (0.05 cc)
The inside of the PC bushing [J] (0.1 cc)
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-12
SM
ECB AND DRIVE UNITS
CAUTION: When reinstalling the PCU

idle gears, perform the
following steps, and make
sure that each alignment
mark (A) on the PCU gear
is aligned with the mark (B)
as shown.
Mark (B)
on Bracket
Alignment Mark
(A) on Gear
PCU
Gear
1) If gears 1 3 are installed,

remove them.
2) Align each mark (A) with the
mark (B) by rotating the PCU
gear.
3) Install gears 1 3 in order of
Gear 1
Gear 2
gears 1, 2, and 3.
4) Make sure that each alignment
mark (A) is aligned with the mark (B).
Replacement &
Adjustment
PCU
Gear
Gear 3
G081R915.WMF
CAUTION: Replace all PCU gears at the same time with the gears provided in the
replacement package. Make sure the gears have the same molding
number (see the illustration below). Print quality will be poor if gears of
different molding numbers are used.
Molding Number
PCU Gear Top Side View

G081R968.WMF
SM
3-13
G081/G120/G121/G122
ECB AND DRIVE UNITS
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
CMY home lever

PC home spring
PC home lever
PC home position sensor
( x 1)
[C]
[B]
[D]
G081R916.WMF
[E]: Four PCU gears

( x 4)
[F]: Four development gear
assemblies
[G]: Four bushings
[H]: Fusing unit idle gear
( x 1)
[A]
[G]
[F]
[E]
[J]
[I]
[H]
Lubricating
G081R921.WMF
The shaft of the CMY home lever [A] (0.05 cc)
The shafts of the PCU gears [E] (0.05 cc)
The inside of the bushing [G] (0.1 cc x 4)
The interface with the bushing [G] of the development gear [I] (0.05 cc x 4)
The shaft of the fusing unit idle gear [H] (0.05 cc)
The skirt of the left end of the development coupling [J] (0.05 cc x 4)
The inside of the PC bushing [K] (0.1 cc x 1)
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-14
SM
ECB AND DRIVE UNITS
[A]: Drive unit bracket ( x 4)
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
[K]:
[L]:
G081R922.WMF
[E]
CMY change gears

BK change gear
Hopper change gear
Hopper gears (A)
Hopper gears (B)
Hopper gear (C)
Coupling gear
Outer gear
Planetary gears
Planetary gear bracket
Inner gear
[F]
[G]
[D]
[C]
[K]
[I]
[B]
[L]
Lubricating
[J]
[H]
G081R919.WMF
The inner cogs (0.1 cc x 2) and outer cogs (0.1 cc x 2) on the CMY change gears
[B]
The shafts of the CMY change gears [B] (0.05 cc)
The inner cogs (0.1 cc) and outer cogs (0.1 cc) on the BK change gear [C]
The shaft of the BK change gear [C] (0.05 cc)
The shaft of the hopper change gear [D] (0.05 cc)
The shafts of the hopper gears (A) [E] (0.05 cc x 2)
The shafts of the hopper gears (B) [F] (0.05 cc x 2)
The shaft of the hopper gear (C) [G] (0.05 cc)
The inner cogs on the left side of the coupling gear [H] (0.1 cc)
The cogs on the outer gear [I] (0.1 cc)
The shaft of the outer gear [I] (0.05 cc)
The shafts of the planetary gears [J] (0.05 cc x 2)
The inside (0.1 cc) and outside (0.1 cc) of the right end and the inside (0.1 cc) of
the left end of the inner gear [L]
SM
3-15
G081/G120/G121/G122
Replacement &
Adjustment
[A]
ECB AND DRIVE UNITS
[J]
[I]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
[K]:
[K]
Tension roller spring

Tension roller bracket ( x 1)
Tension roller
Transfer pulley gear
Transfer pulley gear flange
Feed pulley gear
Feed pulley gear flange
Feed belt
BK solenoid ( x 2)
BK clutch spring
BK clutch arm
[B]
[E]
[C]
[D]
[G]
[A]
G081R920.WMF
[F]
Lubricating
"
Lubricate the following parts (Grease

501) when replacing them (values in
parentheses indicate the amount of
lubricant):
The shaft of the transfer pulley gear
flange [E] (0.05 cc)
The points " through # (0.05 cc x 6)
on the tension roller bracket [N]
G081/G120/G121/G122
[H]
'
&
#
3-16
Rear viewG081R972.WMF
SM
ECB AND DRIVE UNITS
3.5.7 BIAS UNIT
[A]: Grounding plate ( x 1)

[B]: Bias unit ( x 2, x 2)
NOTE: The connectors are at CN2
and CN3 on the high
voltage board
(! 3.10.6).
[B]
[A]
G081R925.WMF
3.5.8 POWER SUPPLY FAN MOTOR AND PSU FAN MOTOR DUCT
Fusing unit (! 3.2)
Engine control board
(! 3.5.1)
Toner cartridge holder
(! 3.5.2)
Toner cartridge drive unit
(! 3.5.4)
Paper pickup motor bracket
(! 3.5.5)
Main drive unit (! 3.5.6)
[A]: Fan motor
( x 1, x 2)
[B]: By-pass tray paper detection
sensor cable
[C]: By-pass tray home position
sensor cable
[D]: Fan motor duct ( x 3)
SM
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
3-17
G081R926.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
Replacement &
Adjustment
Fusing unit (! 3.2)

Engine control board (! 3.5.1)
Toner cartridge holder (! 3.5.2)
(! 3.5.4)
Paper pickup motor bracket
(! 3.5.5)
LASER SCANNING UNIT
3.6 LASER SCANNING UNIT

WARNING
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of
the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
3.6.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS

The caution decal is located as shown below.
G081R970.WMF
G081R974.BMP
WARNING
Be sure to turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the
power outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser
unit. This printer uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 655 nm
and an output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-18
SM
PAPER FEED
3.6.2 LASER SCANNING UNIT

[A]
[B]
Replacement &
Adjustment
Rear cover (! 3.4.4)

Top cover (! 3.4.4)
[A]: Laser scanning unit grounding plate
( x 4)
NOTE: When reassembling, arrange the
wires correctly. The laser
scanning unit wires (shielded
cable) go under the plate; the
other wires go over the plate. Be
sure to re-install using the exact
same screws as removed.
[B]: Laser scanning unit ( x 3, x 3)
G081R923.WMF
NOTE: 1) To avoid dust, do not disassemble the laser scanning unit.

2) When reassembling, adjust the position of the CMY PCU (! 3.12).
3.7 PAPER FEED

3.7.1 PAPER EXIT
All covers (! 3.4)
Paper pickup motor bracket (! 3.5.5)
[A]: Inner cover ( x 2, x 2)
[B]: Duplex unit detection sensor
[C]: Duplex unit jam detection sensor
board
[A]
[B]
[C]
G081R924.WMF
SM
3-19
G081/G120/G121/G122
PAPER FEED
[A]: Paper exit gear cover

( x 3, x 1)
NOTE: The connector is at CN26
on the engine board
(! 3.5.1).
[B]: Gears
[A]
[C]: Switching lever
[C]
[B]
G081R930.WMF
NOTE: When reinstalling the gears on the

paper exit gear cover, reassemble
them as shown in the illustration.
[A]: Paper exit roller joint gear
[B]: Double gear
[C]: Switching lever spring
[D]: Rotation switching solenoid
[E]: Intermediate gear
[F]: Outer gear x 2
[G]: Inner gear x 4
[H]: Coupling gear x 2
[K]
[A]
See figure-1
[E]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[F]
[G]
[H]
Figure-1
CAUTION: The rotation switching gear [I]

differs from the other gear [J] in
the direction of the gear teeth
(see Figure-1).
[I]
[J]
Lubricating
G081R931.WMF
Lubricate the following parts (Grease 501)

when replacing them (values in parentheses indicate the amount of lubricant):
The shafts on the outer gears [F] (0.05 cc x 6); the cogs on the outer gears [F]
(0.1 cc x 2)
The cogs on the coupling gears [H] (0.1 cc x 2)
The shafts on the paper exit gear cover [K] (0.05 cc x 3)
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-20
SM
PAPER FEED
[A]
[B]
&
Lubricating
"
Lubricate the following parts (Grease 501)

when replacing them (values in parentheses
indicate the amount of lubricant):
The right and left ends of the paper exit
roller [A] (0.1 cc x 2) excluding the gear on
the left end
G081R927.WMF
[B]: Paper exit sub assembly ( x 2)

[B]
G081R928.WMF
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
Paper full sensor actuator

Sensor lever spring
Paper jam sensor levers
Paper full/Jam sensor board ( x 1)
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
G081R929.WMF
SM
3-21
G081/G120/G121/G122
Replacement &
Adjustment
[A]: Paper exit roller (with the paper

stoppers [B])
NOTE: Move it in the direction of the
arrows [", &].
PAPER FEED UNIT
3.7.2 DISASSEMBLY OF PAPER EXIT SUB ASSEMBLY
[A]
[C]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
Pinch roller (A) x 6

Pinch roller (B) x 2
Pinch roller spring x 8
Star rubber x 2
Paper guide
Paper stopper
[E]
[F]
G081R934.WMF
[D]
[B]
3.8 PAPER FEED UNIT

Fusing unit (! 3.2)
Front door (! 3.4.1)
Right cover (! 3.4.3)
[A]: Registration clutch ( x 1)
[B]: Registration roller coupling
gear ( x 1)
NOTE: The connector is at CN20 on
the engine board (! 3.5).
NOTE: When reinstalling the registration
clutch, tab " of the registration
clutch must be fit over hook &.
[A]
[B]
&
"
G081R932.WMF
[C]: Paper feed unit ( x 2, x 2)

NOTE: The connectors are at CN18
and CN19 on the engine
board.
[C]
G081R933.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-22
SM
PAPER FEED UNIT
Replacement &
Adjustment
Lubricating
[C]
[B]
[A]
[B]
G081R975.WMF
[A]: The cogs on the inner gear (0.1 cc x 2)
[B]: The shafts on the outer gear (0.05 cc x 2)
[C]: The shaft on the gear bracket (0.05 cc x 1)
SM
3-23
G081/G120/G121/G122
PAPER FEED UNIT
3.8.2 PAPER FEED UNIT DISASSEMBLY

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
[K]:
[L]:
[L]
Pickup gear
Inner gear (1 hook)
Inner gears
Outer gear
Gear
Plastic washer
Ratchet arm
Feed gear
Idle gear
Screw
Gear bracket
Pickup solenoid
[I]
[H]
[E]
[K]
[D]
[J]
[C]
[B]
[G]
[F]
[A]
G081R940.WMF
[N]
[M]: Bushing
[N]: Bushing
NOTE: Unlatch the bushing hook
from the pickup roller shaft
[O].
[M]
G081R941.WMF
[O]
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-24
SM
PAPER FEED UNIT
[A]
Replacement &
Adjustment
[A]: Two pickup roller assemblies

NOTE: Unlatch the hook from the
groove in the pickup roller
shaft.
[B]: Pickup roller shaft with the two pins
[C]
[C]
[A]
[B]
G081R942.WMF
[D]
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
Spring x 2
Registration roller
Registration pinch roller
Paper empty/registration sensor
board
[H]: Registration sensor lever
[I]: Lever spring
[J]: Paper empty sensor actuator
[K]: Varistor
[F]
[I]
[G]
[E]
[K]
[D]
[H]
[J]
G081R937.WMF
SM
3-25
G081/G120/G121/G122
PAPER FEED UNIT
[A]: Registration paper guide assembly

NOTE: The registration paper guide
assembly [A] is held in place
by the two support tabs [B]
(see Figure-1). While
unlatching the registration
paper guide assembly from
the support tabs, remove it
from the paper feed unit
frame.
[C]: Two bushings
[D]: Paper feed roller
[E]: Paper feed unit frame
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
Registration paper guide

[I]
Paper guide spring
Pinch roller spring x 2
Pinch roller shaft
NOTE: Slide out the pinch roller shaft
in the direction of the arrow
shown in this illustration.
Figure 1
[B]
[E]
[C]
[A]
[C]
[D]
G081R938.WMF
[H]
[G]
[F]
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-26
G081R939.WMF
SM
IH (INDUCTIVE HEATER) UNIT
3.9 IH (INDUCTIVE HEATER) UNIT
[A]
NOTE: After removing the fusing unit, use

caution not to push the thermostat
[A][B]. The thermostat can be
easily broken.
G081R104.WMF
Fusing unit (! 3.2)

All covers (! 3.4)
[C]: Interlock switch cover
( x 3)
[D]: IH cable shield cover ( x 1)
[E]: Cover ( x 1)
[F]: x 2 (pink+white, black)
[F]
[C]
Replacement &
Adjustment
[B]
[D]
[E]
G081R935.WMF
[G]: IH harness cover ( x 1)

[H]: IH unit ( x 1, 1 washer)
NOTE: Pull out the IH harness
cable [I] through the
opening in cover [J].
[J]: IH shield cover ( x 1, 2 hooks [K])
[G]
[H]
[I]
[J]
G081R936.WMF
[K]
SM
3-27
G081/G120/G121/G122
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3.10 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.10.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
View (A)
View (A)
"
&
[A]
[B]
G081R944.WMF
All covers (! 3.4)

IH unit (! 3.9)
[A]: Cover ( x 1)
NOTE: Slide out the cover in the arrow % direction.
[B]: Power supply unit ( x 11, x 4)
NOTE: Move the power supply unit in the arrow " direction, and slide it out in
the direction of the arrow &.
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-28
SM
3.10.2 POWER SUPPLY UNIT DISASSEMBLY

[A]: Power supply shield cover
( x 10)
Replacement &
Adjustment
[A]
[B]
[B]: Power supply board

( x 2, x 6)
[C]: IH power supply board
( x 1, x 5)
[C]
G081R943.WMF
SM
3-29
G081/G120/G121/G122
3.10.3 MAIN CONTROL BOARD

NOTE: After replacing the controller, remove the NVRAM on the old board and
install it on the new board. If the NVRAM on the old board is defective,
replace the NVRAM (! 3.10.4).
[A]: Main control board ( x 2)
[A]
G081R947.WMF
3.10.4 NVRAM/EEPROM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

Before beginning the following procedures, make sure you have the printers
original SMC report (factory settings) available.
EEPROM on the ECB

1. Enter SP mode and print out the SMC reports with SP5-990 if possible.
2. Turn off the main switch and unplug the power cord.
3. Replace the EEPROM (IC5) on the ECB and reassemble the machine.
4. Execute the RAM clear for the engine settings with SP5-801-2.
5. Enter the SP mode changes from the factory in the field.
6. Input the engine serial number with SP-5-811-4.
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-30
SM
NVRAM on the Controller

3. Replace the NVRAM on the controller and reassemble the machine.
5. Contact your regional representative to enter the machines serial number and
destination code.
NOTE: The destination code can only be entered using a secured access
procedure. This is necessary to prevent unauthorized changing of the
products destination code.
6. Enter the SP mode data (changes as) indicated on the printers original SMC
report and the current SMC report printed in Step 1 of this procedure.
EEPROM on the ECB and the NVRAM on the Controller

3. Replace the EEPROM on the ECB and the NVRAM on the controller, and
reassemble the machine.
4. Execute the RAM clear with SP5-801-1 and SP7-808-1.
5. Contact your regional representative to enter the machines serial number and
destination code.
NOTE: The destination code can only be entered using a secured access
procedure. This is necessary to prevent unauthorized changing of the
products destination code.
6. Enter the SP mode data (changes) as indicated on the printers original SMC
report and the current SMC report printed in Step 1 of this procedure.
SM
3-31
G081/G120/G121/G122
Replacement &
Adjustment
4. Execute the RAM clear for the controller settings and counters with SP5-801-3,
-8, -11, and SP7-808-1.
3.10.5 MAIN CONTROL BOARD SHIELD COVERS

[A]
All covers (! 3.4)

Power supply unit (! 3.10.1)
Engine control board (! 3.5.1)
[A]: Laser scanning unit grounding
plate ( x 4)
[B]: Main control board shield cover
assembly ( x 7)
[B]
G081R948.WMF
[C]: Main board shield cover ( x 7)

[D]: Main board shield base cover
[F]: Main board guide rail
[D]
[E]
[F]
G081R949.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-32
SM
3.10.6 HIGH VOLTAGE BOARD AND REGISTRATION SENSOR

BOARD
[D]
[C]
[B]
G081R945.WMF
All covers (! 3.4)

Power supply unit (! 3.10.1)
Main control shield cover assembly (! 3.10.5)
[A]: HV earth plate ( x 1)
[B]: High voltage unit with high voltage board ( x 6, x 4)
[C]: High voltage board shield cover ( x 4)
[E]
[G]
[F]
G081R946.WMF
[D]: High voltage board

[E]: Spring
[F]: Color registration sensor board ( x 2)
[G]: Waste toner bottle sensor actuator
NOTE: After replacing the color registration sensor board, the color registration
values must be reset (SP5-998-002).
SM
3-33
G081/G120/G121/G122
Replacement &
Adjustment
[A]
TRANSFER BELT TENSION UNIT
3.11 TRANSFER BELT TENSION UNIT

3.11.1 TRANSFER BELT TENSION UNIT REMOVAL
[A]
G081R950.WMF
Transfer belt unit (! 3.2)

Top cover (! 3.4.4)
[A]: Transfer belt tension unit ( x 2, x 3)
NOTE: The cables are wired through the opening of the frame and connected to
the 3 connectors CN14, 24, and 25 on the engine control board. Take care
not to damage the cables when removing the transfer belt tension unit.
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-34
SM
3.11.2 CHANGER SOLENOID AND CAM RATCHET SOLENOID

[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[C]
[F]
Replacement &
Adjustment
[J]
[G]
[H]
[I]
[H]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
SM
G081R953.WMF
Changer solenoid
Changer lever
Changer lever spring
Transfer cam home position sensor
Cam solenoid spring
Cam ratchet (with the washer)
Cam ratchet solenoid
Spring supports
Transfer belt tension unit base
Bracket
3-35
G081/G120/G121/G122
Lubricating
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[F]
[E]
[G]
G081R976.WMF
[A]: The shafts on the planetary gear base (0.05 cc x 4); the inside edge (0.05 cc)
and outside edge (0.05 cc) of the planetary gear base
[B]: The inside of the double teeth gear (0.05 cc)
[C]: The shaft on the cam ratchet bracket (0.05 cc)
[D]: The outside of the paper transfer cam (left) (0.2 cc)
[E]: The outside of the belt transfer cam (left) (0.2 cc)
[F]: The outside of the belt transfer cam (right) (0.2 cc)
[G]: The outside of the paper transfer cam (right) (0.2 cc)
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-36
SM
PCU HOLDER
3.12 PCU HOLDER

Top covers (! 3.4.4)
[A]: 2 tabs
NOTE: Move in the arrow direction.
[B]: PCU holder assembly ( x 2)
[B]
[A]
G081R958.WMF
Adjustment
After replacing the PCU holder, adjust the position of the CMY PCU as follows.
1. Remove the left cover (! 3.4.5).
2. Remove the board cover [A] ( x 2).
3. Push the free-run button [B] and hold
it down. One or more sheet of the
test pattern is output.
NOTE: The number of sheets
depends on how long you
hold the button down.
4. Check that the lines produced by the
K PCU and CMY PCU are aligned
properly.
NOTE: Normally, the color lines (C,
M, and Y) produced by the
CMY PCU are aligned so
closely that they appear as
dark-gray lines.
SM
[B]
[A]
3-37
G081R103.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
Replacement &
Adjustment
[A]
PCU HOLDER
5. Confirm that the color lines " or & are

aligned to the black lines. If they are not
aligned, go on to the next step. If they
CMY"
are aligned %, adjustment is not
required.
NOTE: This procedure ensures that the
KCMY%
black photoconductor unit is
aligned properly (test lines
CMY&
parallel to papers feed edge)
and the color photoconductor
unit is aligned properly to the
black unit. By performing this
adjustment the black PCU and color PCU are angled (skewed) to
ensure that each color horizontal line on the test print overlaps (as
close as possible) each black horizontal line on the test print. Do not
power off the printer during this procedure.
6. Open the front cover, and make sure

the PCU holder is correctly installed.
7. Loosen the screws [C].
NOTE: You may wish to only loosen
one set of screws at a time.
This way you can adjust the
skew of either the black or
color PCUs individually.
[C]
8. Put the Color PCU Skew Adjustment

Knob (G0819310) [D] in the opening
[E], and turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise.
NOTE: The scale [F] indicates 20- to
30- steps on the paper.
9. Tighten the screws [C], and close the
right cover.
[E]
[D]
[F]
G081R102.WMF
10. Repeat the steps above until the lines become as aligned as possible (see
step 5).
NOTE: When repeating the adjustment, place the special tool in the opening
first, then loosen the screws [C]. If you loosen the screws first, the
previous adjustment may be lost.
11. Power off the printer, wait several seconds, then power the printer back on.
Confirm adjustment.
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-38
SM
FUSING FAN MOTOR
3.13 FUSING FAN MOTOR

Top cover (! 3.4.4)
[A]: Insulation sheet (if present)
[B]: Fusing fan motor ( x 1, x 1)
G081R960.WMF
[B]
3.14 SENSORS
3.14.1 FRONT AND RIGHT COVER OPEN DETECTION SWITCHES
Front door (! 3.4.1)
Right cover (! 3.4.3)
Top cover (! 3.4.4)
[A]: Interlock switch cover ( x 3)
[B]: Front door open detection sensor
( x 1)
[C]: Safety interlock switches
( x 2, x 2)
NOTE: The connectors are from the
power supply unit and CN35
on the engine control board.
[D]: Interlock switch bracket ( x 1)
[B]
[D]
[C]
[A]
G081R956.WMF
SM
3-39
G081/G120/G121/G122
Replacement &
Adjustment
[A]
SENSORS
3.14.2 BY-PASS TRAY HOME POSITION SENSOR AND BY-PASS

TRAY PAPER DETECTION SENSOR BOARDS
Top cover (! 3.4.4)
Rear covers (! 3.2)
[A]: Paper pickup motor bracket ( x 1)
[B]: Bypass tray sensor cover ( x 2)
[C]: Bypass tray home position sensor
board ( x 1)
[D]: Bypass tray paper detection sensor
board ( x 1)
[D]
[B]
[A]
G081R957.WMF
[C]
3.14.3 WASTE TONER CARTRIDGE FULL SENSOR

Waste toner cartridge
[A]: Waste toner cartridge right holder
( x 2)
[B]: Waste toner cartridge full sensor
board ( x 1)
[B]
[A]
G081R963.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-40
SM
STANDARD PAPER CASSETTE
3.15 STANDARD PAPER CASSETTE
[B]
[C]
Replacement &
Adjustment
[A]: Separation pad unit

NOTE: See the bottom of the paper
cassette.
[B]: Pickup roller unit
NOTE: Unlatch the pickup roller hook
[C] and slide the pickup roller
unit from the pickup roller
shaft [B].
[D]
[A]
G081R964.WMF
[D]: Gear cover (with the sub tray protector [E]

and protector spring [F]) ( x 2)
[G]: Roller position arm
[H]: Cam gear
[I]: Right cam
[J]: Gear spacer
[K]: Idle gear
[L]: Pickup roller with gear
[M]
[M]: Bushing
[K]
[J]
[H]
[F]
[E]
[I]
[L]
[G]
G081R961.WMF
[D]
SM
3-41
G081/G120/G121/G122
[A]: Cassette gear bracket

[B]: Paper exit sensor lever
[B]
[A]
G081R980.WMF
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
Left cam (1 hook)

Cam shaft
Bushing
Upper cassette paper guide ( x 1, 2 [C]
hooks [E])
[F]
[G]
[D]
[E]
G081R962.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-42
SM
[E]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[F]
[G]
[H]
G081R965.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
SM
Holder spring
Bypass tray paper holder
Friction pad
Left paper guide
Right paper guide
Tray cover
Paper tray
Paper tray base
3-43
G081/G120/G121/G122
Replacement &
Adjustment
[C]
[A]: Corner separator

NOTE: Release the corner
separator from the
hook [B], and move it
as shown by the
arrows.
[C]: Cassette base plate
NOTE: Raise the cassette
base plate in the
arrow % direction,
and slide it in the
arrow ' direction.
[D]: Two springs
[A]
[D]
[C]
'
%
Figure-1
&
[A]
"
[B]
[E]: Pinion gear with 2 racks [F] ( x 1)

[G]: Right paper guide
[H]: Left paper guide
G081R966.WMF
[G]
[H]
[F]
[E]
G081R967.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
3-44
SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4.1.1 SUMMARY
1. All SCs are logged.
2. If the problem is related to an electrical circuit board, first disconnect then
reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs.
Troubleshooting
3. If the problem is related to a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before
replacing motors or sensors.
SM
4-1
G081/GG120/G121/G122
4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

NOTE: When replacing the engine control board, remove the EEPROM from the
original engine control board and install it on the new one.
SC
201
230
302
440
441
Symptom
Polygon motor error
After the main switch turns
on, the polygon motor is not
phase-locked in several
seconds.
Possible Cause/Required Action
Incorrect cable connection

Defective engine control board
1. Connect the cable correctly.
2. Replace the engine control board.
3. Replace the laser scanning unit.
4. Check or replace the cable.
V-Sync error
See SC201.
Subscan signals are not
asserted.
Charge or transfer bias error
Charge bias in out of the
Defective PCU charge terminal
normal range.
Defective transfer belt unit bias terminal
Defective terminal springs on bias terminal unit
Incorrect cable connection between high voltage
supply and engine control board
Defective high voltage board
1. Replace the PCU.
2. Replace the transfer belt unit.
3. Replace the bias terminal unit.
5. Replace the high voltage board.
PCU BK motor error
The drive motor of the black Defective gear
PCU is not locked.
Defective gear on transfer belt unit
Voltage between pins 1 and 13 (CN12 on engine
control board) abnormal (not +24V), or pin 11
(CN12 on engine control board) unable to send
motor clock
Defective black PCU drive motor
1. Replace the black PCU.
4. Replace the main drive unit assembly.
PCU (CMY) motor error
The drive motor of the CMY Defective gear
PCU is not locked.
motor clock
Defective CMY PCU drive motor
1. Replace the CMY PCU.
G081/G120/G121/G122
4-2
SM
486
487
530
531
532
SM
Symptom
Belt tension unit cam error
Even though the belt
tension unit tries to return to
its home position several
times, the home position
sensor is not activated.
BK solenoid error
The BK solenoid cannot
drive the black PCU.
Solenoid error
Any of the following
solenoids has caused a
short circuit: changer
solenoid, paper feed
solenoid, toner supply
solenoid.
Fusing fan motor error
The fusing unit fan motor
does not operate.
PSU cooling fan error

The PSU cooling fan does
not operate.
Defective transfer belt unit

Pin 3 (CN25 on engine control board) unable to
send signal
Defective transfer belt tension unit
3. Replace the transfer belt tension unit.
Defective connection between engine control board
(CN21) and BK solenoid
send solenoid control signal
Defective drive unit
1. Connect the cable between the engine control
board (CN21) and BK solenoid correctly.
2. Replace the engine board.
3. Replace the drive unit.
Solenoid drive transistor short-circuited
1. Replace the engine controller board.
2. Replace the defective solenoid.

control board) abnormal (not +24V)
Defective fusing unit fan
2. Replace the fusing unit fan.
Defective PSU cooling fan
2. Replace the PSU cooling fan.
Fusing unit sub-cooling fan (left) error

The fusing unit sub-cooling
fan does not operate.
Defective sub-cooling fan
2. Replace the sub-cooling fan.
4-3
G081/GG120/G121/G122
Troubleshooting
SC
471

SC
543
544
554
580
581
Symptom
Heating belt overheat
The temperature of the
heating belt is out of the
normal range.
Pin 1 (IC6) unable to turns to lower level

Defective IH power supply board
Thermistor short-circuited
Defective cable connection between CN15 and
thermistor
1. Replace the control board.
2. Replace the IH power supply board.
3. Replace the fusing unit.
4. Connect the cable between CN15 and the
thermistor correctly.
Heating belt low temperature error (1)
The fusing unit thermistor in Defective connection between engine control board
the middle of the unit has
(CN15) and fusing unit
detected low temperature.
Defective thermistor
Defective connection between fusing unit and
thermistor
send signal
Defective IH unit or IH power supply board
5. Replace the IH unit or IH power supply board.
6. Connect the cable between the engine board and
fusing unit correctly.
7. Replace the thermistor.
8. Connect the cable between fusing unit and
Heating roller low temperature error (2)
The fusing unit thermistor at See SC544.
the left end of the unit has
detected much lower
temperature than the other
fusing unit thermistor does.
Fusing belt rotation error
The rotation of the fusing
Defective fusing belt, gear, or rotation plate
unit is not normal.
Defective connection of fusing unit connector
Pin 4 (CN15) unable to send 1.4-second (or less)
encoder pulse
board (CN15) and fusing unit correctly.
3. Connect the fusing unit connector correctly.
Fusing unit low voltage error
The voltage applied to the
fusing unit is out of the
Defective thermostat
normal range.
2. Replace the IH unit.
G081/G120/G121/G122
4-4
SM

SC
622
Troubleshooting
680
Symptom
Option paper unit communication error
After the system starts, the
Defective cable connection
communication with the
1. Connect the cable to the paper tray correctly.
paper tray is unexpectedly
interrupted.
EEPROM error
Data is not write to or read
Defective EEPROM (IC5)
from the EEPROM.
1. Replace the EEPROM.
SM
4-5
G081/GG120/G121/G122
CONTROLLER ERROR
4.2
CONTROLLER ERROR
The following table describes the controller error codes. These codes are displayed
at power-on, or after the power-on self diagnostic test, if an error occurs.
Important: Always try turning the main switch off waiting several seconds and then
on and check if the problem persists.
SC
640
641
670
818
819
820
821
822
823
Symptom
Controller to engine communication error.
Checksum error detected
Defective controller
between the controller and
Defective engine board
the engine board.
1. Check the connection between the controller and
the engine board.
2. Replace the engine board if the error is frequent.
3. Replace the controller board if the error is frequent.
Controller to engine communication error.
The controller receives no
response from the engine
Defective engine board
board.
1. Check the connection between the controller and
the engine board.
2. Replace the engine board if the error is frequent.
3. Replace the controller board if the error is frequent.
Engine start-up error
The ready signal from the
Defective engine board.
engine board is not
Replace the engine board.
detected.
System timeout error
System program timeout
error detected.
Replace the controller if it occurs frequently.
Kernel stop error

Unexpected CPU error by
the ASIC/ RAM full
Replace the controller if it occurs frequently.
detected.
Self-diagnostic error CPU
CPU error detected during
self-diagnostic.
Replace the controller if the error is frequent.
Self-diagnostic error - ASIC/CPU
ASIC and CPU timer error
detected during selfReplace the controller if the error is frequent.
diagnostic.
Self-diagnostic error HDD
HDD timeout error detected Poor HDD connection
during self-diagnostic.
Defective HDD
1. Check the HDD connection.
2. Replace the HDD.
Self-diagnostic error NIB
NIB error detected during
self-diagnostic.
G081/G120/G121/G122
Replace the controller.
4-6
SM
SC
824
827
828
829
835
836
837
850
851
853
854
SM
Symptom
Self-diagnostic error NVRAM
NVRAM error detected
Poor NVRAM connection
1. Check if the NVRAM is properly installed.
2. Replace the NVRAM
Self-diagnostic error - standard SDRAM
Standard SDRAM
(memory) error detected
Self-diagnostic error - Flash ROM
Flash ROM error detected
Self-diagnostic error - Optional RAM
Memory RAM error
Poor connection of the optional memory
detected during self Defective memory RAM
diagnostic.
1. Check the connection of the optional memory.
2. Replace the memory DIMM.
Self-diagnostic error - Parallel interface
Parallel interface error
detected during selfReplace the controller.
diagnostic.
Self-diagnostic error - Font ROM
The data in the font ROM
Defective font ROM.
on board is damaged.
1. Turn the main switch off and on.
2. Replace the controller board.
Self-diagnostic error - Optional font ROM
The data in the font ROM
Defective optional ROM-DIMM.
(optional ROM-DIMM) is
damaged.
2. Replace the optional ROM-DIMM.
NIB interface error
NIB interface error
detected.
IEEE1394 interface error
detected.
IEEE802.11b error - card not detected (power-on)
Wireless LAN card not
Poor connection
detected at power-on.
Defective wireless LAN card
1. Check the wireless LAN card connection.
2. Replace the wireless LAN card.
IEEE802.11b error - card not detected (during operation)
Wireless LAN card not
Poor connection
detected during operation.
4-7
G081/GG120/G121/G122
Troubleshooting
CONTROLLER ERROR
CONTROLLER ERROR
SC
855
856
857
860
861
863
864
865
900
Symptom
IEEE802.11b error
Wireless LAN card error
detected.
Poor connection
IEEE802.11b interface board error
Wireless LAN interface
Poor connection
board error detected.
Defective wireless LAN interface board
1. Check the wireless LAN interface board
connection.
2. Replace the interface board.
USB I/F Error
USB interface error
detected.
1. Check the USB connections, make sure that they
are securely connected.
HDD start-up error
HDD initialization error
Defective HDD
detected.
2. Reformat the HDD.
3. Replace the HDD.
HDD: Reboot error
The HDD does not become Loose connection
ready within 30 seconds
Defective HDD
after the power is supplied
to the HDD.
2. Check the connection between the HDD and
controller.
3. Replace the HDD.
4. Replace the controller.
HDD data unable to read
Data stored in the HDD
Defective HDD
cannot be properly read.
3. Replace the HDD.
HDD data access error
HDD access error detected. Defective HDD
Replace the HDD.
HDD access error
An error detected during
Defective HDD
HDD operation.
Replace the HDD.
Electric counter error
Abnormal data is stored in
Defective NVRAM
the counters.
2. Check the connection between the NVRAM and
controller.
3. Replace the NVRAM.
G081/G120/G121/G122
4-8
SM
CONTROLLER ERROR
991
998
999
Symptom
Unexpected software error
detected.
detected, which does not
affect operation of the
machine.
Application start error
No applications start within
60 seconds after the power
is turned on.
Software update error

Software updating failed.
The machine does not stop and the SC code is not
displayed. The machine automatically recovers.
However, the SC code is logged in the engine
summary sheet (SMC).
Loose connection of RAM-DIMM, ROM-DIMM
Software problem
2. Check if the RAM-DIMM and ROM-DIMM are
properly connected.
3. Reinstall the controller system firmware.
Controller DIP SW1 setting incorrect.
Defective software on IC card.
Controller software download error.
1. Try downloading the controller firmware again.
NOTE: If a problem always occurs in a specific situation (for example, same printer
driver settings, same image file), the problem may be caused by a software
error. In this case, send the following data and information to your product
specialist or regional representative.
Symptom/Possible causes/Action taken

Summary sheet (SP mode 1 Service, [Print Summary])
SMC All (SP5-990-002)
Logged data (SP5-990-004)
Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program
address where the problem is logged.)
Image file which causes the problem, if possible
SM
4-9
G081/GG120/G121/G122
Troubleshooting
SC
990
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
4.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

NOTE: When replacing the engine control board, remove the NVRAM from the
4.3.1 BLANK PRINT

Symptom
No image is printed.
Possible cause
Defective laser scanning unit
Defective PCU
Defective transfer belt
tension unit
Defective toner cartridge
drive unit
agitator
Incorrect action of transfer
roller
Defective high voltage
supply board
Defective engine control
board
Necessary actions
Replace the laser scanning
unit.
Replace the PCU.
Replace the transfer belt
unit.
tension unit.
Replace the toner cartridge
drive unit.
Replace the toner cartridge.
Check the guide and the
transfer roller.
Replace the high voltage
supply board.
Replace the engine control
board.
4.3.2 ALL-BLACK PRINT

Symptom
All the paper is black.
Possible cause
Incorrectly installed PCU
Defective PCU
Defective high voltage supply
board
board
Defective main board
G081/G120/G121/G122
4-10
Necessary actions
Install the PCU correctly.
Replace the PCU.
supply board.
unit.
board.
Replace the main board.
SM
4.3.3 MISSING CMY COLOR

Symptom
C, M, or Y is missing.
Possible cause
Defective PCU
Loose connection between
printer cartridge and engine
control board
Transfer belt not contacting
PCU
Defective cable on belt
tension unit
Defective PCU motor
board
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
Replace the connection
spring.
Check the belt tension unit.
Replace the belt tension unit.
Replace the PCU motor.
board.
Symptom
Possible cause
Printed images are too weak. Loose connection between
transfer roller and high
voltage supply unit
Dust in the laser beam path
PCU
Defective PCU
Defective transfer roller
Defective fusing unit
board
SM
4-11
Necessary actions
Check the connection
between the transfer roller
and the high voltage supply
unit.
Clean the laser beam path.
Replace the PCU.
Repair the transfer roller.
Replace the fusing unit.
board.
G081/GG120/G121/G122
Troubleshooting
4.3.4 LIGHT PRINT
4.3.5 REPEATED SPOTS OR LINES ON PRINTS

Symptom
The same spots or lines
appear at regular intervals.
At intervals of 31.4 mm
(1.236 inches)
(1.417 inches)
At intervals of 38 mm
(1.496 inches)
(1.759 inches)
(1.795 inches)
(1.82 inches)
(2.721 inches)
(2.968 inches)
(2.968 inches)
(2.5 inches)
(3.740 inches)
(5.6 inches)
Possible cause
Necessary actions
Defective charge roller
Replace the PCU.
Defective belt transfer roller

unit.
Replace the PCU
Defective development roller

Defective transfer belt drive
roller
Defective waste toner
disposal screw
Defective registration roller

unit.
Replace the PCU.
Replace the registration

roller.
Replace the transfer roller.
Defective OPC drum
Replace the PCU.
Defective belt tension roller

Defective toner supply roller

unit.
Replace the PCU.
Defective pressure roller
Defective fusing belt
4.3.6 DARK VERTICAL LINE IN PRINT

Symptom
A dark line appears. The line
is parallel to the paper feed
direction.
Of one CMY color
Of any color (not C, M,
or Y)
Possible cause
Defective PCU
G081/G120/G121/G122
4-12
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.

unit.
SM
4.3.7 WHITE HORIZONTAL LINES OR BANDS

Symptom
White lines or bands appear
in images of all toner colors.
They are vertical to the
paper feed direction.
Possible cause
Defective PCU
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
unit.
4.3.8 MISSING PARTS OF IMAGES

Symptom
Some parts of images are
missing.
Possible cause
Defective PCU
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
unit.
Symptom
Possible cause
Necessary actions
Backgrounds are too dense.
Of one CMYK color
Defective PCU
Replace the PCU.
Of more than one CMYK Defective high voltage supply Replace the high voltage
color
board
supply board.
4.3.10 PARTIAL CMY COLOR DOTS

Symptom
Unexpected dots of the
same color appear at
irregular intervals.
Possible cause
Defective PCU
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
unit.
4.3.11 DARK IRREGULAR STREAKS ON PRINTS

Symptom
Unexpected streaks appear
at irregular intervals.
SM
Possible cause
4-13
Necessary actions
unit.
G081/GG120/G121/G122
Troubleshooting
4.3.9 DIRTY BACKGROUND
4.3.12 CMY COLOR IRREGULAR STREAKS

Symptom
Unexpected streaks of the
Possible cause
Defective PCU
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
unit.
Possible cause
Defective PCU
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
4.3.13 GHOSTING
Symptom
The same or similar image
appears two or more times.
They get weaker and
weaker.
NOTE: 1) Ghosting is sometimes unavoidable. This is because the charge is not

completely quenched while the transfer belt makes one rotation.
2) Older toner cartridges can result in ghosting issues.
4.3.14 UNFUSED OR PARTIALLY FUSED PRINTS

Symptom
not fused very well.
Possible cause
Nonstandard paper in use
Incorrect media type mode
Necessary actions
Use recommended paper.
Select an appropriate media
mode.
4.3.15 IMAGE SKEW

Symptom
Images are skewed
G081/G120/G121/G122
Possible cause
Incorrect installation of paper
Incorrect paper guide
position
Defective intermediate or
registration roller
roller
board
Defective corner separator
Defective spring
4-14
Necessary actions
Install the paper correctly.
Adjust the paper guide
correctly.
Repair the paper feed unit.
Check the transfer roller.
board.
Replace the corner separator
Replace the spring
SM
4.3.16 BACKGROUND STAIN

Symptom
The reverse side of the
paper is not clean.
Possible cause
Unclean transfer roller
Unclean paper path
Unclean intermediate or
registration roller
Unclean fusing unit exit
Necessary actions
Clean the transfer roller.
Clean the paper path.
Clean the intermediate or
registration roller.
Clean the fusing unit exit.
4.3.17 NO PRINTING ON PAPER EDGE

Possible cause
Defective PCU
PCU
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
unit.
4.3.18 IMAGE NOT CENTERED WHEN IT SHOULD BE

Symptom
Images do not come to the
center.
SM
Possible cause
position
Incorrect margin setting
board
4-15
Necessary actions
correctly.
Adjust the margin setting.
board.
G081/GG120/G121/G122
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Images are not printed in the
areas around the paper
edges.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.4.1 SENSORS
No.
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
Signal Name
Active
CN No./
Pin No.
(Switch)
PIKFUSEK
Analog
CN6/1
Black PCU
PIKFUSEYMC
Analog
CN6/3
CMY PCU
DOPEN
CN7/1
Right side of Chassis

(front side)
NEMPK
CN10/1
NEMPC
CN10/2
NEMPY
CN10/7
NEMPM
CN10/8
TCDOPEN
CN11/1
Top Cover
YMCZPH
CN13/2
KZPH
CN13/3
OPC Cam Home

Position Sensor Board
on Main Drive Unit
ITHOME1
CN14/2
FSRFUSE
CN15/1
TH1HIGH
TH2HIGH
Analog
Analog
CN15/2
CN15/3
ROTATE
CN15/5
NFSRJAM
CN15/6
EXITFULL
CN17/1
Position
18
BK PCU Virgin Sensor

Board
CMY PCU Virgin
Sensor Board
Front/Right Door Open
Detection Switch
Black Toner Empty
Sensor
Cyan Toner Empty
Sensor
Yellow Toner Empty
Sensor
Magenta Toner Empty
Sensor
Toner Cartridge
Access Cover
Detection Switch
CMY PC Home
Position Sensor
Black PC Home
Position Sensor
Accumulator Cam
Home Position Sensor
Fusing Unit Detection
Sensor
Thermistor 1
Thermistor 2
Heat Roller Rotation
Sensor
Fusing Jam (Paper
Ejection) Sensor
Paper Full Sensor
19
Paper Jam Sensor
NEXTJAM
CN17/2
20
Paper Empty Sensor
STPNON
CN18/2
21
Registration Sensor
NREGSEN
CN18/3
MPTHOME
CN23/3
MPPSEN
CN23/5
TBFUL
CN27/1
By Power Switch
SNS_L
CN27/4
Color Registration
Sensor Board
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
22
23
24
25
MPT Home Position

Sensor
MPT Paper Empty
Sensor
Waste Toner Full
Sensor
Left Side Color
Registration Sensor
G081/G120/G121/G122
4-16
Toner Empty Sensor

Board on Toner
Cartridge Drive Unit
Accumulator Tension
Unit
Fusing Unit
Paper Full/Jam Sensor

Board in paper exit
block
Paper
Empty/Registration
Sensor Board on
Paper Feed Unit
Left side of Chassis
(front side)
SM

Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
31
Waste Toner Detection

Sensor
Right Side Color
Registration Sensor
Paper Size Size 1
Switch
Paper Size Size 2
Switch
Paper Cassette
Detection Switch
Temperature Sensor
32
Humidity Sensor
26
27
28
29
30
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Front Door/Right
Cover Open Sensor
(interlock switch)
ADU Detection Sensor
ADU Jam Detection
Sensor
Paper Jam Sensor
Paper Empty Sensor
Option Cassette Paper
Size 1 Switch
Size 2 Switch
Option Cassette
Detection Switch
Signal Name
Active
CN No./
Pin No.
(Switch)
WTB_NON
CN27/6
SNS_R
CN27/8
STPSZ1
CN28/1
STPSZ2
CN28/2
STNON
CN28/4
TEMP
Analog
CN29/1
HUM
Analog
CN29/3
+5VLD
CN35/1
ADUNON
CN39/2
NADUJAM
CN39/5
ACFJAM
ACFPNON
H
H
CN3201/2
CN3201/3
STPSZ1
SW1
STPSZ2
SW2
STNON
SW3
Position
Rear side of Chassis

(paper size detector)
Humidity/Temperature
Sensor Board at left
side of Chassis
(front)
Inner Cover (at Front
side of Chassis)
Option Feeder
NOTE: The Active column refers to the voltage-state present when the device
(sensor, switch, etc) is performing its intended function.
For example: item 3 Front/Right Door Open Detection Switch Active H.
This indicates that when the Right Door is Open this device is active and
the voltage state at CN7/1 will be High, in this case 5 volts dc.
If you require the Ready condition values refer to the G081/G092
Connector Layout Tables located on the back of your Point-to-Point.
SM
4-17
G081/GG120/G121/G122
Troubleshooting
No.
BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
4.5 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

Power supply unit
Fuse
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Rating
120 V
220 240 V
8 A/125 V
4 A/250 V
4 A/125 V
4 A/250 V
4 A/125 V
4 A/250 V
4 A/125 V
4 A/250 V
4 A/125 V
4 A/250 V
4 A/125 V
4 A/250 V
4 A/125 V
4 A/250 V
Symptom when turning on the main switch

No response
No response
No response
No response
No response
No response
No response
High voltage unit

Fuse
IP101
Rating
120 V
220 240 V
1.5 A/50 V
1.5 A/50 V
Symptom when turning on the main switch

No response
4.6 LEDS
No LEDs are used for this model (except for the Network Interface).
G081/G120/G121/G122
4-18
SM
SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
CAUTION
Before accessing the service menu, do the following:
Confirm that there is no print data in the printer buffer (the Data In LED
must not be lit or blinking).
If there is some data in the buffer, wait until all data has been printed.
5.1.1 SERVICE MODE OPERATION

NOTE: The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only so
that they can properly maintain product quality. If this mode is used by
anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be
deleted or settings might be changed. In such case, product quality cannot
be guaranteed any more.
On Line
Menu
Escape
SYSTEMver V.X.xx
1.Service
#Enter
Error
Data In
Service
Tables
Power
G081S001.WMF
Entering the Service Mode

There are two ways to enter the service mode.
Method 1: Turn the machine on while pressing the On Line key and Escape key
together until SYSTEMver V.X.xx 1. Service appears on the display.
NOTE: If you switch the machine off, any jobs stored on the hard disk using the
sample print and protected print features will be deleted.
Check first with the user tools to see if there are any jobs stored using
these features
(Menu key - Sample Print, or Protected Print).
Method 2: Press the Up/Down arrow keys together for about 5 seconds, release,
then immediately press the Enter key.
The same message as described in Method 1 is displayed.
NOTE: The machine automatically goes off line when you enter the service mode.
SM
5-1
G081/G120/G121/G122
Accessing the Required Program

Use the Up/Down arrow keys to scroll through the menu listing.
1. Service Menu: Controller service modes
2. Engine Maintenance: Engine service modes
3: End: Exit service mode
To select an item, press the Enter key. Then the sub-menu will appear.
Scroll through the sub menu items using the Up/Down arrow keys.
To go back to a higher menu level, press the Escape key.
NOTE: Certain SP modes can also be selected (accessed) from the operation
panel by pressing: Enter, Escape, then the Menu key in sequence,
(not together). These certain SP modes are generally related to the various
communication options. For Example: SP5-851-1 [Bluetooth] and SP5-8441 [USB] can be accessed using the procedure described here.
Inputting a Value or Setting for a Service Program

Access the required program mode as explained above. The setting appearing on
the display is the current setting.
Select the required setting using the Up/Down arrow keys, then press the Enter
key. The previous value remains if the Enter key is not pressed.
Exiting Service Mode

Select 3. End from the service mode main menu, then press the Enter key.
NOTE: To make the settings effective, turn the main switch off and on after exiting
service mode.
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-2
SM
Rev. 10/2003
PRINTER CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE
5.2 PRINTER CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE

NOTE: In the Function/[Setting] column:
The related pop-up screen name and function name (if any) appear in
parenthesis following the function description.
Comments are in italics.
The setting range is enclosed in brackets, with the default setting written
in bold.
An asterisk (*) after the mode number means that this modes value is
stored in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM reset, all these SP modes will be
returned to their factory settings.
DFU stands for Design/Factory Use only. Values marked DFU should
not be changed.
FA stands for Factory Adjustment only. Values marked FA should not be
changed.
The Printer Controller is referred to as the Main Control Board.
5.2.1 SERVICE MENU-CONTROLLER SERVICE MODES

(1. SERVICE)
Function / [Setting]
(See Bit Switch Settings.)
Service
Tables
Mode No.
(Class 1 and 2)
[Bit Switch] SP1001
1
Bit Switch 1
2
Bit Switch 2
3
Bit Switch 3
4
Bit Switch 4
5
Bit Switch 5
6
Bit Switch 6
7
Bit Switch 7
8
Bit Switch 8
[Clear Setting] SP1003
1
Clear Setting
Initializes the settings in the System menu of the

user tools.
[Print Summary] SP1004

1
Print Summary
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all

the controller settings).
[DispVersion] Display Version SP1005
1
Disp Version
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
[ToneCtlSet] Toner Control Setting SP1101
1
Tone (Factory)
Recalls the gamma settings. Select the factory,
previous, or current setting.
2
Tone (Prev.)
3
Tone (Current)
[ToneCtlSet] Toner Control Setting SP1102
1
*1200 x 1200 Photo
Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer
gamma adjustment. When selecting a print mode,
2
600 x 600 Text
an asterisk (*) is displayed in the front of the mode.
3
1200 x 600 Text
4
600 x 600 Photo
5
1200 x 600 Photo
SM
5-3
G081/G120/G121/G122

Mode No.
Function / [Setting]
(Class 1 and 2)
[PrnColorSheet] Print Color Sheet SP1103
1
ToneCtlSheet
Prints the test page to check the color balance
before and after the gamma adjustment.
2
ColorChart
[TonerCtlValue] Toner Control Value SP1104
1
Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 1
Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected
with the Tone Ctl Set setting.
[0 to 255 / 16 / 1/step]
2
[0 to 255 / 32 / 1/step]
3
[0 to 255 / 48 / 1/step]
4
[0 to 255 / 64 / 1/step]
5
[0 to 255 / 80 / 1/step]
6
[0 to 255 / 96 / 1/step]
7
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1/step]
8
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
9
[0 to 255 / 144 / 1/step]
10 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
[0 to 255 / 160 / 1/step]
10
[0 to 255 / 176 / 1/step]
11
[0 to 255 / 192 / 1/step]
12
[0 to 255 / 208 / 1/step]
13
[0 to 255 / 224 / 1/step]
14
[0 to 255 / 240 / 1/step]
15
[ToneCtlSave] Toner Control Value Save SP1105
1
ToneCtlSave
Stores the print gamma adjusted with the Toner Ctl
Value menu item as the current setting. Before the
machine stores the new current setting, it moves
the data currently stored as the current setting to
the previous setting memory storage location.
[Toner Limit] SP1106
1
TonerLimitPhot
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image
development.
[100 to 400 / 260 / 1%/step]
2
TonerLimitText
[100 to 400 / 260 / 1%/step]
[FactoryTestPrt] Factory Test Page Print SP1107
1
Image Density
Prints the image density test page for the factory
line.
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-4
SM
Bit Switch Settings

NOTE: These bit switches are all for use in Japan only.
How to Change Bit Switch Settings
1. Select 1. Service.
NOTE: ver V.x.xx. indicates the machines
firmware version.
SYSTEMver V.X.xx
1.Service
G081S501.WMF
2. Press the Enter key 2 times.
SP1001-001
Bit Switch 1
G081S502.WMF
3. Press the up arrow key or down arrow key to

display bit switches 1 through 4.
SP1001-004
Bit Switch 4
G081S503.WMF
4. Press the Enter key.
Sw#4
bit0
00000000
_
G081S504.WMF

select a column.
Sw#4
bit3
00000000
_
6. Press the Enter key. The current value

appears in the column.
Sw#4
bit3
00000000
0
G081S506.WMF

change the value.
Sw#4
bit3
00000000
1
G081S507.WMF
8. Press the Enter key. The changed value is

stored.
Sw#4
bit3
00001000
_
G081S508.WMF
9. Press the escape key 3 times.
SYSTEMver V.0.24
1.Service
10. Select 3. End.
G081S509.WMF
11. Power the printer off, and after several

seconds, power back on, in order to activate
settings.
SM
5-5
SYSTEMver V.X.xx
3.End
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables
G081S505.WMF
Rev. 10/2003
Bit Switch 1 (Japan only)

Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Function
Key protect [0: Not activated, 1: Activated] DFU
(Not used.) DFU
(Not used.) DFU
(Not used.) DFU
(Not used.) DFU
(Not used.) DFU
(Not used.) DFU
Emulation print area (RPCS only). [0: Not printed, 1: Printed]DFU
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit Switch 2
Bit
1
3
Function
Overlap job mode (njob) [0: Not activated, 1: Activated] DFU
PDL Sniffing - See PUB(C)-051 for details. [0: Enabled, 1: Disabled]
Default
0
0
Bit Switch 3
Not used
Bit Switch 4 (Japan only)

Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Function
Background areas of simple graphics (RPDL, R16, R55, R98) [0: Not
painted, 1: Painted] DFU
Unknown 2-byte characters (R98) [0: Cleared, 1: Not cleared] DFU
Specifies portrait/landscape reset (R16) [0: Reset by the reset
command, 1: Not reset by the reset command] DFU
Changes line thickness adjustment mode [0: Mode 1, 1: Mode 2] DFU
Displays or not displays error messages No. 84 through DF (RPDL,
R16, R55, R98, GL/GL2). [0: Displays, 1: Not displays] DFU
Displays or not displays error messages No. E1 and higher (RPDL, R16,
R55, R98, GL/GL2). [0: Displays, 1: Not displays] DFU
Changes the tray setting (GL/GL2). [0: LP, 1: MFP] DFU
Changes the default tray. [0: LP (Tray 1), 1: MFP (System default)] DFU
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-6
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SM
Gamma Adjustment
NOTE: To correct color quality problems, clean and/or replace related parts first.
Then, if adjustments are required, follow the procedure in this section.
Overview
To adjust the printer gamma:
Select the print mode that needs calibrating
Print a color calibration test sheet
Make the gradation scales on the printout smooth from the lowest to the
highest density. Adjust the CMY gradation scale at the top of the chart by
balancing the density of the C, M, and Y gradation scales the CMY gray
scale should change smoothly from minimum to maximum, and there should
be no coloration.
The color adjustment sheet is as follows.
[C]
[A]
G081S914.PCX
For each color, you can adjust 15 density levels (adjustment points) (example [A])
between 0 (lowest density) [B] and 255 (highest density) [C]. For each adjustment
point, you can adjust the density between values 0 and 255.
SM
5-7
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables
[B]
The gradation scales marked Default are printed according to the default gamma
settings in the flash ROM in the controller. The gamma adjustment changes the
densities at the adjustable points within the gradation scale. The gradation scale
marked Current shows the current settings.
During the adjustment procedure, compare the Current gradation scale with the
Default. Select the density for each of the 15 adjustable points, excluding points 0
and 255, from the Default gradation scale.
The NVRAM holds three sets of controller gamma settings:
Those saved this time: ToneCtlSet - Tone (Current)
Those saved in the previous adjustment: ToneCtlSet - Tone (Prev)
The factory settings: ToneCtlSet - Tone (Factory)
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter the controller service mode.
2. Use the down arrow key to select ToneCtlSet (there are two of these in the
menu; select the second one SP1102) and press the Enter key.
3. Use the up/down key to select the mode that requires calibrating (Press the
Enter key to select), then press the Escape key until you get back to the
controller service mode menu.
4. Use the down arrow key to select SP1103 PrnColorSheet and press the Enter
key.
5. Use the up/down key to select SP1103-001 ToneCtlSheet (normally this is
displayed by default) and press the Enter key.
6. When Execute? is displayed, press the Enter key to print out the color
calibration test sheet.
7. When Execute OK is displayed, press the Escape key 2 times to exit from the
menu. (You are then returned to the PrnColorSheet in the controller service
menu.)
8. Use the down arrow key to select ToneCtlValue and press the Enter key.
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-8
SM
9. Carefully examine the printed Color Calibration Test Sheet and determine
where along the test sheets 15 adjustment points an adjustment is necessary.
Use the up/down arrow key to select the setting you are adjusting, then press
the enter key. The three digits in the display (example 016) indicate a position
on the color calibration test sheet.
Color Calibration
Test Sheet
Adjustment Point 16
Adjustment Point 32
Adjustment Point 48
:
:
Adjustment Point 208
See Set Black 1 ~ 15
NOTE: The indicated

Adjustment Points
on the gradation
scale are also the
Default Values.
Adjust the color density at each of the 15 adjustment points (default values 16
to 240) for each of the four colors.
NOTE: To decide what density value to input, do the following.
1) Look at the color adjustment sheet.
2) For the color you are adjusting, look at the gradation scale entitled
Default.
3) Go along the scale until you reach the density that you wish to
adjust.
4) Read off the value on the scale and store it in the machine.
a) Use the up/down key to move the cursor along the three-digit
display, then press the Enter key.
b) Use the up/down key to change the digit at the cursor, then press
the Enter key.
c) Press the Escape key to exit from the menu.
5) If necessary, repeat this procedure for all 15 adjustment points for
each color and black.
10. When the density setting is complete for all colors, print out a color adjustment
sheet again and make sure that the gradation scale for each printed color is
smooth and that the CMY gradation scale is gray. Repeat the adjustment if
there is an anomaly (normally, repeat this procedure 3 to 5 times).
NOTE: Adding a new value (0 to 255) to any of the adjustment points will not
change the calibration sheets scale. In other words, the density value
entered for any adjustment point is not shown numerically on the gradation
scale.
11. When the adjustment results are satisfactory, do the following:
1) Use SP1105 ToneCtlSave in the controller service menu, to store the new
settings in the controller.
SM
5-9
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables
Operation Panel
Display
Set Black 1
Set Black 2
Set Black 3
:
:
Set Black 13
Set Black 14
Set Black 15
Set Cyan 1 ~ 15
Set Magenta 1 ~ 15
Set Yellow 1 ~ 15
2) Reset the controller (press the [Job Reset] key when the machine is off
line) to use the new settings.
NOTE: The new settings will not be saved in the controller NVRAM unless you
reset the controller.
Entering SP1101 ToneCtlSet allows you to select the Factory (SP1101001), Previous (SP1101-002) or Current (SP1101-001) controller
settings.
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-10
SM
PRINTER ENGINE SERVICE MODE
5.3 PRINTER ENGINE SERVICE MODE

An asterisk (*) after the mode number means that this modes value is stored in the
NVRAM. A numeral or pound symbol (#) means that this mode's value is stored in
the EEPROM. If you do a RAM reset, all these SP modes will be returned to their
factory settings.
5.3.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE (2. ENGINE)
1
001
#
002
#
003
#
105
#
SM
Mode No.
Function / [ Setting ]
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Lead Edge Reg.] Leading Edge Registration
Process Speed
1
TOP 100
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the
registration clutch operation timing for each mode.
2
TOP 124
[ 0 ~ 60 / 30 / 2 line/step ]
3
TOP 50
[S-to-S Reg.] Side-to-Side Registration
1
Paper Tray 1
Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser
main scan start position for each mode.
2
By-pass Table
[ 0 ~ 30 / 15 / 2 pixel/step ]
3
Paper Tray 2
4
Paper Tray 3
5
Duplex
[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle
(Process Speed, Tray)
1
100 Tray1
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration
roller by changing the paper feed timing.
2
100 Bypass
[ 0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 mm/step ]
3
100 Tray2
4
100 Tray3
5
100 Dpx
6
124 Tray1
[ 0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1.24 mm/step ]
7
124 Bypass
8
124 Tray2
9
124 Tray3
10 124 Dpx
11 50 Tray1
[ 0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 mm/step ]
12 50 Bypass
13 50 Tray2
14 50 Tray3
15 50 Dpx
[Fusing Temp.] Fusing Temperature
(Paper Type, Process Speed)
Paper Type N: Normal, Thin OHP. Card Envelope Label Coated Paper
Japanese PostCard(DFU)
1
N 100
Adjusts the fusing belt temperature for the printing ready
condition. The fusing temperature is depended on the
2
N 124
paper type.
3
N 50
Ready temperature = (Fusing temperature +
4
Thin 100
Temperature specified in this SP mode.
5
Thin 124
6
Thin 50
[ 0 ~ 20 / 10 / 1oC/step ]
7
OHP
8
Card
1-105-12, 13: DFU (used in Japan only)
9
Envelope
10 Coated Paper
5-11
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables
SP1-XXX (Feed)
1
105
#
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
11 Label
12 PostCard Doc
13 PostCard Adr
paper type.
[ 0 ~ 20 / 10 / 1oC/step ]
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-12
SM
SP2-XXX (Drum)
201
#
208
#
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Dev. Bias] Development Bias ([Color], Process Speed)
1
[K] Over All
Adjusts the development bias.
2
[C] Over All
[ 0 ~ 20 / 10 / 1 V/step ] DFU
3
[M] Over All
4
[Y] Over All
5
[K] 100
6
[C] 100
7
[M] 100
8
[Y] 100
9
[K] 124
10 [K] 50 600dpi
11 [C] 50 600dpi
12 [M] 50 600dpi
13 [Y] 50 600dpi
14 [K] 50 1200dpi
15 [C] 50 1200dpi
16 [M] 50 1200dpi
17 [Y] 50 1200dpi
18 OHP [K] 50
19 OHP [C] 50
20 OHP [M] 50
21 OHP [Y] 50
[Toner Control]
1
Set Flag
Sets the toner control flag. The flag having been set, the
toner is supplied to the development unit when the main
power switch is turned off and on, or the machine
recovers from the energy saver mode.
After the toner has been supplied to the development
unit, the toner control flag is reset (the flag is turned off).
310
#
SM
[Transfer Bias] Transfer Bias

( Paper Type, Process Speed, Tray)
Paper Type N: Normal, Thin, OHP, Card, Envelope, Coated Paper, Label, PostCard
Tray B: By-pass Tray Postcard DFU (used in Japan only)
1
N 100
Adjusts the transfer roller bias for paper type and each
print mode.
2
N 124
[ 0 ~ 30 / 15 / 63.16 V/step ]
3
N 50
4
Thin 100
5
Thin 124
6
Thin 50
7
OHP B
8
Card B
9
Envelop 1 B
10 Coated Paper B
11 Label B
12 PostCard Doc
(Postcard Document)
13 PostCard Adr
(Postcard address)
30 Other 1 100
31 Other 1 124
32 Other 1 50
5-13
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables
2
310
#
33
34
35
36
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Other 2 100
Other 2 124
Other 2 50
Envelop 2 B
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-14
SM
SP5-XXX (Mode)
009*
024*
045*
046*
049*
305*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Language]
1
Display Language
[mm/inch display]
1
mm/inch display
[Counter Method]
1
Counter Method
[RomUpdate] ROM Update

1
ROM Update
[LCDcontrast]
1
LCD contrast
[Energy Saver]
1
Enable/Disable
SM
Auto Off Time
Selects the language for the operation panel.
After changing the setting, turn the main switch off and
on for initialization.
[2 ~ 16 / 2 / 1 /step]
2: British
3: American
4: French
5: German
6: Italian
7: Spanish
8: Dutch
9: Norwegian
10: Danish
11: Swedish
12: Polish
13: Portuguese
14: Hungarian
15: Czech
16: Finnish
Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.
0: mm (Europe/Asia)
1: inch (USA)
Switches the counter display.
The setting can only be changed once.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Developments
1: Prints
Enables or disables the ROM Update utility. When
enabled, this utility will be displayed in the user program
mode. DFU
[0 or 1 / 1 / ]
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Adjusts the contrast of LCD.
[10 ~ 1F / 25 / 1/step]
Activates energy saver level 2.

[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Enables
1: Disables
[180 ~ 14400 / 3600 / 60 s/step]
5-15
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables

Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
401* [ULimitAutoSet] User Limited Auto Set
14 ULimitAutoSet
Activates the auto user code registration function (prints
are counted and logged for each user code and the
counts can be viewed with SmartNetMonitor).
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step]0: Inactivated
1: Activated
404 [UCodeCtrClr] Use Code Counter Clear
UcodeCtrClr
Clear all counters for users.
[0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step]
801 [Memory Clear]
1
All
Clears the settings from the NVRAM and initializes the
settings.
[0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2
Engine Setting
Clears all the engine settings and counters.
Engine settings and engine counters can be cleared
independently with SP5-998-001 and 002.
[0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3
SCS (System Control
Clears the system settings.
Service)
[0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4
IMH (Image Memory
Clears IMH data. DFU
Handler)
[0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step]
5
MCS (Memory Control Clears MCS data. DFU
Service)
[0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step]
MCS is for network settings.
8
PRT
Clears the user tool settings.
[0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step]
11 NCS
Clears the network settings.
[0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step]
803 [Input Check]
See section 5.3.2.
804 [Output Check]
See section 5.3.3.
808 [Destination] Destination Code Display
1
Destination
Displays the destination code.
[ 0 = JP, 1 = NA, 2 = EU, 3 = AS ]
811 [Serial Number] Serial Number Display
2
DispCntl SN (Display
Display the machine serial number
Controller Serial
Number)
3
DisEng SN (Display
Display the mechanical engine serial number
Engine Serial Number)
4
SetEng SN (Set
Set the mechanical engine serial number when the
#
Engine Serial Number) EEPROM on the engine control board is replaced.
812* [FAX TEL No.]
2
FAX TEL No.
Sets the fax or telephone number for a service
representative by using the enter key and the down
arrow key.
[0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step]
Both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input.
Rev. 05/2004
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-16
SM
5
828*
832
833
839
840
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Network] Job spool settings/ Interface selection for Ethernet and wireless LAN
66 HD Job Clear
Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at power
on.
0: Data is cleared
1: Automatically printed
67 Job Spool (LPR)
Job spool on/off (LPR).
0: Job spool off
1: Job spool on
68 Job Spool (IPP)
Job spool on/off (IPP).
0: Job spool off
1: Job spool on
71 Primary I/F
Interface selection for the Ethernet or wireless LAN when
both interfaces are available.
0: Ethernet
1: IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
Note: This setting is same as the user mode setting
LAN Type in the Network Setup of the Host Interface
menu.
72 Current I/F
Displays the current interface setting (Ethernet or
wireless LAN).
[HDD Init] HDD Initialization
1
HDD Init.
Initializes the hard disk.
[0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0 /step]
Use this SP mode only for hard disk error recovery.
[Job log ON/OFF]
1
Job log ON/OFF
Not Used. Do not change this setting.
Note: The Job Log cannot be stored in the HDD, even if
this SP is changed to Job Log ON.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
[IEEE1394]
7
Cycle Master
DFU
8
BCR mode
DFU
9
IRM 1394a Check
DFU
10 Unique ID
DFU
11 Logout
DFU
12 Login
DFU
13 Login MAX
DFU
[IEEE802.11b]
6
Channel Max
Sets the maximum value for the wireless LAN channel
adjustment. DFU
[1 ~ 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
USA: 1 to 11
Note: Do not change the setting, or the machine may be
out of compliance with local regulations.
5-17
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Channel Min
11
WEP key number
5
840
844
851
[USB] USB settings

1
Transfer Rate
2
Vendor ID
3
Product ID
4
Dev Release Num
[Bluetooth]
1
Mode
Sets the minimum value for the wireless LAN channel
adjustment. DFU
[1 ~ 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
USA: 1 to 11
Note: Do not change the setting, or the machine may be
out of compliance with local regulations.
Selects the WEP key.

[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
Adjusts the USB transfer rate.
HS/FS: High speed/Full speed auto adjust
(480Mbps/12Mbps)
FS Fixation: Full speed (12Mbps fixed)
Do not change the setting unless there is a data transfer
error using the USB high speed mode.
Displays the vendor ID. DFU
Displays the product ID. DFU
Displays the development release version number. DFU
Select the Bluetooth mode.
0: Public Mode
1: Private Mode
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
907*
[Plug/Play] Plug and Play

1
Plug/Play
917
#
[Printable Area]
1
Extended
920
#
[Pre Heat Mode]

1
Pre Heat Mode
G081/G120/G121/G122
Specifies the Plug and Play setting.

[0 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: RICOH
1: SAVIN
2: GESTETNER
3: NRG
4: LANIER
Enlarges the width of the printable area.
The sides of images are sometimes not printed even if
Wide-A4 is selected with PCL. Set this SP mode to 1 to
enlarge the printable area, but the quality of the image
will be slightly poorer.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: Off, 1: On
This feature warms the fusing belt when in standby
mode to reduce the first page print time.
[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: On, 1: Off
5-18
SM
5
930
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Meter Charge]
1
On/Off
Enable or disable meter-charge mode.
Important: Turn the main switch off/on after changing
this setting.
On: Enabled
OFF: Disabled
"Replace Maintenance Kit" is not displayed on the
operation panel when the PM counter runs out (the
technician replaces the maintenance kit items)
The meter charge counter is shown immediately after
the Menu key is pressed.
The technician must reset the PM counter after
replacing the fusing unit.
"Replace Maintenance Kit" is displayed on the
user replaces the maintenance kit items)
The meter charge counter is not shown when the
Menu key is pressed.
The PM counter resets automatically after the user
replaces the fusing unit.
945
946
970
SM
MenteStyle
(Maintenance Style)
[PlainPaperType]
1
Tray1
2
Tray2
3
Tray3
6
Bypass tray
[EnvelopeType]
1
Bypass Tray
[DebugSerial]
1
DebugSerial
Year Contract / Click Charge / M-Pac

Defines whether a tray contains normal or thin paper,
when the user tool setting for the tray is set to plain.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Yes (Thin)
1: No (Normal)
The user tool setting defines whether each tray
contains normal, thin, or OHP. SP5-945 defines
what normal means for each tray (either normal or
thin).
The paper thickness terminology reflects Japanese
market conditions.
Normal (plain): Use this for thin paper
Middle thick: Use this for normal paper
Thick: Use this for paper heavier than 105 g/m2 (28
lb)
Selects the default envelope type from "Envelope 1
(default)" or "Envelope 2".
[0 ~ 0xff / 0x00 / 0 /step] DFU
5-19
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables
5
990*
991
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[SMC print]
1
All
2
SP Mode
4
Logging
6
Non-Default
7
NIB Summary
994
995
#
998
Prints SP setting data.

[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 0 /step]
SP all print: All items printed out with SPs 5-990-2, -4,
-6, and -7.
All: All SP mode settings
Non-Default: SP settings that have been changed
from the defaults
[Jam OFF] Jam ON/OFF

1
993
Jam OFF
Enables or disables jam detection.

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: Enable
1: Disable
[Line Adj.] Line Point Adjustment
1
Timing(pages)
The automatic line position adjustment is done after
#
printing the number of pages that is set with this SP.
[ 0 ~ 2000 / 250 / 1/page ]
NOTE: 0: Never done
2
Manual
Use to make a line position adjustment.
[Eng Err Stat] Engine Error Status
1
(7) 00000000 (0)
Display the engine error status.
Bit 7: The fuse did not blow after installing a new PCU(K)
Bit 6: The fuse did not blow after installing a new
PCU(YMC)
Bit 5: By-pass tray and duplex unit motor error
Bit 4: The color registration sensor cannot be calibrated.
Bit 3: Cannot measure the color registration sensor
value.
Bit 2: Cannot correct the color registration.
Bit 1: PCU(YMC) home position error.
Bit 0: Not used
[Skew Adj.] Skew Adjustment
1
Skew Adj.
Select color skew correction ON or OFF.
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Off, 1: On
[ENG Mem Clear] Engine Memory Clear
2
Color Mis-Reg
Clears the correction values for the color registration. Do
this SP mode after replacing the color registration board.
The correction values are set after the main power has
been turned on.
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-20
SM
7
003
007*
101*
204*
401*
502*
504*
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[M/C Counter] Mono/Color Counter
Displays the values of the color counters.
1
P: Total
[9999 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step ]
7
P: B&W
8
P: Full Color
10 D: Color
These SP modes are development counters for meter
charge mode.
11 D: B&W
20 P: Full Color
These SP modes are used for the Japanese market
only.
21 P: B&W/Single
22 P: Single
23 P: B&W
25 P: Full Color
28 P: Color
These SP modes are print counters for meter charge
(except for B&W)
mode.
These SP modes are used in all markets.
29 P: B&W
30 P: Color Total
[Other Counter]
1
Duplex
Displays counter values.
[9999 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 sheet/step]
[Size Counter]
5
A4
Displays the counter values for each paper size.
[0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 sheet/step]
6
A5
14 B5
36 81/2" x 14" (LG)
38 81/2" x 11" (LT)
44 51/2" x 81/2" (HLT)
128 Others
[Feed Counter]
1
Tray 1
Displays the number of sheets fed from each paper feed
station.
2
Tray 2
[0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 sheet/step]
3
Tray 3
5
By-pass
[SC Counter]
1
SC Counter
Displays how many times SC codes have been output.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 time/step]
[Total Jam]
1
Total Jam
Displays the total number of jams detected.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
[Jam Location]
Displays the number of jams according to the location where they were detected.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
16 Tray 1 : ON
Paper does not reach the registration sensor.
17 Regist. : ON
Paper does not pass the registration roller.
18 Fuser : ON
Paper does not reach the fusing exit sensor.
19 Fuser : OFF1
Paper reached the fusing exit sensor and then paper
returned to the fusing unit.
20 Fuser : OFF2
Paper does not pass the fusing exit sensor.
21 Exit : ON
Paper does not reach the exit sensor.
22 Exit : OFF1
Paper reached the exit sensor and then paper backed
the fusing unit.
5-21
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables
SP7-XXX (Data Log)
7
504*
506*
803
#
804
805
807
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
23 Exit : OFF2
Paper does not pass the exit sensor.
24 PaperSizeErr (Paper
The registration sensor recognized that paper was too
Size Error)
short.
25 Tray 2 : ON
Paper does not reach the gate sensor of tray 2.
26 Tray 3 : ON
27 Duplex : ON
Paper does not reach the duplex unit sensor.
[Jam Paper Size]
Displays the number of jams according to paper size.
5
A4
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
14 B5
36 81/2" x 14" (LG)
38 81/2" x 11" (LT)
44 51/2" x 81/2" (HLT)
128 Others
[PM Counter]
Displays the number of pages printed for each current maintenance unit.
1
Page Total
Display the actual total number of pages printed.
[ 0 ~ 99999999 / 0 / 1 page ]
2
Page Mono
Display the actual total number of monochrome pages
printed.
[ 0 ~ 99999999 / 0 / 1 page ]
Display the number of pages that is calculated from
3
PC(K) Page
drum rotation.
4
PC(YMC) Page
[ 0 ~ 99999999 / 0 / 1 page ]
[ 0 ~ 9999999999 / 0 / 1/1024 pixel ]
5
Toner(K) Pixel
6
Toner(C) Pixel
7
Toner(M) Pixel
8
Toner(Y) Pixel
9
Fusing Page
[ 0 ~ 99999999 / 0 / 1 page ]
12 Trans Page
Display the number of pages that is calculated from the
transfer belt rotation.
[ 0 ~ 99999999 / 0 / 1 page ]
[PM Counter Clear]
(Unit [Color])
Clears the PM counter.
1
PC [K]
Press the Enter key after the machine asks Execute?.
2
PC [YMC]
When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically
detects that the new unit is installed. Then, the current
PM counter value is automatically reset to 0.
15 Fusing
17 Accumulator
30 Toner:BK
31 Toner:C
32 Toner:M
33 Toner:Y
[TonerBotolInfo] Toner Bottle Information
Displays how much toner remains in the bottle.
17 TonerRest:BK
[0 ~ 1 / 100 / 1 %]
18 TonerRest:C
19 TonerRest:M
20 TonerRest:Y
[SC/Jam Clear]
1
SC/Jam Clear
Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 0 /step]
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-22
SM
808
816
825
832*
833
#
836
901
905
#
910
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Counter Clear]
1
Counter Clear
[Tray Clear]
1
Tray 1
2
Tray 2
3
Tray 3
[Counter Reset]
1
Counter Reset
Clears all counters except for SP7-003 and 007.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 0 /step]
Clears the tray counters (SP7-204).
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 0 /step]
Resets the total counter values to 0.

[0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0 /step]
[Diag. Result ] Diagnosis Result
1
Diag. Result
Displays the result of the diagnostics. Refer to section
4.2 for the error codes.
[Covrage] Pixel Coverage Ratio
Displays the pixel coverage ratio for each color of the last
1
Last: BK
output.
2
Last: C
[ 0 ~ 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step ]
3
Last: M
4
Last: Y
Displays accumulated average value of pixel coverage
5
Average: BK
ratio for each color.
6
Average: C
[ 0 ~ 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step ]
7
Average: M
8
Average: Y
[Total Memory]
1
Total Memory
Displays the capacity of memory on the main controller
board.
[Assert Info] Assert Information
Records the location where the last problem (SC990)
1
File Name
was detected in the program. The data stored in this SP
2
# of Lines (Number of
is used for problem analysis.
lines)
[0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0 /step]
3
Location
[Alert Display]
51 PC(K) Page
Displays the threshold of the number of pages for the
alert display for each maintenance unit.
52 PC(YMC) Page
53 TC(K) starter
54 TC(K) option
55 TC(CMY) starter
56 TC(CMY) option
57 Fusing Page
60 Trans Page
[Firmware PN] Firmware Part Number display
1
Controller
Displays the part number.
18 NIB
131 Bluetooth
150 RPCS
151 PS
152 RPDL
153 R98
154 R16
156 R55
158 PCL
159 PCLXL
5-23
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables
7
910
911
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
160 MSIS
161 MSIS (OPTION)
204 Printer
210 MIB
[Firmware Ver.] Firmware Version display
1
Controller
Displays the firmware version.
2
Engine
18 NIB
131 Bluetooth
150 RPCS
151 PS
152 RPDL
153 R98
154 R16
156 R55
158 PCL
159 PCLXL
160 MSIS
161 MSIS (OPTION)
204 Printer
210 MIB
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-24
SM
5.3.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE

When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each
digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table. Refer to 5.1 Service
Program Mode for access information.
7
0 or 1
6
0 or 1
5
0 or 1
4
0 or 1
3
0 or 1
2
0 or 1
1
0 or 1
0
0 or 1
SP5-803
Reading
Bit
Description
-XXX
0
1
[Tray 1 Paper] Paper End Sensor (Tray 1)
1
Paper detected
Paper end
0 Paper End Sensor
[Regist] Registration Sensor
2
0 Registration Sensor
Paper detected
No paper
[Paper Tray 1] Cassette Sensor (Tray 1)
0 Tray set
Not set
Set
3
1 Paper Size Switch 1
See Table 1.
1: Pushed
[By-pass Paper] By-pass Paper Sensor
4
0 By-pass Paper Sensor
Paper detected
No paper
[By-pass Home] By-pass Home Position Sensor
5
0 By-pass Home Position Sensor
Not home position
Home position
6
Paper End Sensor
Paper detected
Paper end
[Tray 2 Jam] Jam Sensor (Tray 2)
7
0 Jam Sensor
Paper detected
No paper
0 Tray set
Not set
Set
8
See Table 1.
1: Pushed
9
Paper End Sensor
Paper detected
Paper end
10
0 Jam Sensor
Paper detected
No paper
0 Tray set
Not set
Set
11
See Table 1.
1: Pushed
[P Exit Full] Exit Paper Full Sensor
12
0 Exit Paper Full Sensor
Not full
Paper full
[Paper Exit] Exit Sensor
13
0 Exit Sensor
Paper detected
No paper
[Dpx Jam] Duplex Jam Sensor
14
0 Duplex Jam Sensor
Paper detected
No paper
[Dpx Unit] Duplex Unit Sensor
15
0 Duplex Unit Sensor
No unit
Duplex unit detected
[Fusing JAM] Fusing Exit Sensor
16
0 Fusing Exit Sensor
Paper detected
No paper
17
[Fusing Roller] Fusing Roller Rotation Sensor
0 Fusing Roller Rotation Sensor
Not rotating
Rotating
SM
5-25
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables
Bit No.
Result

SP5-803
Reading
Bit
Description
-XXX
0
1
[F Temp. Center] Fusing Temperature (Center)
18
0-7 Fusing Temperature
Data range: 0 to 250, Unit: 1oC
[F Temp. Left] Fusing Temperature (Side)
19
[WstToner Full] Waste Toner Full Sensor
20
0 Waste Toner Full Sensor
Not full
Near full
[Toner Empty[Y]] Toner Empty Sensor (Y)
21
0 Toner Empty Sensor (Y)
Empty
Not empty
[Toner Empty[M]] Toner Empty Sensor (M)
22
0 Toner Empty Sensor (M)
Empty
Not empty
[Toner Empty[C]] Toner Empty Sensor (C)
23
0 Toner Empty Sensor (C)
Empty
Not empty
[Toner Empty[K]] Toner Empty Sensor (K)
24
0 Toner Empty Sensor (K)
Empty
Not empty
[Front/SideDoor] Front/Side Door Switch
25
0 Front/Side Door Switch
Open
Closed
[Toner Door] Top Cover Switch
26
0 Top Cover Switch
Open
Closed
[Mis-regist. 1] Color Registration Sensor 1
27
0- Color Registration Sensor 1
Data range: 0 to 1024, Unit:3.3/1024V
10
28
10
[Temperature] Temperature Sensor
29
0-7 Temperature Sensor
[Humidity] Humidity Sensor
30
0-7 Humidity Sensor
Data range: 0 to 99, Unit:1%
[Skew [K]] Mechanical Skew (K)
31
0 Mechanical Skew (K)
Not used.
[Skew [YMC]] Mechanical Skew (YMC)
32
0 Mechanical Skew (YMC)
Not used.
[Accumulator] Transfer Belt Unit
33
0 Cam Home Position Sensor
Not home position
Home position
[PC(K) First]
34
0- Resistance of new PCU detection
10
[PC(YMC) First]
35
10
[PC_Temp]
36
0-7 PCU Temperature Sensor
Data range: 0 to 60, unit: 1oC
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-26
SM
Table 1: Paper Size Switch

0: Not pushed, 1: pushed
Models
North America
Letter SEF
A4 SEF
B5 SEF
Legal SEF
1: Pushed
Switch
Location
1
2
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
5.3.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE

SP5804-XXX
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
SM
Initialize mechanical
After finishing the output checks, execute this SP mode
position
before printing.
Pickup Solenoid (Tray1) Turns the paper pickup solenoid for paper tray 1 ON for
1 second.
Registration Clutch
Turns the registration clutch ON for 1 second.
By-pass Pickup Motor
Turns the by-pass pickup motor ON with the process
(100mm/s)
speed of 100 mm/s.
(124mm/s)
speed of 124 mm/s.
(50mm/s)
speed of 50 mm/s.
Turns the by-pass pickup motor OFF.
(OFF)
1 second.
Tray 2 Feed Motor
Turns the tray 2 feed motor ON with the process speed
(100mm/s)
of 100 mm/s.
Tray 2 Feed Motor
(124mm/s)
of 124 mm/s.
Tray 2 Feed Motor
(50mm/s)
of 50 mm/s.
Turns the tray 2 feed motor OFF.
Tray 2 Feed Motor
(OFF)
1 second.
Tray 3 Feed Motor
(100mm/s)
of 100 mm/s.
Tray 3 Feed Motor
(124mm/s)
of 124 mm/s.
Tray 3 Feed Motor
(50mm/s)
of 50 mm/s.
Tray 3 Feed Motor
(OFF)
5-27
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables
Description

SP5804-XXX
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Description
Duplex Exit Solenoid
Transfer Unit Cam
Solenoid
Transfer Unit Changer
Solenoid
BK Solenoid
BK Motor (100mm/s)
BK Motor (124mm/s)
BK Motor (50mm/s)
BK Motor (OFF)
CMY Motor (100mm/s)
CMY Motor (50mm/s)
CMY Motor (OFF)
Toner Supply Solenoid
Toner Supply Solenoid
G081/G120/G121/G122
Turns the duplex unit paper exit solenoid ON for 1

second.
Turns the transfer unit cam solenoid ON for 1 second.
Turns the transfer unit changer solenoid ON for 1
second.
Turns the PC(K) drive solenoid ON for 1 second.
Turns the BK motor ON with the process speed of 100
mm/s.
mm/s.
mm/s.
Turns the BK motor OFF
Turns the CMY motor ON with the process speed of
100 mm/s.
Turns the CMY motor ON with the process speed of
50 mm/s.
Turns the CMY motor OFF.
Turns the toner supply solenoid on.
Turns the toner supply solenoid off.
5-28
SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE
5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

5.4.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE
There are two types of firmware, requiring four cards, as shown below.
Type of firmware
Printer Engine
Printer Controller
1. Main
2. System
Function
Printer engine control
Printer system firmware
Number of PCMCIA
Memory cards
required
1 card
3 cards
Refer to 5.4.3 Controller/Engine Firmware Upgrade for the procedure.

NOTE: When upgrading both types of firmware at the same time, you can upgrade
them in any order.
However, when upgrading the controller system firmware, use the PCMCIA
cards in the correct order (see the procedure as detailed on 5.4.3
Controller/Engine Firmware Upgrade on the following page).
Its is recommended to first print-out the printers Configuration Page prior to
updating the firmware. Then, when the firmware has been successfully updated,
print a second Configuration Page and confirm the results.
Engine Firmware
If a download attempt failed, try downloading the new firmware again using the
procedure in section 5.4.3 Controller/Engine Update.
NOTE: When a download fails, the error is logged in the NVRAM on the controller
and the machine asks you to insert the appropriate PCMCIA memory card.
Even after replacing the ECB board to fix the problem, the same message
will continue to be displayed. Turning off and on the main switch while
holding down the Menu and Enter keys clears the error condition logged in
the NVRAM on the controller.
Controller System Firmware:

If a download attempt failed, you must boot up the machine from the PCMCIA
memory card. To do this, DIP SW 1 on the controller board needs to be ON. The
machine automatically starts upgrading the firmware.
SM
5-29
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables
5.4.2 ERROR RECOVERY
5.4.3 CONTROLLER/ENGINE FIRMWARE UPGRADE
CAUTION
1. Turn off the main switch whenever inserting or removing the PCMCIA
Memory card (IC card).
2. Open the front cover or right cover whenever updating the firmware.
3. Do not turn off the machine while downloading the firmware.
Engine Firmware
1. Prepare the PCMCIA memory card containing
the engine controller firmware (Engine ROM).
NOTE: The PCMCIA memory Card is also [B]
referred to as an IC card, flash memory
card and memory card. Be certain to
only use the recommended card
(N803 6701).
[A]
2. Turn the main switch off.
3. Remove the cover [A].
4. Insert the PCMCIA memory card [B].
G081S902.WMF
5. Open the front cover or right cover.

6. Turn the main switch on.
7. Wait until "Engine ROM." is displayed.
Engine ROM
G081S521.WMF
NOTE: 1) If you did not insert the correct PCMCIA memory card, the correct
message is not displayed. In this case, press the up-arrow key
("Exit" is displayed), press the enter key ("Close Front and/or Right
Cover" is displayed), and turn the main switch off. After this, insert
the correct PCMCIA card and resume upgrading.
2) If you have not fully inserted the PCMCIA memory card, the
message "Close Front and/or Right Cover" is displayed. In this case,
turn the main switch off, and fully insert the PCMCIA memory card.
After this, resume upgrading.
8. Press the On Line Key. "Updating" is displayed,
followed by underscores.
9. Check that the asterisks replace underscores
one by one.
Updating...
---------------G081S522.WMF
Updating...
!!!------------G081S523.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-30
SM
10. Wait until the message "Updated Power Off

On" is displayed.
Updated
Power Off On
G081S524.WMF

12. Remove the PCMCIA memory card.
13. Attach the cover [A] if you have completed the firmware update procedures.
14. Close the front door.
Controller System Firmware

1. Prepare three PCMCIA memory cards that contain the system firmware
(Onboard System 1/2, Onboard System 2/2, Network Support).
3. Remove the cover [A].
4. Insert the PCMCIA memory card [B] that contains "Onboard System 1/2."
5. Open the front cover or right cover.
6. Turn the main switch on.
Onboard Sys. 1/2

G081S525.WMF
NOTE: 1) If you did not insert the correct PCMCIA memory card, the proper
message is not displayed. In this case, press the up-arrow key
("Exit" is displayed), press the enter key ("Close Front and/or Right
Cover" is displayed), and turn the main switch off. After this, insert
the correct IC card and resume upgrading.
2) If you have not fully inserted the PCMCIA memory card, the
message "Close Front and/or Right Cover" is displayed. In this case,
turn the main switch off, and fully insert the PCMCIA memory card.
When completed, resume upgrading.
8. Press the On Line key. "Verifying Data" is
displayed. Next, "Checking Controller" is
displayed.
Verifying Data
G081S526.WMF
Checking
Controller
G081S527.WMF
SM
5-31
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables
7. Wait until the message "Onboard Sys. 1/2" is

displayed.
9. Check that "Updating" is displayed, and that

asterisks replace underscores one by one.
Updating...
!!!------------G081S528.WMF
10. Wait until "Upgraded Power Off On" is

displayed.
Updated
Power Off On
G081S529.WMF

12. Remove the PCMCIA memory card and insert the PCMCIA card that contains
"Onboard System 2/2."
13. Repeat steps 6 through 11. When the main
switch is turned on (step 6), "Onboard Sys.
2/2" is displayed (step 7).
Onboard Sys. 2/2

G081S530.WMF
14. Remove the PCMCIA memory card and insert the PCMCIA card that contains
"Network Support."
15. Repeat steps 6 through 11. When the main
switch is turned on (step 6), "Network Support"
is displayed (step 7).
16. Remove the PCMCIA memory card.
Network Support
G081S531.WMF
17. Attach the cover [A].

18. Close the front door.
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-32
SM
POWER ON SELF-TEST
5.5 POWER ON SELF-TEST

5.5.1 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
Overview
There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller.
Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics
just after the power has been turned on.
Detailed self-diagnostics: The machine does the detailed self-diagnostics by
using a loop-back connector (P/N G0219350)
SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or
during operation.
The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.
Power ON
Diagnostic RAM Check
NG
Not initialized
Power-on or
Detailed
CPU Check
NG
SC820
Detailed
ASIC Check
NG
SC821
Standard RAM
Conection Check
NG
SC827
Optional RAM
Connection Check
NG
SC829
Clock Generator Check
NG
SC838
Standard NVRAM
Check
SC824
NG
ROM Sum Check
NG
SC828
Standard RAM Detailed

Check
NG
SC829
NG
Not use optional RAM
Error Logged
Standard NVRAM
Detailed Check
NG
Error Logged
Power-on
Optional NVRAM
Detailed Check
NG
Error Logged
Optinoal HDD Check

Optional NVRAM Check
NG
Error Logged
IEEE1284 Loop-back
Check
Error Logged
Font Header Check
NG
SC826
NG
Real Time Clock

Detailed Check
Font ROM Sum Check

Network Check
NG
SC826
NG
NG
Error Logged
Error Logged
Engine I/F Check
NG
Error Logged
Error Logged
Real Time Clock Check
NG
END
NG
Error Logged
Interrupt Check
NG
Error Logged
Memory Chip Check
NG
Error Logged
A
G081S516.WMF
SM
5-33
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables
Optional RAM Detailed

Check
POWER ON SELF-TEST
Detailed self-diagnostics
This detailed self-diagnostic test requires a loop-back connector (P/N: G0219350).
1. Turn off the machine and attach the loop-back connector to the parallel
interface.
2. Turn on the machine while pressing the Online key and Enter key together.
3. The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics and prints the diagnostic
report after completing the test.
Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. The errors detected
during self-diagnostics can be checked with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result).
Refer to section 4.2 Controller Error, for details about the error codes.
5.5.2 ENGINE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

Power ON
Primary error check
Some processes of the engine self-diagnostic

test are executed whenever the main power
switch is turned on, until the printer goes in to the
ready status. Others are executed only when a
printing job is coming in to the printer, when the
printer goes in to the printing status.
Belt tension unit cam

position check
Toner cartridge
check
By-pass tray check
Color adjustment
Ready
Printing
G081S517.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-34
SM
USER PROGRAM MODE
5.6 USER PROGRAM MODE

Press the Menu button and use the Up/Down arrow keys to scroll through the
menu listing. To go back to a higher level, press the Escape key. After changing
the settings, press the On Line key. The user menu list can be printed using
Menu List in the List/Test Print user mode. (For those functions shown with an
asterisk and number, refer to the Notes shown below.)
Category
Counter
Sample Print
Locked Print
Paper Input
List/ Test Print
Maintenance
System
Function Menu
*1
*2
*2
Bypass Size
Paper Type
Tray Locking
Tray Priority
Config. Page
Menu List
Color Demo Page
PS Config. Page
PCL Config. Page
Hex Dump
Color Regist.
Image Density
Registration
Plain Paper Type
Maint. Reset
HDD Format *2
ROM Update *3
4C. Graphic Mode
WL. LAN Signal *4
WL. LAN Defaults *4
Print Area
Key Repeat
Menu Protect *5
Series Print. Job *5
MisfeedRecovery
Prt. Err Report
Category
System
Host Interface
PCL Menu
Function Menu
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Copies
Printer Lang.
Sub Paper Size
Page Size
Duplex *6
Energy Saver 1
Energy Saver 2
Unit of Measure
Resolution
B& W Detect
Spool Printing *2
I/ O Buffer
I/ O Timeout
Network Setup
IEEE 1394 Setup *7
IEEE 802.11b *4
USB Setup
Orientation
Form Lines
Font Source
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbol Set
Ext. A4 Width
Append CR to LF
Language
NOTE: *1. Meter charge mode must be ON in SP mode.

*2. Option HDD required
*3. ROM Update is not currently used.
*4. IEEE802.11b option required
*5. Displayed after pressing [Enter], [Escape] and then [Menu]
*6. Duplex unit option required.
*7. IEEE1394 option required.
SM
5-35
G081/G120/G121/G122
Service
Tables
User Menu Chart
DIP SWITCHES
5.7 DIP SWITCHES

Controller Board
DIP SW No.
1
2 to 4
OFF
Boot-up from machine
ON
Boot-up from PCMCIA
memory card
Factory Use Only: Keep these switches OFF.
If a download attempt failed, you must boot the machine from the PCMCIA memory
card. To do this, set DIP SW 1 on the controller board to ON.
G081/G120/G121/G122
5-36
SM
OVERVIEW
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
[J]
[S]
[R]
G081D935.WMF
[Q]
[P]
[O]
[N]
[K]
[L]
G081D936.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
SM
Fusing fan
Laser scanning unit
Toner cartridge holder
Printer control box (Main Control
Board)
Power supply unit
Y toner cartridge
M toner cartridge
C toner cartridge
BK toner cartridge
Fusing unit
[K]:
[L]:
[M]:
[N]:
[O]:
[P]:
[Q]:
[R]:
[S]:
6-1
Paper feed unit

Paper feed motor
Power supply fan
CMY motor
BK motor
Engine control box
AC inlet
Transfer belt unit
Transfer belt tension unit
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
[M]
OVERVIEW
6.1.2 PAPER PATH

[A]
[H]
[G]
[F]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[D]
G081D902.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
Paper exit
Paper tray (main unit)
Paper tray (optional unit)
Bypass tray (main unit)
[F]: Transfer roller

[G]: Paper path in the duplex unit
(optional unit)
[H]: Fusing unit
The bypass tray [E] is built into the paper tray [B] of the main unit. The duplex unit
is installed on the inside of the front cover.
When fed from the paper trays (including the bypass tray), paper is sent to the
transfer roller [F], fusing unit [H], and paper exit tray.
During duplex printing, paper is sent to the paper exit [A], and fed into the duplex
unit. Having passed through the paper path in the duplex unit [G], the paper goes
to the transfer roller, fusing unit, and paper exit.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-2
SM
DRIVE MECHANISM
6.2 DRIVE MECHANISM

6.2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Detailed
Descriptions
The CMY motor drives the following:

CMY PCUs
The BK motor drives the following:
Black PCU
All four toner cartridges
Transfer belt unit
Transfer belt tension unit
Paper feed (standard cassette)
Fusing unit
The by-pass feed motor (stepper motor) drives the following
Bypass tray
Optional duplex unit
SM
6-3
G081/G120/G121/G122
DRIVE MECHANISM
6.2.2 BK MOTOR DRIVE

[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[J]
[F]
[I]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[H]
G081D903.WMF
[G]
BK solenoid
BK clutch arm
Black PCU gear
Toner cartridge holder unit gear
Toner cartridge drive unit gear
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
Transfer belt unit gear

BK motor gear
Switching gear unit
Transfer belt tension unit gear
Fusing unit gear
The BK motor rotation is transmitted through the following gears to the following
units:
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
Black PCU (for development)

Black PCU (for OPC rotation)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(8)
(4)
(9)
(5)
(10)
(6)
(7)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Toner cartridge holder unit
(11)
(25)
(22)
(23)
Transfer belt unit
Fusing unit
(24)
(26)
(27)
Belt tension unit
G081D904.WMF
Rotation to the black PCU is controlled by the BK solenoid [A]. When the BK
solenoid is turned on, the BK clutch arm [B] unlatches from the gear in the
switching gear unit [H], and BK motor rotation is not transmitted from the switching
gear unit to the black PCU.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-4
SM
DRIVE MECHANISM
6.2.3 CMY MOTOR DRIVE

[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
G081D901.WMF
[A]: CMY motor gear

[B]: Yellow PCU drive gear
[C]: Magenta PCU drive gear
[D]: Cyan PCU drive gear
The CMY motor drives the following gears:
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Yellow PCU (for development)

Yellow PCU (for OPC rotation)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Magenta PCU (for

development)
Magenta PCU (for OPC
rotation)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
Cyan PCU (for development)

Cyan PCU (for OPC rotation)
G081D914.WMF
SM
6-5
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
(6)
DRIVE MECHANISM
Rev. 06/03/2004
6.2.4 BOARD STRUCTURE

Overview
IEEE 1284
Interface
Network
Interface
: Standard Components
USB
Interface
: Option Components
IEEE1394
Interface
User Account
Enhancement Unit
Main
Control
Board
Memory
DIMMs
IEEE802.11b
(Wireless LAN)
Bluetooth
(Wireless I/F)
HDD
NIC
High Voltage
Supply Board
Motors
(Standard with
G082/G120/G122)
Laser Scanning
Unit
Video I/F
Operation
ECB
Thermistors
Clutches
Sensors
Paper Tray
Unit
PSU
IH Power
Board
IH Unit
G081D934.WMF
The ECB (Engine Control Board) controls all mechanical components. The
Network Interface Board Type 300 (G121), IEEE1394 interface board,
IEEE802.11b wireless LAN board, Bluetooth wireless interface board, memory
DIMM, the HDD, and User Account Enhancement Unit are installed on the main
control board.
Either the IEEE1394 interface board, IEEE802.11b wireless LAN board, or
Bluetooth wireless interface can be installed at the same time. If any of these are
installed, the USB2.0 board must be removed.
The main control board (controller) connects to the ECB through the video interface
bus.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-6
SM
Rev. 06/03/2004
DRIVE MECHANISM
Descriptions
1. ECB (Engine Control Board)
The ECB handles the following functions.
Engine sequence
Timing for peripherals
High voltage supply and IH (fusing) power supply
Laser and fusing
Sensors, motors, and solenoids
2. Main Control Board (Controller)
The controller handles the following functions.
Printer-to-host interface
Operation panel interface
Network interface
Interfacing and control of the optional IEEE1394, IEEE802.11b, Bluetooth,
HDD, DRAM DIMM, and optional Ethernet LAN (G121).
3. Standard interface boards (IEEE1284, USB, Ethernet LAN)
These allow computers to connect to the printer using IEEE1284 (parallel printer
port) and USB.
4. Optional interface boards (IEEE1394, IEEE802.11b, Bluetooth, Ethernet
LAN [G121])
These allow computers to connect to the printer using an IEEE1394 interface,
IEEE802.11b wireless LAN, a Bluetooth wireless interface or Ethernet support
(G121 option). Aside from the Ethernet LAN board, only one of these can be
installed at any one time. To install any of these, except for the Ethernet LAN board,
the USB interface must be removed.
Detailed
Descriptions
5. HDD Unit (Option)

The HDD unit stores data for the following.
Additional soft fonts
Collation
Locked print
Sample print
Downloading forms for form overlay
6. Memory DIMM (Standard: 64MB DRAM [G081/G121/G122], 128MB DRAM
[G120], Option: 64/128/256MB DRAM)
This is for additional printer processing memory, used for collation and for soft
fonts.
7. Operation Panel Board
This controls the display panel, the LED, and the keypad.
SM
6-7
G081/G120/G121/G122
PRINT PROCESS
6.3 PRINT PROCESS

6.3.1 OVERVIEW
[A]
[J]
[B]
[I]
[C]
Y
K
[D]
[H]
[E]
[F]
[G]
G081D902.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
Polygon mirror
Charge roller Y, M, C, K
OPC drum Y, M, C, K
Transfer belt
Paper tray (main unit)
G081/G120/G121/G122
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
6-8

By-pass tray
Transfer roller
Fusing unit
SM
Rev. 06/07/2004
PRINT PROCESS
Drum charge
The charge rollers [B], one for each color development, apply
a negative charge to the OPC drums [C]. There are four
drums, one for each toner color.
Laser optics
The polygon mirror [A] and other mirrors reflect the laser
beams. There are four beams, one for each toner color.
Laser exposure
The laser beams create (write) the image to be developed

(latent image) on the OPC drums. Then, toner is transferred
to areas that were exposed to the laser beam.
and toner
transfer
A transfer belt [D] rotates past the drums, and the toner on the
drum is transferred to this belt in the order Y, M, C, K. All four
colors transfer to the belt in one belt rotation.
Paper feed
After all colors have transferred to the belt, a sheet of paper is

fed up from below the transfer belt to the transfer roller [I].
Paper transfer
The transfer applies a positive bias to the back of the paper

which transfers the toner to the paper. The models G120,
G121, and G122 use a fixed-current method of transfer
(unlike the G081s: fixed-voltage method) to help improve
image quality when using thick paper.
Fusing
The paper advances to the fusing unit [J], where heat and
pressure permanently bond the toner to the paper.
Paper exit
The paper is then fed out of the machine.
Detailed
Descriptions
Belt transfer
SM
6-9
G081/G120/G121/G122
PRINT PROCESS
6.3.2 CHARGE
[A]
[A]
[A]
[B]
[A]
[B]
G081D906.WMF
[A]: Charge roller Y, M, C, K

[B]: OPC drum Y, M, C, K
The charge rollers [A] contact the OPC drum [B] surfaces.
The charge on the roller is about 1100 V, (depending on the ambient temperature
and selected print resolution). This applies a uniform negative charge of about -600
volts to the photoconductive drums.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-10
SM
PRINT PROCESS
6.3.3 LASER EXPOSURE

Laser scanning
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[G]
[F]
G081D105.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
Laser diodes
Collimator lens
Polygon mirror
Synchronization sensor
[E]: Horizontal synchronization mirror

[F]: Toroidal correction lens
[G]: Laser optics housing unit
Laser path
The laser diodes [A] (one for each color and black) generate the laser beams used
to expose the OPCs surface.
The toroidal correction lens [F] corrects the vertical registration errors of the
beams.
Mirrors direct the beams to the primary lenses (at the bottom of the unit). The
lenses ensure that each beam scans across the drum at a constant speed.
Laser synchronization
At the start of each horizontal scan, the horizontal synchronization mirror [F]
deflects the laser beam to the horizontal synchronization sensor [D].
Synchronization is done for the black laser beam only. The other lines depend on
the line position adjustment.
SM
6-11
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
The collimator lens [B] ensures the beams are parallel, and directs them to the
polygon mirror [C].
PRINT PROCESS
Polygon motor and laser exposure

[A]
[B]
Y
G081D907.WMF
[A]: Polygon mirror

[B]: OPC drums Y, M, C, K
The octagonal polygon mirror [A] reflects the laser beams. The beams write the
latent images on the OPC drums [B]. The charge on exposed areas of the drum
falls to about 50 V. Unexposed areas of the drum remain charged at
approximately 600 V.
Laser output power is either 0.25 mW or 0.4 mW depending on whether the printer
is printing the 1200-dpi mode or 600-dpi mode.
Safety switch
The LSU safety interlock switch interrupts power to the laser if either the front or
right cover is open.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-12
SM
PRINT PROCESS
6.3.4 TONER SUPPLY

Toner cartridge
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
G081D109.WMF
[A]: Toner cartridge

[B]: Agitator
[C]: Toner supply paddle shaft

[D]: PCU
Although the toner cartridges contain the same amount of toner, their dimensions
are different. This prevents users from installing the cartridges in the wrong
positions.
Toner supply
When the toner cartridge has been installed in the holder, a gate (shutter) on the
bottom of the toner cartridge [A] is pushed open.
The toner is agitated by the agitator [B] in the cartridge, and goes out to the PCU
[D].
In the PCU, the toner supply paddle shafts [C] agitates the toner, and an auger is
used to distribute the toner evenly.
SM
6-13
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
Cartridge shape
PRINT PROCESS
Paddle shaft switching mechanism
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
Toner supply paddle shaft (Y)

Toner supply paddle shaft (M)
Toner supply paddle shaft (C)
Toner supply paddle shaft (BK)
G081D110.WMFF
[E]: Ratchet mechanism

[F]: Gear (clutch)
[G]: Toner supply solenoid
There is a solenoid [G] on the bottom of the toner cartridge holder.

During monochrome printing, a ratchet mechanism [E] linked to the solenoid holds
the gear [F] which is linked to the toner supply paddle shafts of the C [A], M [B] and
Y [C] PCUs preventing these paddle shafts from moving.
During color printing, the ratchet releases the gear, and the paddle shafts in the C,
M, and Y PCUs are allowed to operate. The toner supply paddle shaft [D] in the
black PCU operates during both monochrome and color printing.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-14
SM
PRINT PROCESS
Toner cartridge and toner end detection

[A]
[B]
[C]
[F]
[D]
[E]
[A]: Toner cartridge
[B]: Toner detection mirror 2
[C]: Toner
G081D106.WMF
[D]: Toner detection mirror 1

[E]: LED
[F]: Receptor
When the main switch is turned on, the LED [E] emits light. If the toner cartridge is
not in the holder, the light goes to toner detection mirror 1 [D] and to the receptor
[F].
If the toner cartridge is in the holder, the light is blocked by the toner (when the
cartridge contains sufficient toner) or is momentarily blocked by the mylar in the
cartridge (when the cartridge is empty).
When the toner cartridge is not in the holder, the message Reset Toner Xxxxxx is
displayed (where Xxxxxx indicates the color). If two toner cartridges are not in the
holders, the message Reset Toner Xxxxxx/Yyyyyy is displayed.
NOTE: If three toner cartridges are not in the holder, Reset Toner Xxxxxx/Yyyyyy
and Reset Toner Zzzzzz blink one after another. If all four toner
cartridges are not in the holder, Reset Toner Yellow/Cyan and Reset
Toner Magenta/Black blink one after another.
The message(s) is/are cleared after the toner cartridge(s) is/are set and the upper
left cover is closed. Once the message(s) is/are cleared, toner cartridge detection
is not resumed until the upper left cover is opened and closed or until the main
switch is turned off and on.
SM
6-15
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
Toner cartridge detection
PRINT PROCESS
Toner end detection

Toner detection mirror 1 [D] reflects light emitted from the LED [E]. If there is only a
small amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridge [C] some of the light passes
through the toner cartridge [A] and is reflected by the detection mirror 2 [B], the
light is then detected by the receptor [F]. A small wiper is incorporated in each
toner cartridge that will clean the inside of the toner cartridge in the area where
the LED light passes through. This ensures that the light is not blocked by toner
adhering to the inside of the toner cartridge when the cartridge is out of toner and
momentarily interrupts the LED light path
After the receptor has detected this pulsing light, the machine starts to count pixels.
When 0.26-billion pixels have been printed, Toner is Almost Empty: Xxxxxx is
displayed (where Xxxxxx indicates the color).
When 1.17-billion pixels have been printed, Add Toner Xxxxxx is displayed and
the machine stops printing.
If all three color toners are empty, the machine will continue to print in monochrome.
The machine will not print if the monochrome toner cartridge is empty even if the
color cartridges contain toner.
NOTE: 0.26-billion pixels are equivalent to 154 sheets of A4/LT paper (at 5%
coverage); 1.17-billion pixels are equivalent to 695 sheets of A4/LT paper
(at 5% coverage).
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-16
SM
PRINT PROCESS
6.3.5 DEVELOPMENT
PCU and OPC drum
[A]
[H]
[B]
[C]
[G]
[D]
[F]
[E]
Toner supply paddle shaft
Doctor blade
Development roller
Cleaning blade
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
Spiral paddle shaft

OPC drum
Toner supply roller
Gear-driven wire paddle
Development mechanism
The development roller [C] is activated and charged to about -250 volts (400 VAC
p-p). The toner supply roller is charged to 300 volts.
The development roller rotates at 1.33 times the speed of the OPC drum [F] to
ensure a sufficient supply of toner. Both the toner supply roller [G] and the
development roller rotate clockwise.
The toner supply roller supplies a layer of toner to the development roller.
The doctor blade [B] smoothes the toner, ensuring the toner is evenly distributed
on the development roller surface.
A gear-driven wire paddle [H] agitates the toner and keeps it moving towards the
development roller.
SM
6-17
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
G081D913.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
PRINT PROCESS
OPC drum cleaning

The OPC drum-cleaning blade [D] (which is always in contact with the OPC drum)
removes excess toner remaining on the OPC drum after the toner is transferred to
the transfer belt. The spiral paddle shaft [E] carries the removed toner to the waste
toner bottle () 6).
New PCU detection

The K PCU has a fuse as does the YMC PCU. When electricity flows through the
fuse for the first time, the PCU is seen as a new one and the PCU counter is set to
"0." The fuse automatically opens when 250 sheets are printed out. If the fuse does
not open, this symptom is regarded as an error (bits 6 and 7, SP5-994).
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-18
SM
PRINT PROCESS
6.3.6 TRANSFER BELT UNIT DRIVE

Belt tension unit
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[F]
[M]
[G]
[H]
[L]
[I]
[K]
[J]
G081D101.WMF
Sensor actuator
Cam 1
Cam 2
Ratchet mechanism
Drive gear
Pawl
Cam solenoid
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
[K]:
[L]:
[M]:
Cam slider
Belt home position sensor
Changer solenoid
Belt-transfer-roller changer
Interface roller
Shaft
During monochrome printing, the transfer belt contacts the black OPC drum only.
During color printing, the belt contacts all OPC drums. When not required, the belt
is moved away from all OPC drums. These actions are made possible by the belt
tension unit. The unit is driven by the BK motor.
When the cam solenoid [G] turns on, the pawl [F] holds the ratchet mechanism [D]
(and the solenoid turns off). This action enables the shaft [M] to start revolving.
When the shaft has made a quarter revolution, the pawl releases the ratchet
mechanism. During a job, the shaft makes one complete revolution, in four 90degree steps. The position of the shaft depends on the current phase of the job.
Phase 1Home position (0-degree position this is the home position
Phase 2Belt cleaning (90-degree position) the belt is cleaned at the start of
the job
Phase 3Continuous printing (180-degree position) the belt stays in this
position during the job
Phase 4Last-page printing (270-degree position) this phase begins after the
toner images for the final page have been transferred from the OPCs
SM
6-19
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
PRINT PROCESS
Four phases
Phase 1Home position (0-degree position)
This is the position during standby mode. The transfer belt is away from all OPC
drums. The paper transfer roller is away from the transfer belt.
Phase 2Belt cleaning (90-degree position)

Before printing starts, the transfer belt is cleaned. The belt tension unit pushes the
left roller of the transfer belt to the left, taking up the slack in the belt. This then
pulls the transfer belt into contact with the cleaning unit which is located just above
the belt (see bottom of next page for location). The transfer-belt cleaning-blade
then cleans the belt surface.
NOTE: The transfer belt slack is not very noticeable during a visual inspection.
Phase 3Continuous printing (180-degree position)
[C]
[A]: Transfer belt

[B]: Transfer roller
The transfer belt moves to the 180-degree
position for all pages except the final one.
Cam 1 [B on the previous page] causes the
cam slider [H on the previous page] to slide
to the right. This action lifts the belt transfer
roller(s), so the transfer belt contacts the
OPC drum(s). Cam 2 [C] lets the transfer
roller [B] move to the right. The roller then
contacts the transfer belt [A].
[A]
[B]
G081D104.WMF
Phase 4Last-page printing (270-degree position)

For printing the last page of the job, after the toner images have been transferred
from the OPC drums, the transfer belt comes down to the initial position away from
all OPC drums. However, the paper transfer roller still contacts the transfer belt.
Belt home position sensor

The belt home position sensor [I on the previous page] detects the revolution of
the shaft. When the shaft does not return to its home position, the cam solenoid
turns on (and off) several times, transferring the BK motor power to the shaft. If this
action does not return the shaft to its home position, SC 471 appears on the
operation panel.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-20
SM
PRINT PROCESS
Monochrome printing and color printing

NOTE: Monochrome and full color printing can be switched between pages.
Monochrome printing
0
Phase
90
180
270
High
Low
Transfer belt tension
Belt transfer roller
K
Y, M, C
Contact
No contact
No contact
No contact
Contact
Transfer roller
Transfer belt home

position sensor
1 cycle
Activated
Not activated
On
Off
Cam solenoid
Changer solenoid
Off
G081D918.WMF
Waste toner bottle 1 cycle: When the shaft rotates 90 degrees to change the
operation phase, the interface roller mechanism shakes the waste toner bottle in
order to make the waste toner level.
During monochrome printing, the
changer solenoid [J on page 6-19]
stays off, so the belt-transfer-roller
changer [K on page 6-19] does not
slide forward. Only the belt transfer
roller below the black OPC belt is
lifted, and the transfer belt contacts
the black OPC drum [N] only.
[N]
G081D102.WMF
[N]: Black OPC drum
SM
6-21
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
Waste toner
bottle
PRINT PROCESS
Color printing
Phase
90
180
270
High
Low
Transfer belt tension
K
Y, M, C
Transfer roller
Waste toner
bottle
Transfer belt home
position sensor
Contact
No contact
Contact
No contact
Contact
No contact
1 cycle
Activated
Not activated
On
Off
Cam solenoid
On
Changer solenoid
Off
G081D919.WMF
[O]
During color printing, the changer
solenoid is on, so the belt transferroller changer slides forward. The
belt transfer rollers below all OPC
drums [O] are lifted, and the transfer
belt contacts all OPC drums.
G081D103.WMF
[O]: Yellow, magenta, and cyan OPC drums
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-22
SM
PRINT PROCESS
6.3.7 BELT TRANSFER AND CLEANING

Transfer from drum to belt
[A]
[B]
[H]
[C]
[G]
[D]
[F]
[E]
G081D905.WMF
Gear-driven wire paddle

Doctor blade
Development roller
OPC drum
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:

Transfer belt
Toner supply roller
Toner
The transfer belt [F] contacts the OPC drums [D], and moves at the same speed as
the drums rotation. Under the transfer belt at the contact point with each OPC
drum, there is a belt transfer roller [E] charged to about +700 volts (belt transfer
voltage). This roller transfers the toner from the OPC drum to the transfer belt. All
color layers are transferred in one rotation of the transfer belt.
SM
6-23
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
Rev. 06/07/2004
PRINT PROCESS
Transfer from belt to paper

[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
G081D908.WMF
[A]: Paper
[B]: Spiral paddle shaft
[C]: Cleaning blade
[D]: Transfer belt

[E]: Transfer roller
Belt transfer
When all four layers of toner have transferred to the transfer belt [D], the
registration clutch turns on and feeds the paper [A] to the transfer roller [E]. Paper
feed is timed so that the leading edge of the toner image on the belt is aligned to 4
mm from the leading edge of the paper. The paper advances at the same speed as
the transfer belt.
NOTE: OPC film can be used instead of paper.
Transfer roller bias

Charged with a positive voltage (about +1400 volts), the transfer roller attracts the
toner from the transfer belt to the paper. This voltage depends on the ambient
temperature and humidity, print speed, and paper type.
For the model G081 transfer is accomplished using a fixed-voltage method. For the
G120, G121 and G122 a fixed-current transfer method is used. The model G120,
G121 and G122 adjust to the optimal transfer current/voltage based upon the
selected paper type.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-24
SM
PRINT PROCESS
Belt cleaning
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
G081D908.WMF
[D]: Cleaning blade

[E]: Transfer belt
The belt cleaning unit [B] consists of the cleaning blade [D] and spiral shaft [C]. The
cleaning blade removes residual toner from the transfer belt [E] to prevent
ghosting on the next print. The removed toner (waste toner) is transported
through the cleaning unit by the spiral shaft, and is collected in the waste toner
bottle () 6.3.8).
SM
6-25
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]: Paper
[B]: Belt cleaning unit
[C]: Spiral paddle shaft
PRINT PROCESS
6.3.8 WASTE TONER BOTTLE

Mechanism
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[H]
[F]
[G]
G081D108.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
Transfer belt cleaning unit

CMY PCU
Black PCU
Spiral paddle shaft
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
Waste toner gate

Contact blade
Right cover
Waste toner bottle
The spiral paddle shaft [D] transports removed toner (waste toner) to the waste
toner bottle [H]. The waste bottle has five openings: one for the transfer-belt
cleaning unit () 6.3.6), the others for the PCUs [B][C].
The waste toner bottle is lifted by a mechanical link when the right cover [G] is
closed. The cartridge has five contact blades [F]. Each contact blade pushes open
one waste toner gate [E], releasing the waste toner.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-26
SM
PRINT PROCESS
Rev. 01/19/2004
Sensor
[B]
[C]
[H]
[F]
[A]
[D]
[G]
[E]
G081D107.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
Waste toner bottle

Bottle feeler
Bottle detection sensor
Waste toner full sensor
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
Waste toner
Color Registration Board
Shutter
Color Registration Sensor
Waste toner bottle detection
Waste toner full sensor

The waste toner full sensor [D] emits light. The light goes through the bottle if the
waste toner level is low. When the waste toner level is high [E], the light path is
blocked, and Waste Toner is Almost Full is displayed. After this, when 4.58-billion
pixels have been printed, Replace Waste Toner is displayed. In this case, the
machine continues printing until the job ends (or the right cover is opened). When
the job ends, the machine does not process any more jobs until the waste toner
bottle is emptied.
NOTE: 4.58-billion pixels are equivalent to 2,721 sheets of LT/A4 paper (5%
coverage)
To keep the waste toner level, the waste toner bottle vibrates each time the
transfer belt drive unit turns 90 degrees. The interface roller on the belt tension unit
() 6.3.6) creates this vibration when it turns.
SM
6-27
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
When lifted () Mechanism), the waste toner bottle [A] pushes against the bottle
feeler [B]. The feeler pushes the actuator of the bottle detection sensor [C].
PRINT PROCESS
6.3.9 FUSING
Fusing process
[A]
[B]
[H]
[C]
[G]
[A]: Paper
[B]: IH coil (induction heater)
[C]: Heat roller
[D]: Fusing belt
[E]: Transfer belt
[G]: Pressure roller
[H]: Fusing jam detection sensor
[D]
[E]
+
[F]
+
+
+
G081D910.WMF
After the toner image has been applied to the paper [A], it passes through the
fusing unit. The fusing unit contains the heat roller [C]. The IH coil [B] heats the
heat roller. The heat roller heats the fusing belt [D] which is responsible for melting
the toner on the paper. Additionally, the paper is pressed between the fusing belt
and the pressure roller [G], and the melted toner is bonded to the paper.
When the paper exits the fusing unit, it advances to the exit tray. The fusing jam
detection sensor [H] detects the paper. A heat roller rotation sensor is used to
ensure that the heat roller is rotating.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-28
SM
PRINT PROCESS
Circuit board
Engine Control Board
3.3V
IC1
(C )
AN0
37
3.3V
TH1HIG
H
CN15
AN1
38
TH2HIG
ROTAT
E
FSRFUS
E
GND
NFSRJA
3.3V
IC20
0
IC14
( S C)
11
/
+
*
3.3V
NFSRJA
182
3.3V
ROTAT
E
FSRNO
N
TH1HIG
IC6
181
7
180
+
-
Fusing Unit -
Encode
IC6
Vref
2.27V
179
60
degree
+
-
2
3
60
degree
Vref
0.60V
CN32
NZCROS
S
VIN
100V
79
66
+24V
NCSAD
IHON
DZCRO
S
VIN100
V
IC26
IC25
1
IC20
IHON
IHONGAT
E
68 5
167 3
12
11
SET
Q37
CLK
CLR
Q
13
GND
PHOTO
COUPLE
DAC
IH INVERTER
BLOCK
RECTIFIE
R
FILTER
IH Power Supply Board
61
Power Supply Unit
NCSAD
Fuse
* Paper jam detection sensor

+ Rotation sensor
, Pressure roller
- Paper
. Fusing belt
/ IH unit
0 Thermistor 1 and thermistor 2
1 Encoder
NOTE: Thermistor 1 is located in the middle of the fusing belt; thermistor 2 is

located towards the rear of the fusing belt. Both Thermistors open at
185 C.
SM
6-29
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
G081D915.WMF
PRINT PROCESS
Fusing unit detection

The fusing unit detection signal FSRFUSE indicates that the fusing unit is installed.
The circuit closes when the fusing unit connector is properly seated. The table
below lists the pin location.
Pin No.
CN15
1
Signal
Name
FSRFUSE
In/Out
CN15
In
Remarks
Detects the fusing unit
CN15:
On engine control board
Paper jam detection

The paper jam detection signal NFSRJAM indicates that a paper jam has occurred
in the fusing unit. The circuit is closed if the paper jam detection sensor [*] in the
fusing unit detects a sheet of paper [-]. The table lists the pin locations. (Refer to
illustration on pg. 6-29.)
Signal
Name
Pin No.
CN15
CN1601
NFSRJAM
In/Out
CN15
CN1601
In
Out
Remarks
Detects paper jams in the
fusing unit
CN15:
CN1601: On fusing unit
Rotation detection
The encoder monitors whether the fusing belt is rotating. If the fusing belt breaks,
the encoder will not detect any rotation. The fusing belt rotation signal ROTATE
indicates whether the fusing belt [.] is rotating. While the encoder [1] is rotating,
the signal from the rotation sensor [+] on the fusing unit alternates. The encoder is
linked to the fusing belt shaft via gears. The table lists the pin locations. (Refer to
illustration on pg. 6-29.)
Signal
Name
ROTATE
Pin No.
CN15
CN1601
5
In/Out
CN15
CN1601
In
Out
Remarks
Detects the fusing unit
rotation
CN15:
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-30
SM
PRINT PROCESS
Temperature detection
The thermistor signals, TH1HIGH and TH2HIGH, indicate that the temperature of
the fusing belt has become too high. The TH1HIGH circuit is closed when
thermistor 1 [0] detects high temperature in the middle of the fusing belt. The
TH2HIGH circuit is closed when thermistor 2 [0] detects high temperature at the
far side (rear) of the fusing belt. The signal TH1HIGH is used to control the fusing
temperature () Fusing temperature control). The table lists the pin locations.
(Refer to illustration on pg. 6-29.)
Signal
Name
Pin No.
CN15
CN1601
CN15
In/Out
CN1601
TH1HIGH
In
Out
TH2HIGH
In
Out
Remarks
Detects high temperature
in the middle of the belt
Detects high temperature
at the rear end of the belt
Detailed
Descriptions
CN15: On engine control board

NOTE: If several sheets of narrow-width paper are continuously fed, the
temperature at the ends of the belt become much higher than the
temperature in the middle. Thermistor 2 (TH2HIGH) prevents the ends of
the belt from overheating.
SM
6-31
G081/G120/G121/G122
PRINT PROCESS
Fusing temperature control

Temperature/Resistance
Target
temperature T
Temperature
Resistance
Heat Up
Temperature Control
Slow Down
Timing Chart
Signal on
Signal off
IHPOWER
Signal on
Signal off
IHON
The timing chart for the zero cross detection signal NZCROSS
and IH drive signal IHON is as shown below.
IHON
NZCROSS
Vin
Vin
Threshold
20 msed (50 Hz)
16.7 msec (60 Hz)
G081D917.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-32
SM
PRINT PROCESS
The IH power control signals IHPOWER and IHON are used to provide the IH unit
[/] with electric power. The on/off timing of IHON is adjusted in accordance with
the zero cross detection signal NZCROSS. The table lists the pin locations.(Refer
to illustration on pg 6-29.)
Signal
Name
Pin No.
CN32
CN2503
In/Out
CN32
CN2503
IHPOWER
IHON
Out
In
Remarks
Closes the +24V circuit
Provides the IH unit with
electricity
CN32: On engine control board

CN2503: On power supply board
Detailed
Descriptions
T indicates the target fusing temperature. In the 600-dpi printing mode, T is about
175C. The fusing belt temperature is different for the 1200-dpi printing mode,
thick-paper printing mode and transparency-printing mode. When the printer is idle,
IHPOWER is off, and the fusing belt is not heated.
SM
6-33
G081/G120/G121/G122
PRINT PROCESS
6.3.10 PAPER FEED

[A]
[U]
[B]
[C]
[S]
[T]
[D]
[E]
[R]
[F]
[Q]
[G]
[H]
[P]
[I]
[J]
[O]
[K]
[L]
[N]
[M]
G081D909.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
[I]:
[J]:
[K]:
Paper
Transfer belt
Registration roller
Registration sensor
Paper feed roller (main unit)
Pickup roller (main unit)
Paper end sensor (main unit)
Paper size detection switch
Standard tray (main unit)
Pickup roller (optional unit)
G081/G120/G121/G122
[L]:
[M]:
[N]:
[O]:
[P]:
[Q]:
[R]:
[S]:
[T]:
[U]:
6-34
Pickup roller (optional unit)

Paper feed roller (optional unit)
Paper feed roller (optional unit)
By-pass feed motor
By-pass tray
Paper end sensor (by-pass tray)
Pickup roller (by-pass tray)
One-way roller
Duplex paper feed roller (located
on optional duplex unit)
SM
PRINT PROCESS
Drive motors
The table below lists the motors that drive the feed rollers (standard [I] and optional
[K][M] trays) and the one-way roller (by-pass tray [Q]).
Feed roller
Standard tray [I]
By-pass tray [Q]
Optional tray [K][[M]
Motor
BK motor
By-pass feed motor [P]
Paper feed motor (optional tray unit)
Sensors
The table lists the switch and sensors and their functions.
Sensor/switch
Registration sensor [D]
Paper end sensor [G]
Paper size detection switch [H]
By-pass paper end sensor [R]
Function
Detects paper arriving at the registration roller
Detects whether there is paper in the tray
Detects the tray and the paper size
Detects whether there is paper in the tray
NOTE: The paper tray detection switch is mechanically linked to the paper size
detection lever [H].
Paper size detection switch combination
Toggle
switch
Toggle 1
Toggle 2
Toggle 3
Letter
A4
B5
Legal
L
L
L
H
L
L
L
H
L
H
H
L
NOTE: H (=high) indicates the switch is not pushed; L (=low) indicates the switch
is pushed.
SM
6-35
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
The paper size detection switch is composed of three toggle switches: toggles 1, 2,
and 3. The combination of toggles 1 and 2 indicates the size of the paper in the
tray while toggle 3 works as a paper tray detection sensor. The table lists the
detected paper sizes and the combination of the toggle switches. Note that toggle 3
is always pushed when the tray is set.
PRINT PROCESS
Registration clutch
The DC BK motor supplies drive to the registration roller [C], which is under
rotational control of the registration clutch. This roller feeds paper to the transfer
roller when the image is ready to be printed.
Feeding envelopes
The by-pass tray can feed envelopes.
Paper feed speed

This machine has three paper feed speeds (for feed from registration roller to
fusing unit) depending on the selected resolution.
Mode
B/W
Color
OHP/Thick
Resolution
(dpi)
300 x 300
600 x 600
1,200 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
600 x 600
1,200 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
600 x 600
1,200 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
Feed speed
(mm/s)
Print speed
(ppm)
124
20
50
100
16
100
16
50
During a monochrome print job, the machine changes the speed if there is a page
with color in the middle of the job. However, it will not change the speed if there is a
monochrome page in the middle of a color print job.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-36
SM
PRINT PROCESS
6.3.11 STANDARD TRAY LOCK MECHANISM
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[E]
[F]
G081D112.WMF
[D]: Actuator (by-pass tray cover)

[E]: Front door
[F]: By-pass tray cover
The standard tray and the front door [E] are locked when the by-pass tray cover [F]
is open. There is an actuator [D] located on the left inside part of the by-pass tray
cover. As the actuator releases the mechanical link [C], the bar [B] on the tray goes
through the opening [A] of the front door, and engages with the frame. This
prevents the paper tray from being pulled-out of the machine while the by-pass tray
cover is open.
SM
6-37
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]: Opening (front door)

[B]: Bar (standard tray)
[C]: Mechanical link (standard tray)
PRINT PROCESS
6.3.12 PAPER EXIT AND PAPER SWITCHBACK

Normal Printing Mode (Non-Duplex Printing Mode)
[B]
[A]
[C]
[F]
[E]
[D]
G081D912.WMF
[A]: Paper path switching guide

[B]: Switching lever
[C]: Paper exit roller
[D]: Double teeth gear

[E]: Switchback solenoid
[F]: Switching lever
Paper transport
After fusing, the paper exit roller [C] feeds the printed paper to the exit tray. The BK
motor drives the double teeth gear [D], which drives the paper exit roller gear. The
arrows indicate the rotation direction of the gears.
Sensors
The paper actuates the paper exit sensor when it reaches the paper exit roller. If
the paper does not actuate the sensor at the correct time, an error message
appears. If the paper continues to actuate the sensor for an extended time, another
message appears.
The printed paper is sent to the exit tray face down. The paper overflow sensor is
below the paper exit roller. This sensor detects whether the output tray is full. If the
tray is full, a message appears on the display.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-38
SM
PRINT PROCESS
Duplex Printing Mode (Paper Switchback)
(Duplex Mode)
[A]
(Figure-1)
[B]
(Figure-2)
[H]
[C]
[G]
[F]
[E]
[D]
G081D911.WMF
Paper path switching guide

Paper exit roller
Switchback pinch roller
Double teeth gear
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
Rotation switching gear B

Switchback solenoid
Switching lever
Rotation switching gear A
The switchback solenoid [F] turns on before the leading edge of the paper passes
the paper exit sensor (Figure 1).
The switching lever [G] engages and locks the switching gear B [E].
The BK motor drives the paper exit roller [B].
The switching lever shifts the paper path switching guide [A] to the right. This
feeds the paper between the paper exit roller and the switchback pinch roller
[C]. The paper is sent to the exit tray, but is not released. Next, the
switchback solenoid turns off (Figure 2).
The switching lever returns to its home position, and locks switching gear A
[H].
The BK motor drives the paper exit roller. As the paper is positioned above
the exit roller, it is fed through in the opposite direction.
The junction gate moves back to its home position. The paper passes
through the duplex unit, which then feeds the paper to the registration roller.
SM
6-39
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
PRINT PROCESS
6.3.13 COLOR POINT ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment types
Using the color registration sensor board, the machines software corrects the toner
image positions on the transfer belt. During the adjustment, black, yellow, magenta,
and cyan lines are produced on the transfer belt, and read by the color registration
sensor. Based on the information from the sensor, any of the following four
different types of adjustments is automatically conducted.
Main-scan start position control

This adjustment is done when the main-scan start positions of the four colors are
not aligned. One or more main-scan start positions are shifted.
K
C
G081D954.WMF
Before
After
Sub-scan start position control

This adjustment is done when the sub-scan positions of the four colors are not
arranged at regular intervals. One or more sub-scan start positions are shifted.
K
C
G081D955.WMF
Before
G081/G120/G121/G122
After
6-40
SM
PRINT PROCESS
Dot insertion
This adjustment is done when the main scan length for each color is different,
which produces lines of different lengths. The longest of the four lines is taken as
the base-line (target), and dots are inserted into any shorter lines to make them all
the same length as the longest one.
K
C
G081D956.WMF
Before
After
Image data shift

This adjustment is done when the lines of the four colors are not parallel. One or
more of the yellow, magenta, and cyan lines is divided into segments. The
segments are arranged into one zigzag line that is parallel with the other lines. If
this adjustment adversely effects the output images, deactivate SP5-995-1 ()
5.3.1).
NOTE: Strictly speaking, the four lines are rarely parallel. This adjustment is
conducted automatically if one or more lines are significantly skewed.
K
Before
After
Adjustment timing
Color point adjustment is done under either of the following conditions.
Just after the main switch is turned on.
The number of output sheets has reached the value specified with SP5993
(default: 250 sheets) during or at the end of the preceding job. (The
adjustment is done before the next job starts.)
SM
6-41
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
G081D957.WMF
CONTROLLER
Rev. 06/03/2004
6.4 CONTROLLER
6.4.1 OVERVIEW
Flash ROM
8 MB
NVRAM
8 kB
NVRAM
Board 64 kB
PCMCIA
Memory
Card
NVRAM I/F
PCMCIA
Card I/F
Flash ROM
DIMM x 2
ROM DIMM
Mask ROM
4 MB
BUS
Network
I/F
PHY
IEEE1284
I/F
HDD
USB I/F
CPU
Main Control
Board
IDE
I/F
COMIC
SDRAM DIMM
SDRAM
DIMM x 2
KLAVIER
IEEE1394
I/F
PCI
I/F
IEEE802.11
I/F
Bluetooth I/F
VIDEO I/F
Engine Control Board

G081D920.WMF
The controller uses RA2K also referred to as GW (Grand Workware) architecture.

RA2K architecture is also referred to as Next Generation architcture.
1. CPU: QED RM7000 (400 MHz; G081/G120, 350MHz: G121/G122)
2. COMIC (Color Model IC): RA2K or Next Generation/(GW) architecture ASIC.
This uses a 120 MHz bus (64 bit) for interfacing with CPU and memory. It
controls the interface with the CPU and controls the following functions:
memory, local bus, interrupts, PCI bus, video data, HDD, network, operation
panel, IEEE1284, and image processing.
3. KLAVIER: This ASIC is the interface with the engine controller board.
4. SDRAM DIMM (2 slots): 64 or 128 MB (G120) SDRAM (resident), expandable
up to 384 MB (256 MB G120/G121) with a 64 MB, 128 MB, or 256 MB SDRAM
5. Flash ROM: 8 MB flash ROM programmed for the system and network
applications; 4 MB mask ROM for storing internal printer fonts
6. ROM DIMM (2 slots): The DIMM installed in the machine includes 8 MB flash
ROM programmed for system, printer, PCL5c, PS3, and RPCS applications.
The remaining DIMM slot is used for the Bluetooth Option.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-42
SM
CONTROLLER
7. NVRAM: 8 KB NVRAM for storing the printer parameters and logged data
8. IEEE1284 Interface: Supports compatible, nibble, and ECP modes
9. Network Interface: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
10. NVRAM board (option): 64 KB NVRAM used for storing a record of the
number of pages printed under each User Code.
11. USB Interface: See the USB Interface section.
12. IEEE1394 Interface (option): See the IEEE1394 Interface section.
13. IEEE 802.11b Interface (option): See the IEEE 802.11b Interface section.
14. Bluetooth Interface (option): See the Bluetooth Interface section.
15. HDD (option): A 3.5" HDD (20.5 GB) can be connected using the IDE interface.
The hard disk is partitioned as shown below. The partition sizes cannot be
adjusted.
Partition
Size
File System 1
500 MB
Image TMP
9800 MB
Job Log
10 MB
Function
Downloaded fonts,
forms.
Collation, sample print,
locked print.
Job log.
Comment
Remain stored even after
cycling power off/on.
Commonly used area for
applications, erased after
power off.
Remains stored even after
cycling power off/on.
For details on downloading software from an PCMCIA memory card, see Service
Tables Firmware Update Procedure.
SM
6-43
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
The system and application software for the following boards can be downloaded
from the Controller PCMCIA memory card.
Controller (Flash ROM and flash ROM DIMM)
Engine
CONTROLLER
PCMCIA CARD I/F
Mask ROM
ASIC
(COMIC)
CPU
DIP SW
Engine I/F
ASIC
(KLAVIER)
NVRAM I/F
Flash
ROM
PCI Option I/F
IDE I/F (HDD)
ROM DIMM I/F x2
Flash
ROM
IEEE 1284 I/F
6.4.2 BOARD LAYOUT
Network I/F
SD RAM DIMM I/F x2

LE
D
G081D922.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-44
SM
CONTROLLER
6.4.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING

RPCS Driver
Host
Printer
Engine
Controller
ICM Engine/
ICM profile
8 bit K
RGB
RPCS Driver
Matching
RCM profile
RGB
Gray
Correction
UCR/BG
Corrected
RGB
8 bit
CMYK
Correction
CMYK
Toner Limitation
CMYK
8 bit
Dithering & ROP
CMYK
1 bit
G081D937.WMFF
PCL5c Driver
Host
Printer
Engine
Controller
(Matching by Host)
RGB
RGB 8 bit
RGB
Decode
&
Scale
8 bit
RGB
8bit
ICM Engine/
ICM profile
Color
Matching
Detailed
Descriptions
PCL Driver
CMY
8bit
RGB 2 CMY
Correction
CMY
8bit
Dithering
&
ROP
CMY
1bit
BG/UCR,
Gray Correction
Toner Limitation
CMYK
1 bit
G081D938.WMFF
SM
6-45
G081/G120/G121/G122
CONTROLLER
PS3 Driver
XYZ
Color
Matching
CMYK
8 bit
RGB
Vivid
Super Vivid
None
RGB
to
XYZ
BG/UCR
(RGB
Correction)
CMYK
CMYK
8 bit
CMYK
CMYK
Dither and RIP
Fine
Fine Super
Gamma
XYZ
PS Driver
Toner Limitation
CRD
Gray Correction
CIE
to
XYZ
CIE ABC
CMYK
1 bit
CMM/
ICC/ICM
Profile
G081D939.WMFF
CMS (Color Management System)

CMS optimizes the color print quality using a color profile based on the
characteristics of the printer. With RPCS, the color profile is applied by the driver.
With PS3 and PCL5c, the color profile is applied in the matching/CRD module on
the controller except when using CMM/ICC/ICM profiles.
CMS is not used when the color profile setting in the printer driver is set to Off.
Gray Correction
Gray correction processes gray with K or CMYK toner depending on the driver
settings.
BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)

The RGB data is converted to CMYK data with BG/UCR. During CMYK conversion,
some CMY data is replaced with K data by the BG/UCR algorithm.
Gamma Correction
The printer gamma can be adjusted using a controller SP mode (Gamma Adj.). For
CMYK, their are15 adjustment points between 0 and 100%. The corrected gamma
data is stored in NVRAM.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-46
SM
CONTROLLER
Toner Limitation
Toner limitation prevents toner from being scattered around text or printed lines.
Maximum values have been prepared independently for text and photo. They can
be adjusted with controller SP mode (Toner Limit).
Default: 190% for text, 260% for photo
Adjustable range: 100% to 400%
Dither Processing and ROP/RIP

Dither patterns have been prepared for photo and text independently. Dithering
converts the 8-bit data to 1-bit data. However, these dither patterns create the
illusion of 256 gradations for high quality prints. The optimum dither pattern is
selected depending on the selected resolution.
Detailed
Descriptions
RIP: Raster Image Processing

ROP: Raster Operation
SM
6-47
G081/G120/G121/G122
CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS
6.5 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS

6.5.1 SAMPLE PRINT
This feature requires installing the optional HDD. This function gives users a
chance to check the print results before starting a multiple-set print run.
The size of the hard disk partition for the sample print feature is 6.0 GB. This
partition is also used by the collation and locked print features.
The partition can hold up to 30 files, including files stored using locked print.
The partition can hold a log containing up to 20 errors, excluding jobs stored
using locked print.
The maximum number of pages is 1,000. This number includes those jobs using
locked print and collation.
6.5.2 LOCKED PRINT

This feature requires installing the optional HDD. When using this feature, the print
job is stored in the machine but will not be printed until the user inputs an ID at the
machines operation panel. This ID must match the ID that was input with the
printer driver.
Stored data is automatically deleted after it is printed.
Stored data can be manually deleted at the operation panel.
The partition can hold up to 30 files, including files stored using sample print.
The partition can hold a log containing up to 20 errors, excluding logs stored
using locked print.
The maximum number of pages is 1,000. This number includes those jobs using
sample print and collation.
Locked print uses the same hard disk partition as sample print and collation,
which is 6.0 GB.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-48
SM
6.5.3 PAPER SOURCE SELECTION

Tray Priority (Auto Tray Select)
The Tray Priority setting determines the start
of the tray search when the user selects
Auto Tray Select with the driver.
The machine searches for a paper tray with
the specified paper size and type.
When no tray contains paper that matches
the paper size and type specified by the
driver, the controller stops printing until the
user loads the correct paper.
The Tray Priority setting can be specified
using the Paper Input menu of the user tools.
Priority Tray
Start of Tray Search
Tray 1
Tray 2 (Optional)
Tray 3 (Optional)
Bypass Feed
G081D940.WMF
Tray Lock
If Tray Lock is enabled for a tray, the controller skips the locked tray in the tray
search process.
NOTE: In this machine, each paper source can be locked, including by-pass
feed. If all paper sources are locked and Auto Tray Select is specified
from the driver, the machine displays an error and stops printing.
Manual Tray Select
Detailed
Descriptions
If the selected tray does not have the paper size and type specified by the driver,
the controller stops printing until the user loads the correct paper.
SM
6-49
G081/G120/G121/G122
6.5.4 AUTO CONTINUE

When this function is enabled, the machine continues printing even if there is no
paper tray which matches the paper size and paper type specified by the driver.
The machine searches for a paper tray in the following way.
NOTE: The default setting for this feature is disabled.
Auto Tray Select

When there is no paper tray that matches the
paper size and type specified by the driver,
the machine searches for any tray that has
paper, and prints from the first tray it finds.
The start of the tray search is the tray
selected as the Priority Tray.
Priority Tray
Start of Tray Search
Tray 1
Tray 2 (Optional)
Tray 3 (Optional)
Bypass Feed
G081D941.WMF
Manual Tray Select

The machine prints from the selected tray even if the paper size and type do not
match the setting specified within the drivers settings.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-50
SM
ACS (Auto Color Sensing) Mode
ACS: On
K developing
Color
Color
Color
Developing
K developing
Color
Color
ACS: Off
Color
Color
Color
Color Developing
G081D926.WMF
If ACS is on, the transfer belt remains fixed against the K drum only for pages with
black and white data. If any pages with color data appear, the transfer belt lifts
against all drums. If the pages following a color print page are black and white
pages, the transfer belts position changes to contact to the K drum only. It takes
approximately 15 seconds to switch modes.
If ACS is off and color mode is selected, all data is printed with the transfer belt
positioned against all four drums. The belt does not move even if a K only page
appears.
SM
6-51
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
The machine can print in color or monochrome mode (selected via the printer
drivers interface). In color mode, ACS can be switched on or off using a user tool
(default: on).
Energy saver mode

Activate the user mode to set energy saver modes 1 and 2. You can set On/Off for
energy saver mode 1. This is the Preheat mode. The default is on. When the
printer switches to energy saver mode, the power indicator turns off, while the on
line indicator stays on. With energy saver 2, you can set how many minutes the
printer waits before switching to energy saver mode (5, 15, 30, 45, 60). In energy
saver 2, the default is on (60 minutes).
Start of
heating
Temperature
15.5 sec.
Start of
printing
Start of
heating
25.0 sec.
Start of
printing
Start of
heating
Start of
printing
28.0 sec.
Printing
Energy saver
mode off
Energy saver
mode 1
Energy saver
mode 2
End of
print job
5, 15, 30, 45, or 60 min.
Start of energy
saver mode 2
Time
G081D929.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-52
SM
IEEE1394 INTERFACE
6.6 IEEE1394 INTERFACE

6.6.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Hardware Specification
Interface: IEEE1394 (6 pins)
(non-power supply, cable power repeated-IEEE1394a-2000 compliant)
Ports:
2 ports
Data rates: 400Mbps/200Mbps/100Mbps
System Requirements
PC:
IBM PC/AT with IEEE1394 port
OS:
MS Windows 2000 upgraded with Service Pack 1 (minimum)
Cable length: 4.5m (15ft)
6.6.2 IEEE1394 SCSI PRINT

IEEE1394, also known as FireWire (a name patented by Apple), is an easy-to-use
peer-to-peer networking technology allowing speeds of up to 400 Mbps.
Detailed
Descriptions
The current standard contains the following features, which are supported in most
devices:
Hot swapping (cables can be connected and disconnected while the
computer and other devices are switched on)
Peer-to-peer networking (no hub required)
No terminator or device ID is required, unlike SCSI
Automatic configuration of devices upon start-up, or plug and play.
Real-time data transfer at 100, 200, and 400 Mbps
Common connectors for different devices
1394 I/F
1394 I/F
G081D942.WMF
The cable length is limited to 4.5 m (15ft). However, up to 16 cables and 63

devices can be connected to an IEEE1394 network.
IEEE1394 cables can be either 4-pin (data only) or 6-pin (data and power).
IEEE1394 allows either 6-pin or 4-pin connectors. However, this machine only uses
the 6-pin style connector. The machine has two 6-pin ports.
SM
6-53
G081/G120/G121/G122
IEEE1394 INTERFACE
6.6.3 BLOCK DIAGRAM
Clock
Oscillator
EEPROM
PHY
TSB41AB2
Link
TSB12LV23A
1394 I/F
PC
1394 I/F
Option I/F (CN4)
IEEE1394 Board
Controller Board
G081D950.WMF
PHY: Physical layer control device

Link: Link layer control device
EEPROM: 256-byte ROM
6.6.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT

Pin assignment
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 5
Pin 1
Pin 4
Pin 3
Pin 6
Pin 6
G081D951.WMF
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Signal Description
Cable Power
GND
Receive strobe
Transmit data
Receive data
Transmit strobe
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-54
SM
IEEE1394 INTERFACE
6.6.5 REMARKS
Note the following details about this unit.
The machine does not print reports specifically for IEEE1394. Print the
Configuration Page during installation to check that the machine recognizes the
card.
There is no spooler or print queue. If a computer tries to print over the IEEE1394
while the printer is busy, the IEEE1394 interface card inside the printer will return
a busy signal.
After starting a job using IEEE1394, do not switch the printer off until the job has
been completed. Although the printer may appear to be inactive, it may be in the
middle of an IEEE1394 protocol exchange with the computer.
When using IEEE1394, it is not possible to check the printer status from the
computer with a utility such as Printer Manager for Client.
If there are problems printing using the IEEE1394 interface, check the following.
Is the computer using Windows 2000 with Service Pack 1 (minimum).
Has the interface card been replaced recently? Each card has an individual
address, similar to the MAC address in an Ethernet card. If the card was
changed, the driver still looks for the old card. The new card is considered as
another device and a new printer appears in Windows Control panel. The new
card must be configured in the same way as the previous configuration (the old
printer icon in Windows Control Panel should be deleted).
Is there a loop somewhere in the network? An IEEE1394 network must be a
chain or a branched chain. There can be no loops.
Try to find out where in the chain the problem is occurring. Test the machine
one-to-one with the computer to determine if the printer is defective (when the
printers interface cable is plugged in, the computer should see Printer Ready,
when the cable is disconnected, the computer should see Offline).
SM
6-55
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
6.6.6 TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES
IEEE1394 INTERFACE
6.6.7 IP OVER 1394

In addition to IEEE1394 printing, this machine supports IEEE1394 printing by
setting an IP address. This feature is called IP over 1394.
The former IEEE1394 printing without IP address, is known as SCSI printing.
Software Application
TCP/IP (Virtual) Port
SCSI (Virtual)
Port
IP over 1394
Ethernet
Port
IEEE1394 Port
SCSI Printing
IEEE802.11b
(Wireless LAN)
Port
IP over 1394
Printing
G081D943.WMF
NOTE: 1) Windows XP is the only OS which supports IP over 1394.

(Windows 9X/ME/2000 & Windows NT4 can also be used when used in
combination with SmartNet Monitor.)
2) Windows XP and 2000 support IEEE1394 SCSI printing.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-56
SM
USB
6.7 USB
This model is equipped with standard USB.
Interface: USB 1.1, USB 2.0
Data rates: 480 Mbps (high speed), 12 Mbps (full speed), 1.5 Mbps (low speed);
High-speed mode is only supported by USB 2.0.
6.7.2 USB 1.1/2.0

USB (Universal Serial Bus) offers simple connectivity for computers, printers,
keyboards, and other peripherals. In a USB environment, terminators, device IDs
(like SCSI), and DIP switch settings are not necessary.
USB 1.1 contains the following features:
Plug & Play
Hot swapping (cables can be connected and disconnected while the
computer and other devices are switched on)
No terminator or device ID required
Data rates of 12 Mbps (full speed), and 1.5 Mbps (low speed)
Common connectors for different devices
USB 2.0 is a successor to the USB 1.1 specification. It uses the same cables,
connectors, and software interfaces. It provides an easy-to-use connection to a
wide range of products with a maximum data rate of 480 Mbps (high speed).
Detailed
Descriptions
Up to 127 devices can be connected and six cascade connections are possible.
Power is supplied from the computer, and the maximum cable length is 5 m.
SM
6-57
G081/G120/G121/G122
USB
6.7.3 USB CONNECTORS

USB is a serial protocol and a physical link that transmits all data on a single pair of
wires. Another pair provides power to downstream peripherals.
The USB standard specifies two types of connectors, type A connectors for
upstream connection to the host system, and type B connectors for downstream
connection to the USB device.
G081D945.WMF
Type A connector
G081D952.WMF
Type B connector
6.7.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT
Flash
ROM
NVRAM Opton I/F
IEEE 1284 I/F
Flash
ROM
PCMCIA CARD I/F
HDD Interface
IEEE1284 I/F Board
Controller Board
ROM DIMM I/F x2
The controller has a type B receptacle (CN10).
ASIC
(COMIC)
USB I/F
ASIC
(KLAVIER)
Option I/F
Engine Interface (CN1)
2 1
CPU
3 4
SD RAM DIMM I/F x2
Ethernet I/F
USB Board
G081D932.WMF
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Signal Description
Power
Data
Data +
Power GND
G081/G120/G121/G122
Wiring Assignment
Red
White
Green
White
6-58
SM
USB
6.7.5 REMARKS
The machine does not print reports specifically for USB.
Only one host computer is allowed for the USB connection.
After starting a job using USB, do not switch the printer off until the job has been
completed.
When a user cancels a print job and data transmitted to the printer has not been
printed at the time of cancellation, the job will continue to print up to the page
where the print job was cancelled
When the controller board is replaced, the host computer will recognize the
machine as a different device.
Related SP Mode
USB Settings are located in the printer engine service mode. Data rates can be
adjusted to full speed fixed (12 Mbps). This switch may be used for troubleshooting
if there is a data transfer error using the high-speed mode (480 Mbps).
Detailed
Descriptions
Data rates can also be adjusted using the UP (User Program) mode USB Setting
in the Host Interface in the System menu.
This mode can be accessed only when the Enter, Escape, then Menu keys are
pressed (individually, not together) to enter the UP mode.
SM
6-59
G081/G120/G121/G122
IEEE802.11B (WIRELESS LAN)
6.8 IEEE802.11B (WIRELESS LAN)

A wireless LAN is a flexible data communication system used to extend or replace
a wired LAN. Wireless LAN employs radio frequency technology to transmit and
receive data over the air and minimize the need for wired connections.
With wireless LANs, users can access information on a network without looking
for a place to plug into the network.
Network managers can set up or expand networks without installing or moving
wires.
Most wireless LANs can be integrated into existing wired networks. Once
installed, the network treats wireless nodes like any other physically wired
network component.
Flexibility and mobility make wireless LANs both effective extensions of and
attractive alternatives to wired networks.
Standard applied:
Data transfer rates:
Network protocols:
IEEE802.11b
11 Mbps/5.5 Mbps/2 Mbps/1 Mbps (auto sense)
TCP/IP, Apple Talk, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX
Bandwidth:
2.4GHz
(divided over 14 channels, 2400 to 2497 MHz for each
channel)
NOTE: The wreless LAN access cannot be active at the same time as the Ethernet
port. The LAN Type setting in the Host Interface menu determines which
LAN interface will be used.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-60
SM
6.8.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM
Interface Board
LED2 (Orange)
802.11b
PCMCIA Card
PCMCIA
Card Bus
Controller
C
N3
C
N1
Engine
Control Board
Parallel I/F
LED1 (Green)
Controller Board
G081D946.WMF
LED Indicators
DESCRIPTION
Link status
Power distribution
ON
Link success
Power on
OFF
Link failure
Power off
Detailed
Descriptions
LED
LED1 (Green)
LED2 (Orange)
SM
6-61
G081/G120/G121/G122
6.8.3 TRANSMISSION MODE

The following transmission modes are provided for wireless communication.
Ad Hoc Mode
G081D947.WMF
Ad hoc mode allows communication between each device (station) in a simple

peer-to-peer network. In this mode, all devices must use the same channel to
communicate.
In this machine, the default transmission mode is ad hoc mode and the default
channel is 11. First, set up the machine in ad hoc mode and program the
necessary settings. This is required even if the machine will be used in
infrastructure mode.
To switch between ad hoc and infrastructure modes, use the following user tool:
Host Interface Menu - IEEE802.11b - Comm Mode
Infrastructure Mode
Access Point
G081D948.WMF
The infrastructure mode allows communication between each computer and the
printer via an access point equipped with an antenna and wired into the network.
This arrangement is used for topologies that are more complex.
The wireless LAN client must use the same SSID (Service Set ID) as the access
point in order to communicate.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-62
SM
6.8.4 SECURITY FEATURES

SSID (Service Set ID)
The SSID is used by the access point to recognize the client and allow access to
the network. Only clients that share the same SSID with the access point can
access the network.
NOTE: The SSID can be set using the web status monitor or telnet
Using the SSID in Ad hoc mode

When the SSID is used in ad hoc mode and nothing is set, the machine
automatically uses ASSID as the SSID. In such a case, ASSID must also be set
at the client.
NOTE: SSID in ad hoc mode is sometimes called Network Name in some
devices.
Some devices automatically change from ad hoc mode to infrastructure mode
when the same SSID is used in ad hoc mode and infrastructure mode. In such a
case, to use the device in ad hoc mode, use a specified SSID in infrastructure
mode and use ASSID in the ad hoc mode.
MAC Address
If the infrastructure mode is used, access to the network can also be limited at the
access points using the MAC address. This setting may not be available with
certain types of access points.
SM
6-63
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)

WEP is a coding system designed to protect wireless data transmission. In order to
unlock encoded data, the same WEP key is required on the receiving side. There
are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys. This machine supports both 64 and 128 bit WEP.
NOTE: The WEP key can be set using the web status monitor or telnet.
6.8.5 TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES

Communication Status
Wireless LAN communication status can be checked with the UP mode W.LAN
Signal in the Maintenance menu. This can also be checked using the Web Status
Monitor or Telnet.
The status is described on a simple number scale.
STATUS DISPLAY
Good
Fair
Poor
Unavailable
COMMUNICATION STATUS
76~100
41~75
21~40
0~20
NOTE: Communication status can be measured only when the infrastructure mode
is being used.
Channel Settings
If a communication error occurs because of electrical noise such as interference
with other electrical devices, etc., you may have to change the channel settings.
To avoid interference with neighboring channels, a separation of 3 channels is
recommended. For example, if there are problems using channel 11 (default), try
using channel 8.
25 MHz
Channel
MHz
2,412
25 MHz
2,437
10
11
12
13
2,462
G081D949.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-64
SM
Troubleshooting steps
If there are problems using the wireless LAN, check the following:
1) Check the LED indicator on the wireless LAN card.
2) Check if IEEE802.11b is selected in the UP mode LAN Type in Network
Setup in the Host Interface menu.
3) Check if the channel settings are correct.
4) Check if the SSID and WEP are correctly set.
If infrastructure mode is being used:
1) Check if the MAC address is properly set
2) Check the communication status.
Detailed
Descriptions
If the communication status is poor, bring the machine closer to the access point.
Additionally, check for any obstructions between the machine and the access point.
If the problem cannot be solved, try changing the channel setting.
SM
6-65
G081/G120/G121/G122
BLUETOOTH (WIRELESS)
6.9 BLUETOOTH (WIRELESS)

Bluetooth wireless provides radio links between mobile computers, mobile phones
and other portable handheld devices.
Bluetooth contains the following features.
Cheaper compared to the IEEE802.11b wireless LAN.
Many protocols for infrared transmission (IrDA) can be used with Bluetooth.
A Bluetooth device can connect to other Bluetooth devices without any special
settings.
Standard applied:
Data transfer rates:
Bandwidth:
Bluetooth 1.1 (Bluetooth Special Interest Group)

1 Mbps
2.4GHz Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS)
6.9.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM
ROM DIMM
CN4
PCMCIA
Card Bus
Controller
Parallel I/F
Bluetooth
PCMCIA Card
CN3
Interface Board
Controller Board
G081D924.WMF
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-66
SM
6.9.3 COMMUNICATION USING BLUETOOTH

Piconet
Bluetooth devices communicate with each other device in the ad hoc mode. This
network is called a "Piconet. A Piconet may contain a maximum of 8 Bluetooth
devices.
There is one master device and seven slave devices in a Piconet. The master
device controls the hopping frequency and timing, as well as storing the ID codes
of the slave devices. The master and slave devices can be swapped. Once the
master device leaves the Piconet, one of the slave device then becomes the new
master.
Machines with the Bluetooth option become potential slave devices to connect to
the PC.
Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS)
Detailed
Descriptions
Frequency
The Bluetooth device divides 2402 to 2480 MHz into 79 channels of 1 MHz width,
and changes the channel 1600 times per second. If other devices in the LAN are
using the same radio band, Bluetooth can avoid interference from the other devices.
Time
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
G081D925.WMF
SM
6-67
G081/G120/G121/G122
Profiles
A Bluetooth device will not operate if it is located in close proximity to another
Bluetooth device. However, the Bluetooth device should support the protocols to
communicate with each other. There are many types of Bluetooth and service
protocols (together referred to as profiles). These profiles are listed below.
Generic Access Profile
Service Discovery Profile
Cordless Telephony Profile
Intercom Profile
Serial Port Profile
Headset Profile
Dial-up Networking Profile
Fax Profile
LAN Access Profile
Generic Object Exchange Profile
Object Push Profile
File Transfer Profile
Synchronization Profile
Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile
Serial Port Profile (SPP) and Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP) are
used for the printer products.
SPP is used is place of the serial port, while HCRP is used in place of the parallel
port.
6.9.4 SECURITY FEATURES

Public and Private Mode
The PC can browse Bluetooth devices. The machines default is public mode. The
PC cannot browse to the machine if it has been changed to private mode.
PIN Code (Personal Identification Number)

When the PIN code is used, the PC connects to the device that sent the PIN code.
The PIN code is a 4 digit number. This machine uses the last four digits of the
machine's serial number. It cannot be changed.
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-68
SM
CONNECTOR PIN DESCRIPTIONS
6.10 CONNECTOR PIN DESCRIPTIONS

NOTE: The following tables are to be used in conjunction with the Connector
Layout Tables information provided on the back of the Point-to-Point
Diagram. For Ready Condition information, please refer to the Connector
Layout Tables. The information provided here includes signal descriptions
not found on the Connector Layout Tables.
CN1 (on ECB)/CN1 (on LSU)

Pin No.
Signal Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+5VLD
+5VGND
5VGND
5VGND
NENB
PSEL
-VIDEO_K
NADJUST_K
-VIDEO_C
NADJUST_C
5VGND
-VIDEO_M
NADJUST_M
5VGND
-VIDEO_Y
NADJUST_Y
Description
+5V
Ground
Ground
Ground
LD Enable
LD Light Power Select
Black Video Data
Black Adjust Enable
Cyan Video Data
Cyan Adjust Enable
Ground
Magenta Video Data
Magenta Adjust Enable
Ground
Yellow Video Data
Yellow Adjust Enable
In/Out
CN1-E
CN1-L
----------------Out
In
Out
In
Out
In
Out
In
Out
In
Out
In
----Out
In
Out
In
----Out
In
Out
In
Pin No.
CN2
CN3
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
Signal Name
+24V
24VGND
NPMCTL
NPMLD
PMCLK
Description
+24V
Ground
Motor Control
Motor Lock Detect
Motor Clock
In/Out
CN2
----Out
In
Out
CN3
----In
Out
In

Pin No.
CN2
CN3
1
4
2
3
3
2
4
1
SM
Signal Name
+5V
5VGND
NHSYNC
+5VGND
Description
+5V
Ground
Horizontal Sync.
Ground
6-69
In/Out
CN3
----In
---
CN2
----Out
---
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
CN5 (on ECB)/CN1 (on high voltage board)

Pin No.
Signal Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
GND
DHVACCLK
DHVERR
DLATHV
DHVEN
DSDATHV
24VGND
DSCLKHV
+24VGND
+24VHV
Description
Ground
Dev. AC Clock
HVU Error
Serial D/A Converter Data Load
High Voltage Enable
Serial D/A Converter Data
Ground
Serial D/A Converter Clock
Ground
+24V
In/Out
CN1
--Out
In
Out
Out
Out
--Out
-----
CN5
--In
Out
IN
IN
IN
--In
-----
CN6 PCU
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Signal Name
PIKFUSEK
GND
PIKFUSEYMC
GND
Description
Black PCU Fuse
Ground
CMY (Color) PCU Fuse
Ground
In/Out
In/Out
--In/Out
---
Description
Ground
In/Out
In
---
Description
+24V
Ground
Power Supply Fan Error
In/Out
----In
Description
Fusing Fan Error
Ground
+24V
In/Out
In
-----
CN7 Front/Right Door Sensor

Pin No.
1
2
Signal Name
DOPEN
GND
CN8 Power Supply Unit Fan

Pin No.
1
2
3
Signal Name
FANPWR
24VGND
PSFNERR
CN9 Fusing Fan

Pin No.
1
2
3
Signal Name
FSRFNERR
24VGND
FANPWR
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-70
SM
CN10 (on ECB)/CN1503 (on Toner Empty Sensor Board)

CN10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Pin No.
CN150301
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Signal
Name
NEMPK
NEMPC
EMPLEDK
GND
+5V_EMP
EMPLEDY
NEMPY
NEMPM
EMPLEDC
EMPLEDM
Description
Black Toner Empty
Cyan Toner Empty
LED ON for Black
Ground
+5V
LED ON for Yellow
Yellow Toner Empty
Magenta Toner Empty
LED ON for Cyan
LED ON for Magenta
CN4
In
In
Out
----Out
In
In
Out
Out
In/Out
CN1503
Out
Out
In
----In
Out
Out
In
In
CN11 Toner Cartridge Cover Sensor

Pin No.
2
1
Signal Name
TCDOPEN
GND
Description
Toner Cartridge Cover Open
Ground
In/Out
In
---
CN12 (on ECB)/CN1 (on CMY Motor)/CN1 (BK Motor)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SM
CN1
(BK)
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
Signal Name
+24VIR (IT)
+24VIR (PIK)
24VGND (IT)
24VGND (PIK)
NITMLD (IT)
NPIKMLD (PIK)
+5V (IT)
+5V (PIK)
NITMON (IT)
NPIKMON (PIK)
ITMCLK (IT)
PIKMCLK (PIK)
GND (IT)
GND (PIK)
ITMG (IT)
PIKMG (PIK)
Description
+24V for BK Motor

+24V for CMY Motor
Ground
Ground
Lock Detect for BK Motor
Lock Detect CMY Motor
+5V for BK Motor
+5V for CMY Motor
Start for BK Motor
Start for CMY Motor
Clock for BK Motor
Clock for CMY Motor
Ground
Ground
Gain for BK Motor
Gain for CMY Motor
6-71
CN12
--------In
In
----Out
Out
Out
Out
----Out
Out
In/Out
CN1
(CMY)
CN1
(BK)
--------Out
Out
----In
In
In
In
----In
In
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
CN12
Pin No.
CN1
(CMY)
CN13 (on ECB)/CN1509 (PCU Home Sensor)

Pin No.
CN13
CN1509
1
4
Signal Name
GND
YMCZPH
KZPH
+5V_OPCSEN
Description
Ground
CMY PCU Home
Position
Black PCU Home
Position
+5V
In/Out
CN13
CN1509
----In
Out
In
Out
---
---
CN14 (on ECB) / CN1510 (on TB Unit Cam Home Position Sensor)
Pin No.
Signal Name
Description
1
2
3
+5V_CAMSEN
ITHOME1
GND
+5V
TB Unit Cam Home Position
Ground
In/Out
CN1-E
CN1-L
----In
Out
-----
CN15 (on ECB)/CN1601 (on Fusing Unit)

Pin No.
CN15
CN1601
1
2
6
3
5
4
4
Signal Name
FSRFUSE
TH1HIGH
TH2HIGH
GND
ROTATE
6
7
8
2
1
NFSRJAM
+5V_FSR
GND
Description
Fusing Detection
Fusing Jam
+5V
Ground
Detect
Fusing Jam
+5V
Ground
In/Out
CN15
CN1601
In
--In
Out
In
Out
----In
Out
In
-----
Out
---
CN17 (on ECB)/CN1505 (on Paper Full/Jam Sensor)

Pin No.
CN17
CN1505
1
2
3
4
3
2
1
G081/G120/G121/G122
Signal Name
EXITFULL
NEXTJAM
GND
+5V_EXIT
Description
Paper Output Tray
Full
Paper Exit Jam
Ground
+5V
6-72
In/Out
CN17
CN1505
In
Out
In
-----
Out
-----
SM
CN18 (on ECB) / CN1506 (on Paper Empty/Registration Sensor)

Pin No.
Signal Name
+5V
STPNON
3
4
NREGSEN
GND
Description
+5V
Main Paper Cassette Paper
Empty
Registration Sensor
Ground
CN18
---
In/Out
CN1506
---
In
Out
In
---
Out
---
CN19 Pickup Solenoid

Pin No.
1
2
Signal Name
PICSOL
SOLPWR
Description
Pickup Solenoid ON/OFF signal
+24V
In/Out
-----
Description
Registration Clutch Drive Line
+24V
In/Out
Out
---
Description
Ground
NC
BK Solenoid Drive Line
In/Out
-------
Description
Paper Pickup Motor Drive Pulse
In/Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
CN20 Registration Clutch

Pin No.
1
2
Signal Name
REGCLU
GND
Pin No.
1
2
3
Signal Name
+24VGND
NC
FEEDCLU
CN22 Paper Pickup Motor

Pin No.
1
2
3
4
SM
Signal Name
OUTBOUTB
OUTAOUTA
6-73
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
CN21 BK Solenoid
CN23 (on ECB)/CN1507 (on By-pass Tray Paper Detection Sensor)/CN1512

(on By-pass Tray Home Position Sensor)
Pin No.
CN
1507
CN
1512
Signal Name
Description
1
2
3
2
+5V_MPT
GND
MPTHOME
+5V
Ground
By-pass Tray Home Position
Detection Signal
+5V
By-pass Tray Paper Empty
Detection Signal
Ground
CN23
+5VA_MPT
MPPSEN
GND
CN23
In/Out
CN
1507
CN
1512
-----
-----
In
Out
---
---
In
Out
---
---
CN24 Mono/Color Changer Solenoid

Pin No.
1
2
3
Signal Name
SOLPWR
NC
ITSOL2
Description
+24V
NC
Changer Solenoid Drive Line
In/Out
-------
CN25 TB Unit Cam Switching Solenoid

Pin No.
1
2
3
Signal Name
ITSOL1
NC
SOLPWR
Description
Cam Switching Solenoid Drive Line
NC
+24V
In/Out
-------
Description
+24V
Switchback Solenoid Drive Line for
Duplex Unit
In/Out
---
CN26 Switchback Solenoid

Pin No.
1
Signal Name
SOLPWR
ADUSOL
G081/G120/G121/G122
6-74
Out
SM
CN27 (on ECB)/CN1501 (on Color Registration Sensor)

Pin No.
CN27
CN1501
Signal Name
TBFUL
2
3
7
6
+5V_REG
LED_L
SNS_L
GND
WTB_NON
LED_R
SNS_R
In/Out
CN27
CN1501
Description
Waste Toner Cartridge Full
Detection signal
+5V
Left Side LED ON/OFF signal
Left Side Color Regist.
Sensing signal
Ground
Waste Toner Cartridge
Detection signal
Right Side LED ON/OFF
signal
Right Side Color Regist.
Sensing signal
In
Out
--Out
--In
In
Out
---
---
In
Out
Out
In
In
Out
CN28 Paper Size Detector

Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Signal Name
STPSZ1
STPSZ2
GND
STNON
Description
Paper Size Detection signal 1*1
Paper Size Detection signal 2*1
Ground
Main Cassette Detection signal
In/Out
In
In
---In
*1
Letter
L
L
A4
L
H
B5
H
L
Legal
H
H
CN29 (on ECB)/CN1 (on Humidity/Temperature Sensor)

Pin No.
Signal Name
1
2
3
4
TEMP
GND
HUM
+5V_HUM
SM
Description
Temperature Sensing signal
Ground
Humidity Sensing signal
+5V
6-75
In/Out
CN1-E
CN1-L
In
Out
In
Out
----In
Out
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
Paper Size
STPSZ2
STPSZ1
CN30 Sub Fusing Fan

Pin No.
1
2
3
Signal Name
FANPWR
24VGND
RIPFNERR
Description
+24V
Ground
Sub Fusing Fan Error
In/Out
----In
CN31 (on ECB)/CN1 (on Option Paper Feeder Unit)

Pin No.
Signal Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
GND
SIOCS1
SCLK
SIOCS2
GND
SDI
SDO
24VGND
+5V
+24VC
NRST
+24VC
+5VA
24VGND
ACFNON1
ACFSMNA1
SLP_CST_1
ACFSMNB1
ACFSMNA2
ACFSMNB2
Description
Ground
Option Feeder 1 Chip Select
Option Feeder Clock
Option Feeder 2 Chip Select
Ground
Option Feeder Input Data
Option Feeder Output Data
Ground
+5V
+24V
Option Feeder Reset
+24V
+5V
Ground
Option Feeder 1 Non
Option Feeder 1 Motor Clock A
Option Cassette Non
Option Feeder 1 Motor Clock B
Option Feeder 2 Motor Clock A
Option Feeder 2 Motor Clock B
In/Out
CN1-E
CN1-L
----Out
In
Out
In
Out
In
----In
Out
Out
In
------------Out
In
------------Out
In
Out
In
In
Out
Out
In
Out
In
Out
In
CN32 (on ECB)/CN2503 (on Power Supply Board)

Pin No.
CN32
CN2503
1
9
2
8
3
7
4
6
5
5
6
4
7
3
8
2
9
1
G081/G120/G121/G122
Signal Name
Description
NCSAD
SCLKAD
SDOAD
SDIAD
DZCROSS
IHON
IHPOWER
VIN100V
GND
A/D Converter Chip Select

A/D Converter Clock
A/D Converter Input Data
A/D Converter Output Data
Zero Cross
IH ON
+24V
AC Line Voltage Detect
Ground
6-76
In/Out
CN32
CN2503
Out
In
Out
In
Out
In
In
Out
In
Out
Out
In
----In
Out
-----
SM

Pin No.
CN33
CN2505
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
5
4
6
3
7
2
8
1
Signal Name
+5VA
+5VA
GND
+5VB
+5VB
GND
GND
NSLP
Description
+5V
+5V
Ground
+5V
+5V
Ground
Ground
Sleep
In/Out
CN33
CN2505
----------------------------Out
In

Signal Name
+5V
GND
+3.3V
GND
+24VB
+24VB
24VGND
24VGND
+24VA
+24VA
24VGND
+24VC
Description
+5V
Ground
+3.3V
Ground
+24V
+24V
Ground
Ground
+24V
+24V
Ground
+24V
In/Out
-------------------------
CN35 LSU Safety Interlock Switch

Pin No.
1
2
3
SM
Signal Name
+5VLD
NC
+5V
Description
+5V
NC
+5V
6-77
In/Out
-------
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
Pin No.
CN34
CN2504
1
12
2
11
3
10
4
9
5
8
6
7
7
6
8
5
9
4
10
3
11
2
12
1
CN38 Main Control Board

Pin No.
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
Signal Name
FP3
FP6
FP9
FP12
FP15
FP18
FP21
NENG
A24
NSTS
A23
NCMD
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
GND
NHSYNC [K]
GND
GND
GND
NHSYNC [C]
GND
GND
GND
NHSYNC [M]
GND
GND
GND
NHSYNC [Y]
GND
GND
5VA
5VA
GND
GND
GND
ENGRDY
G081/G120/G121/G122
1 of 3
Description
Ground for front panel
Data 4 for front panel
Key Read for front panel
Register Select for front panel
Engine Alive
Serial data from engine to main
control board
Serial data from main control board
to engine
Ground
Horizontal Sync for Black
Ground
Ground
Ground
Horizontal Sync for Cyan
Ground
Ground
Ground
Horizontal Sync for Magenta
Ground
Ground
Ground
Horizontal Sync for Yellow
Ground
Ground
+5V
+5V
Ground
Ground
Ground
Engine Reset
6-78
In/Out
--In/Out
In/Out
In/Out
In
In
--Out
Out
In
--Out
------Out
------Out
------Out
--------------Out
SM
Pin No.
B32
B31
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
SM
Signal Name
FP2
FP5
FP8
FP11
FP14
FP17
FP20
NSLP
CRDY
NVD2[K]
NVD0[K]
NVSZ[K]
GND
NVD2[C]
NVD0[C]
NVSZ[C]
GND
NVD2[M]
NVD0[M]
NVSZ[M]
GND
NVD2[Y]
NVD0[Y]
NVSZ[Y]
GND
GND
5VA
5VB
5VB
GND
GND
GND
2 of 3
Description
Enable for front panel
+5V for front panel
+5V for front panel
Sleep
Controller Ready
Video Data 2 for Black
Vertical Size for Black
Ground
Video Data 2 for Cyan
Vertical Size for Cyan
Ground
Video Data 2 for Magenta
Vertical Size for Magenta
Ground
Video Data 2 for Yellow
Vertical Size for Yellow
Ground
Ground
+5V
+5V
+5V
Ground
Ground
Ground
6-79
In/Out
--In/Out
In/Out
In/Out
In
----In
In
In
In
Out
--In
In
Out
--In
In
Out
--In
In
Out
-----------------
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions

Pin No.
C32
C31
C30
C29
C28
C27
C26
C25
C24
C23
C22
C21
C20
C19
C18
C17
C16
C15
C14
C13
C12
C11
C10
C9
C8
C7
C6
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
Signal Name
FP1
FP4
FP7
FP10
FP13
FP16
FP19
FP22
PRDY
NVD3 [K]
NVD1 [K]
DCLK [K]
GND
NVD3 [C]
NVD1 [C]
DCLK [C]
GND
NVD3 [M]
NVD1 [M]
DCLK [M]
GND
NVD3 [Y]
NVD1 [Y]
DCLK [Y]
GND
5VHD
5VA
5VB
5VB
GND
GND
GND
3 of 3
Description
LED Set for front panel
Read/Write for front panel
Enable for front panel
Engine Ready
Video Clock for Black
Ground
Video Clock for Cyan
Ground
Video Clock for Magenta
Ground
Video Clock for Yellow
Ground
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
Ground
Ground
Ground
In/Out
----In/Out
In/Out
In
In
In
--Out
In
In
In
--In
In
In
--In
In
In
--In
In
In
-----------------
CN39 (on ECB)/CN1508 (on Duplex Unit Jam Sensor)

Pin No.
CN27
CN1501
1
2
3
1
4
2
5
3
G081/G120/G121/G122
Signal Name
GND
ADUNON
+5V_ADU
GND
NADUJAM
Description
Ground
Duplex Unit Non
+5V
Ground
Duplex Unit Jam
6-80
In/Out
CN27
CN1501
--In
--------In
Out
SM
CN43 Toner Supply Solenoid

Pin No.
1
2
3
Signal Name
ITON
+24VPWR
ITOFF
Description
Solenoid ON signal
+24V
Solenoid OFF signal
In/Out
Out
--Out
CN45, CN46 (on ECB)/CN3301 (on LCD Panel)

CN45
CN46
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
SM
CN
3301
Signal Name
Description
---
NC1
NC
---
FP4
Ground
FP5
Data 3
FP6
Data 4
FP7
Data 2
FP8
Data 5
FP9
Data 1
FP10
Data 6
FP11
Data 0
FP12
Data 7
FP13
LED Set
10
FP14
Enable 1
11
FP15
Key Read
12
FP16
Read/Write
13
FP17
+5V
14
FP18
Register Select
15
FP19
Enable 2
16
FP20
+5V
17
FP21
Ground
18
FP22
Ground
CN12
In/Out
CN1
(CMY)
CN1
(BK)
-----
--In/Out
In/Out
In/Out
In/Out
In/Out
In/Out
In/Out
In/Out
In/Out
In/Out
In/Out
In/Out
Out
Out
In
In
Out
Out
In
In
--Out
--In
Out
---
6-81
In/Out
In/Out
In/Out
In
---
-----
In/Out
-----
G081/G120/G121/G122
Detailed
Descriptions
Pin No.
CN1502 Waste Toner Full Sensor

Pin No.
CN1502 CN1511
1
3
2
2
3
Signal Name
+5V
ADUN5VGND
TBFUL
Description
+5V
Ground
Waste Toner Full
Detection signal
In/Out
CN14502 CN1511
--------In
Out
CN2001 AC Line
Pin No.
1
2
3
Signal Name
AC1
FG
AC2
Description
AC Line 1
Frame Ground
AC Line 2
In/Out
-------
Description
IH Power Thermostat
NC
In/Out
-----
Description
IH Power Coil1
NC
IH Power Coil 2
In/Out
-------
CN2203 (on IH Power Board)

Pin No.
1
2
Signal Name
Thermostat
NC
CN2204 IH Heater
Pin No.
1
2
3
Signal Name
IHCOIL 1
NC
IHCOIL 2
CN1502 Power Switch

Pin No.
CN1502 CN1511
1
2
2
1
G081/G120/G121/G122
Signal Name
AC1
AC1
Description
AC Line (live)
AC Line (neutral)
6-82
In/Out
-----
SM
CN1502 (on Power Supply Board)/CN2207 (on IH Power Supply Board)

Pin No.
CN2502 CN2207
1
10
2
9
3
8
4
7
5
6
6
5
7
4
8
3
9
2
10
1
Signal Name
Description
DO
CS
ZCROS
CLK
IHON
DI
IHPOWER
GND
GND
GND
A/D Converter Output Data

A/D Converter Chip Select
Zero Cross
A/D Converter Data Clock
Zero Cross
A/D Converter Input Data
+24V
Ground
Ground
Ground
In/Out
CN2502
CN2207
In
Out
Out
In
In
Out
Out
In
In
Out
Out
In
-----------------
CN2506 Side/Front Door Interlock Switch

Signal Name
+24V
NC
+24V
Description
+24V
NC
+24V
In/Out
-------
Detailed
Descriptions
Pin No.
1
2
3
SM
6-83
G081/G120/G121/G122
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Rev. 06/03/2004
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration:
Desktop
Print Process:
Dry electrostatic transfer system
Printer Languages:
PCL5c
Adobe PostScript3
RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)
Resolution:
PCL5c:
600 x 600 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi
Adobe PostScript3:
1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
RPCS:
1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
Gradation
1 bit/pixel
Printing speed:(Monochrome/Color):
G081: 21/16.9 ppm
G120: 22/18 ppm
G121/G122: 16.9/16.9 ppm
NOTE: Print speed for both monochrome and color is reduced when printing
1200 x 1200 dpi and for Thick/OHP.
PCL5c:
35 Intelli fonts
10 TrueType fonts
1 bitmap font
Adobe PostScript 3:
136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)
Host Interfaces:
Network Protocols:
Bi-directional IEEE1284 parallel x 1: Standard

Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T): Standard (G081/G120/G122)
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T): Optional (G121)
USB2.0: Standard
IEEE1394: Optional
IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN): Optional
Bluetooth (Wireless): Optional
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk
First Print Speed:
25 seconds or less (from tray 1)
Warm-up Time
Less than 45 seconds (at 23 C/50%)
Print Paper
Capacity:
(80 g/m2, 20lb)
Standard tray: 530 sheets

By-pass tray: 100 sheets
Optional paper feed tray: 530 sheets x 2
SM
7-1
Specifications
Resident Fonts:
G081/120/G121/G122
Rev. 06/07/2004
SPECIFICATIONS
Print Paper Capacity:

(80 g/m2, 20lb)

Print Paper Size:
(Refer to 1.1Supported Paper Sizes.)

Standard Tray
By-pass
Optional Tray
Minimum
Maximum
A4/B5/81/2" x 11"/81/2" x 14" (SEF)
90 x 148 mm
216 x 356 mm
A4/B5/81/2" x 11"/81/2" x 14" (SEF)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb.)
Printing Paper
Weight:
Standard tray:
Optional paper tray:
By-pass tray:
Output Paper
Capacity:
Standard exit tray: 500 sheets (face down)
Memory:
Standard 64 MB, up to 384 MB with optional DIMM
Memory Type:
SDRAM (SO-DIMM), Pc133MHZ, 64bit

Non-Ecc/Pavity
Pin:
144
Access Time:
6ns
Power Source:
120 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A (for North America)

220 V - 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 6 A (for Europe/Asia)
Power Consumption:
120V
1300 W or less
10 W or less
230V
1300 W or less
11 W or less
Mainframe Only
Full System
63 dB or less
45 dB or less
62 dB or less
45dB
Maximum
Energy Saver
Noise Emission:
(Sound Power Level)
Printing
Stand-by
NOTE: The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO7779 at the
operator position.
Environmental
Standard:
Energy Star Teir 2 specifications
Safety Standard.
UL1950, cUL, FDA21CFRJ
EMI:
EN55022 Class B, EN55011 Class B
Dimensions: (W x D x H):419 x 536 x 395 mm (16.5" x 21.1" x 15.5")

Weight:
G081/G120/G121/G122
Approximately 30 kg (66.1 lb.)
7-2
SM
SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES

Size (W x L)
A3
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
A6 SEF
B4 SEF
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
B6 SEF
Ledger
Letter SEF
Letter LEF
Legal SEF
Half Letter SEF
Executive SEF
Executive LEF
F SEF
Foolscap SEF
Folio SEF
8K
16K SEF
16K LEF
Custom
Com10 Env.
Monarch Env.
C6 Env.
C5 Env.
DL Env.
297 x 420 mm
210 x 297 mm
297 x 210 mm
148 x 210 mm
210 x 148 mm
105 x 148 mm
257 x 364 mm
182 x 257 mm
257 x 182 mm
128 x 182 mm
11" x 17"
8.5" x 11"
11" x 8.5"
8.5" x 14"
5.5" x 8.5"
7.25" x 10.5"
10.5" x 7.25"
8" x 13"
8.5" x 13"
8.25" x 13"
267 x 390 mm
195 x 267 mm
267 x 195 mm
Minimum:
90 x 148 mm
Maximum:
216 x 356 mm
4.125" x 9.5"
3.875" x 7.5"
114 x 162 mm
162 x 229 mm
110 x 220 mm
Paper Trays
Main Unit/Options
US
Eur/Asia
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
By-pass
Tray
Duplex
N
Y#
N
Y#
N
Y#
N
Y#
N
N
N
Y#
N
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
Y#
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y#
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
N
N
N
N
Specifications
Paper
Remarks:
Y
Y#
Y*
N
SM
Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.

Supported: the user specifies the paper size.
Supported: depends on a technician adjustment
Not supported
7-3
G081/120/G121/G122
Rev. 06/03/2004
SPECIFICATIONS
2. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run
installer allows you to select which components to install.
2.1 PRINTER DRIVERS

Printer
Language
PCL 5c
PS3
RPCS
Windows
95/98/ME
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows
NT4.0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows
2000
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows XP
Macintosh
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
NOTE: 1) The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86
platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC,
Alpha, or MIPS platforms.
2) The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows
2000, which uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each operating system is
provided with the driver.
3) The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS 7.6 or later versions.
2.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE

Software
Agfa Font Manager 2000
(Win95/98, 2000, NT4)
SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin
(Win95/98, ME, 2000, NT4)
SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client
(Win95/98, ME, 2000, NT4)
Description
A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer.
A printer management utility for network administrators. NIB
setup utilities are also available.
A printer management utility for client users.
A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP/IP
network.
A peer to peer print utility over a TCP/IP network. This
provides the parallel printing and recovery printing features.
This software provides several convenient functions for printing
from Macintosh clients.
This utility solves problems with Windows 2000.
Printer Utility for Mac

(Mac)
IEEE1394 Utility
(Win2000)
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite V3 DeskTopBinder V2 Lite itself can be used as personal document
(Win95/98, ME, 2000, NT4) management software and can manage both image data
converted from paper documents and application files saved in
each clients PC.
G081/G120/G121/G122
7-4
SM
SPECIFICATIONS
Rev. 06/03/2004
3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
B
Machine
Code
G081/G120/
Main Unit
G121/G122
Options (Unless noted, are used on all models.)
Duplex Unit AD440
G343
Paper Feed Unit (530)
G342
Internal Options
64 MB DIMM Memory Type C
G330
G331
G332
NVRAM Memory
G311
IEEE1394 I/F Board Type 4510
G336
IEEE802.11b Board Type A
G628
Bluetooth Board Type B
G350
HDD Type 3000
G345
Item
Others
Fusing Unit Type125*
Fusing Unit Type 155
Intermediate Transfer Unit
Type125
Waste Toner Bottle Type 155
Remarks
A
B
C
Up to two tray units can be installed.
User Account Enhanced Unit Type B

User in common with model G074.
Used in common with model G074.
G355
Standard with the model G081,

option for model G121.
G207
G251
Includes the fusing unit and the

transfer roller.
Includes the transfer belt unit.
G205
Replaces Type 125. Used on all

models.
G252
NOTE: 1) When installing IEEE1394, IEEE802.11b or Bluetooth, remove the

USB2.0 interface board.
2) The IEEE1394, IEEE802.11b, Bluetooth, and USB2.0 interface board
cannot be installed at the same time.
3) The NIC is an option for model G121.
* Used on the G081 only. The fusing Unit Type 155 is used with the
G120/G121/G122 models.
SM
7-5
G081/120/G121/G122
Specifications
NIC Type 3000
No.
G342/G836
PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 3000
G342
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
EXTERIOR COVERS ................................................................................... 1

FEEDER BOARD ......................................................................................... 2
PAPER SIZE SWITCH ................................................................................. 2
SENSOR BOARD, MOTOR, AND PICKUP SOLENOID .............................. 3
JAM SENSOR AND PAPER EMPTY SENSOR ARMS ................................ 3
PICKUP AND PAPER FEED ROLLERS ...................................................... 4
PINCH ROLLERS......................................................................................... 5
PAPER CASSETTE ..................................................................................... 6
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................... 7
SM
G342
EXTERIOR COVERS

1.1 EXTERIOR COVERS
[E]
[K]
[C]
[D]
[I]
[B]
[A]
[J]
[L]
[G]
[M]
[H]
[N]
[R]
[F]
[O]
[P]
G342R900.WMF
[Q]
1. Front cover [A] ( x 1)
NOTE: Release both hooks [B] [C] on the top and five hooks [D][E] on the
bottom.
2. Right cover [F] ( x 2)
NOTE: Release one hook [G] on the top and three hooks [H] on the bottom.
3. Left cover [I] ( x 2)
NOTE: Release one hook on the top [J] and three hooks [K] on the bottom.
G342
Paper Feeder
Unit Type
3000
4. Rear cover [L] ( x 1)

NOTE: Release two hooks [M][N] on the top and five hooks [O][P] on the
bottom.
5. Cassette cover [Q]
6. Connector cover [R]
SM
G342
FEEDER BOARD
1.2 FEEDER BOARD
[A]
[B]
G342R901.WMF
Left cover (! 1.1)

1. Feeder board [A] with shield cover.( x 5, x 3)
2. Shield cover [B] ( x 1)
1.3 PAPER SIZE SWITCH

[B]
[A]
G342R902.WMF
Left cover (! 1.1)

1. Feeder board unit [A] ( x 3)
2. Paper size switch [B] ( x 1)
NOTE: The connector is located at CN5 on the feeder board.
G342
SM
SENSOR BOARD, MOTOR, AND PICKUP SOLENOID
1.4 SENSOR BOARD, MOTOR, AND PICKUP SOLENOID

[B]
[A]
G342R903.WMF
Left cover (! 1.1)
[C]
1. Sensor board [A] ( x 2)

2. Motor [B] ( x 1, x 2)
3. Pickup Solenoid [C] ( x 1, x 2)
1.5 JAM SENSOR AND PAPER EMPTY SENSOR ARMS

[B]
[D]
G342
Paper Feeder
Unit Type
3000
[C]
[A]
G342R904.WMF
Left cover (! 1.1)

1. Motor bracket unit [A] ( x 2)
2. Paper guide unit [B] ( x 2)
3. Paper empty sensor arm [C]
4. Jam sensor arm [D]
SM
G342
PICKUP AND PAPER FEED ROLLERS
1.6 PICKUP AND PAPER FEED ROLLERS

[D]
[E]
[F]
[J]
[I]
[C]
[K]
[L]
[H]
[L]
[G]
[B]
G342R905.WMF
[A]
Left cover (! 1.1)

1. Pickup gear [A] (1 hook)
2. Bushing [B]
3. Bushing [C] (1 hook)
4. Pickup roller shaft [D]
5. 2 pickup roller assemblies [E][F] (1 hook each)
6. Feed gear [G] (1 hook)
7. Bushing [H]
8. Bushing [I] (1 hook)
9. Paper feed roller [J]
Lubricating
The shafts on the outer gear [K] (0.05 cc x 2)
The outer cogs on the 2 inner gears (in the outer gear [K]) (0.1 cc x 2)
The outer cogs on the idle gear [L] (0.1 cc)
The shafts of the outer gear [M] and the idle gear [L] (0.05 cc x 2)
G342
SM
PINCH ROLLERS
1.7 PINCH ROLLERS
[C]
[E]
[B]
(2)
[D]
[A]
[F]
(1)
G342R906.WMF
Left cover (! 1.1)

1. Raise the pinch roller base unit [A] in the arrow (1) direction.
2. Remove the pinch roller base unit in the arrow (2) direction.
3. Plastic ring [B]
4. Slide out the pinch roller shaft [C] in the arrow direction.
5. 4 pinch rollers [D]
G342
Paper Feeder
Unit Type
3000
6. 2 springs [E][F]
SM
G342
PAPER CASSETTE
1.8 PAPER CASSETTE

[A]
[C]
[G]
[B]
#
"
Figure-1
%
$
G342R907.WMF
[F]
[E]
[D]
G342R908.WMF
1. Corner separator [A]

NOTE: Remove the corner separator by moving it as shown by the arrows in
Figure-1.
2. Raise the cassette base plate [B] in the arrow " direction.
3. Slide the cassette base plate in the arrow # direction, and remove it.
4. 2 springs [C]
5. Pinion gear [D] and 2 racks [E][F] ( x 2)
6. Left and right paper guides [G]
G342
SM
PAPER CASSETTE
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
G342
Paper Feeder
Unit Type
3000
See the following subsections in the service manual of the main unit:
6.3.9Paper Feed
6.5.3Paper Source Selection
6.5.4Auto Continue
SM
G342
G139
G139
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-1
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................4-1

4.1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................4-2
4.2 CONTROLLER ERROR ............................................................................4-6
4.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ................................................................4-13
4.3.1 BLANK PRINT ................................................................................4-13
4.3.2 ALL-BLACK PRINT.........................................................................4-13
4.3.3 MISSING CMY COLOR..................................................................4-14
4.3.4 LIGHT PRINT .................................................................................4-14
4.3.5 REPEATED SPOTS OR LINES ON PRINTS .................................4-15
4.3.6 DARK VERTICAL LINE IN PRINT ..................................................4-15
4.3.7 WHITE HORIZONTAL LINES OR BANDS .....................................4-16
4.3.8 MISSING PARTS OF IMAGES.......................................................4-16
4.3.9 DIRTY BACKGROUND ..................................................................4-16
4.3.10 PARTIAL CMY COLOR DOTS .....................................................4-16
4.3.11 DARK IRREGULAR STREAKS ON PRINTS................................4-16
4.3.12 CMY COLOR IRREGULAR STREAKS ........................................4-17
4.3.13 GHOSTING ..................................................................................4-17
4.3.14 UNFUSED OR PARTIALLY FUSED PRINTS ..............................4-17
4.3.15 IMAGE SKEW ..............................................................................4-17
4.3.16 BACKGROUND STAIN ................................................................4-18
4.3.17 NO PRINTING ON PAPER EDGE................................................4-18
4.3.18 IMAGE NOT CENTERED WHEN IT SHOULD BE .......................4-18
4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-19
4.4.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................4-19
SM
G139
Table 1................................................................................................4-20
Table 2................................................................................................4-20
4.5 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................4-21
Power supply unit ...............................................................................4-21
High voltage unit .................................................................................4-21
4.6 LEDS .......................................................................................................4-21
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1

5.1.1 SERVICE MODE OPERATION ........................................................5-1
Entering the Service Mode....................................................................5-1
Accessing the Required Program .........................................................5-2
Inputting a Value or Setting for a Service Program ...............................5-2
Exiting Service Mode ............................................................................5-2
5.2 PRINTER CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE .............................................5-3
5.2.1 SERVICE (CONTROLLER SERVICE MODES) ...............................5-3
Bit Switch Settings ................................................................................5-7
Gamma Adjustment ..............................................................................5-8
5.3 PRINTER ENGINE SERVICE MODE......................................................5-12
5.3.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE (2. ENGINE) ........................................5-12
SP1-XXX (Feed) .................................................................................5-12
SP2-XXX (Drum).................................................................................5-14
SP5-XXX (Mode) ................................................................................5-16
SP7-XXX (Data Log)...........................................................................5-29
SP8-XXX (Data Log 2)........................................................................5-33
5.3.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE ...................................................................5-42
Table 1: Paper Size Switch.................................................................5-44
5.3.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE ...............................................................5-44
5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE......................................................5-46
5.4.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE....................................................................5-46
5.4.2 PRECAUTIONS..............................................................................5-46
Handling SD Cards .............................................................................5-46
Upload or Download ...........................................................................5-46
Network Connection............................................................................5-46
5.4.3 FILE ARRANGEMENT ...................................................................5-47
How the Program Works.....................................................................5-47
Example..............................................................................................5-47
5.4.4 UPDATING .....................................................................................5-48
Procedure ...........................................................................................5-48
Error Handling.....................................................................................5-49
Power Failure......................................................................................5-49
Confirmation for Parts and Version Number of Firmware ...................5-49
5.4.5 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ..........................................5-50
Uploading NVRAM Data .....................................................................5-50
Downloading NVRAM Data.................................................................5-51
5.4.6 ERROR CODE TABLE FOR FIRMWARE UPDATING...................5-52
G139
ii
SM
5.5 SD CARD APPLI MOVE..........................................................................5-53

5.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................5-53
5.5.2 MOVE EXEC ..................................................................................5-54
5.5.3 UNDO EXEC ..................................................................................5-55
Keeping the SD card...........................................................................5-55
5.6 POWER ON SELF-TEST ........................................................................5-56
5.6.1 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTIC..............................................5-56
Overview.............................................................................................5-56
5.6.2 ENGINE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ........................................................5-57
5.7 USER PROGRAM MODE .......................................................................5-58
5.8 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................5-59
Controller Board..................................................................................5-59
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 6-1
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 7-1
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................7-1
1.1 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES..............................................................7-3
2. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .....................................................................7-4
2.1 PRINTER DRIVERS ............................................................................7-4
2.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE ..........................................................................7-4
3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION ....................................................................7-5
SM
iii
G139
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling any part of the printer and peripherals,
make sure that the printer power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the printer and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the printer and the paper tray unit are
supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. The inside and metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the
printer is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS
Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by
accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops
or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS
The printer and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer
service representative who has completed the training course on those models.
WARNING
Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or
an explosion might occur.
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite
suddenly when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in
accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all
chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of
the optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Unit Section. Laser light can seriously damage
your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
Beforehand
The sections below are fundamentally the same as the G081/G120/G121/G122
SERVICE MANUAL". Refer to the G081/G120/G121/G122 sections below while
using the G139 section of this manual.
Section 1: INSTALLATION
Section 2: PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
Section 3: REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
Section 6: DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
POINT-TO-POINT DIAGRAM
CONNECTOR LAYOUT
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
G342 PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 3000
G343 AD440 DUPLEX UNIT
NOTE: The current products G836 and G837 are identical to the previous G342
and G343. The product codes are different due to the location of where
they are being manufactured.
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION
This section is fundamentally the same as for the G081/G120/G121/G122 models.
Please refer to this section in the front portion of the G081/G120/G121/G122/G139
Service Manual.
G139
Note the Repacking information provided on the following page.
SM
1-1
G139
How to Repack
G139
1-2
SM
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
G139

Service Manual.
SM
2-1
G139
G139

Service Manual.
SM
3-1
G139
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4.1.1 SUMMARY
1. All SCs are logged.
2. If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then reconnect
the connectors before replacing the PCBs.
3. If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before
replacing motors or sensors.
There are four severity levels of service call conditions. These levels are indicated
under the SC number in the SC table.
Level
A
Turning the main power switch off then on

resets SCs displayed on the operation panel.
These are redisplayed if the error occurs
again.
Reset Procedure
This machine does not have
this level.
Turn the main power switch
off and on.
The SC will not be displayed.

Only the SC history is
updated.
Turn the main power switch
off and on.
G139
Definition
To prevent damage to the machine, the main
machine cannot be operated until a service
representative has reset the SC.
SCs that disable only the features that use
the defective item. Although these SCs are
not shown to the user under normal
conditions, they are displayed on the
operation panel only when the defective
feature is selected.
The SC history is updated. The machine can
be operated as usual.
SM
4-1
G139
4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

NOTE: When replacing the engine control board, remove the EEPROM from the
The SC severity level is indicated under SC number in the below list.
The symbol that is in the Possible Cause/ Requirement Action column
indicates the most possible cause.
The figure 1, etc. that is in the Possible Cause/Requirement Action column
indicates the requirement action.
SC
201
[D]
Symptom
Polygon motor error
After the main power switch
turns on, the polygon motor
is not phase-locked in
several seconds.
230
[D]
V-Sync error
Subscan signals are not
asserted.
302
[D]
Charge or transfer bias error

Charge bias in out of the
Defective PCU charge terminal
normal range.
Defective transfer belt unit bias terminal
Defective terminal springs on bias terminal unit
Incorrect cable connection between high voltage
supply and engine control board
Defective high voltage board
1. Replace the PCU.
3. Replace the bias terminal unit.
5. Replace the high voltage board.
440
[D]
PCU BK motor error

The drive motor of the black
PCU is not locked.
G139
Incorrect cable connection

3. Replace the laser scanning unit.
4. Check or replace the cable.
See SC201.
Defective gear
Defective gear on transfer belt unit
motor clock
Defective black PCU drive motor
1. Replace the black PCU.
4-2
SM

Symptom
PCU (CMY) motor error
The drive motor of the CMY
PCU is locked.
471
[D]
Belt tension unit cam error

Even though the belt
tension unit tries to return to
its home position several
times, the home position
sensor is not activated.
486
[D]
BK solenoid error
The BK solenoid cannot
drive the black PCU.
487
[D]
Solenoid error
Any of the following
solenoids has caused a
short circuit: changer
solenoid, paper feed
solenoid, toner supply
solenoid.
Fusing fan motor error
The fusing unit fan motor
does not operate.
530
[D]
531
[D]
SM
PSU cooling fan error

The PSU cooling fan does
not operate.
Defective gear
motor clock
Defective CMY PCU drive motor
1. Replace the CMY PCU.

send signal
Defective transfer belt tension unit
3. Replace the transfer belt tension unit.

(CN21) and BK solenoid
send solenoid control signal
Defective drive unit
board (CN21) and BK solenoid correctly.
3. Replace the drive unit.
Solenoid drive transistor short-circuited

1. Replace the engine controller board.
2. Replace the defective solenoid.

Defective fusing unit fan
2. Replace the fusing unit fan.
Defective PSU cooling fan
2. Replace the PSU cooling fan.
4-3
G139
G139
SC
441
[D]

SC
532
[D]
543
[D]
544
[D]
551
[D]
554
[D]
G139
Symptom
Fusing unit sub-cooling fan (left) error
The fusing unit sub-cooling
fan does not operate.
Defective sub-cooling fan
2. Replace the sub-cooling fan.
Heating belt overheat
The temperature of the
Pin 1 (IC6) unable to turn to lower level
heating belt is out of the
normal range.
Thermistor short-circuited
Defective cable connection between CN15 and
thermistor
1. Replace the control board.
4. Connect the cable between CN15 and the
Heating belt low temperature error (1)
The fusing unit thermistor in Defective connection between engine control board
the middle of the unit has
detected low temperature.
thermistor
send signal
Defective IH unit or IH power supply board
1. Replace the IH unit or IH power supply board.
The thermistor for the
pressure roller has detected
much lower temperature
than the other fusing unit
thermistor does.
thermistor
The fusing unit thermistor at See SC544.
the left end of the unit has
detected much lower
temperature than the other
fusing unit thermistor does.
4-4
SM

SC
580
[D]
Symptom
Fusing belt rotation error
The rotation of the fusing
unit is not normal.
581
[D]
Fusing unit low voltage error

The voltage applied to the
fusing unit is out of the
Defective thermostat
normal range.
2. Replace the IH unit.
622
[D]
Option paper unit communication error

After the system starts, the
Defective cable connection
communication with the
1. Connect the cable to the paper tray correctly.
paper tray is unexpectedly
interrupted.
EEPROM error
Data is not write to or read
Defective EEPROM (IC5)
from the EEPROM.
1. Replace the EEPROM.
Defective fusing belt, gear, or rotation plate

Defective connection of fusing unit connector
Pin 6 (CN15) unable to send 1.4-second (or less)
encoder pulse
board (CN15) and fusing unit correctly.
3. Connect the fusing unit connector correctly.
G139
680
[D]
SM
4-5
G139
CONTROLLER ERROR
4.2
CONTROLLER ERROR
The following table describes the controller error codes. These codes are displayed
at power-on, or after the power-on self diagnostic test, if an error occurs.
CAUTION: Always try turning the main power switch off and on and check if the
problem persists.
SC
670
[D]
819
[D]
Symptom
Engine start-up error
The ready signal from the
Defective engine board.
engine board is not
detected.
[0696e] Kernel stop: Process error
System completely down
Defective RAM DIMM
Defective SD card in slot 1
Software error
1. Check and/or replace the RAM DIMM.
2. Check and/or replace the SD card in slot 1.
4. See NOTE at the end of the SC table.
[0766d] Kernel stop: VM full error

Unexpected system
Defective RAM DIMM
memory size
Defective SD card in slot 1
Software error
1. Check and/or replace the RAM DIMM.
2. Check and/or replace the SD card in slot 1.
[4361] Kernel stop: Cache error
Cache error in the CPU
Defective CPU
[----] Kernel stop: The others
Error in OS
1.
820
[D]
G139
Defective memory
Defective flash memory
Defective CPU
Replace the controller board.
[0001-0015] [000A-000D] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code

During the boot monitor
Defective CPU device
program and self Defective boot monitor program or self-diagnostic
diagnostic, any exception or
program
cut-in are not supposed to
happen. If these happen, it
2. Reinstall the system firmware.
is defined as SC.
4-6
SM
CONTROLLER ERROR
SC
820
[D]
Symptom
[00FF] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code
Cache access error in the
Defective CPU
CPU
Defective local bus
1. Turn the main power switch off and on.
2. Reinstall the system program.
[0601, 0602, 0605, 0606, 0607, 0609]
Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code
Exceptional command does Defective CPU devices
not operate even though it
1. Replace the controller board
is executed on purpose.
[060A-060E] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code
Cut-in command does not
Defective CPU devices
operate when it is executed. Defective ASIC devices
[0610] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code
Timer cut-in does not
operate even though it is
set.
Cut-in in ASIC occurs.
Defective ASIC
Defective devices in which ASIC detects cut-in.
[06FF] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code
The pipeline clock
frequency rate is different
Mode bit data error, which is used for initializing
from the prescribed value.
CPU.
The result when the
Insufficient CPU cache
program is executed in the
Insufficient memory process speed
command cache is different 1. Replace the controller board.
from desirable value.
2. Replace the RAM DIMM.
[0801, 0804, 0807, 0808, 0809, 80A] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error
code
An error occurs when
checking the TLB.
[4002-4005] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code
The calculation error in the
Defective CPU
CPU occurs.
1. Replace the CPU.
SM
4-7
G139
G139
[0709, 070A] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code

Even though data is
ordinarily only written in
Incorrect SPD
memory cache, in this case Boot mode setting error
the data is actually being
written in another area of
memory (not cache).
CONTROLLER ERROR
SC
821
[D]
Symptom
[0D05] Self-diagnostic error ASIC
The CPU checks if the
System firmware problem
ASIC timer is working
Defective RAM-DIMM
properly when compared
with the CPU timer. If the
ASIC timer does not
2. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
function in the specified
range, this SC code is
displayed.
822
[B]
823
[B]
824
[D]
[3004] Self-diagnostic error HDD: Command error

When the main power
Defective HDD
switch is turned on or self1. Replace the HDD.
diagnostics starts, the
following diagnostic error
from the HDD occurs.
[6101] Self-diagnostic error NIC: MAC address check sum error
The result of the MAC
address check sum does
not match the check sum
stored in ROM.
[6104] Self-diagnostic error NIC: PHY IC error
Same as [6101]
The PHY IC on the
controller cannot be
properly recognized.
[6105] Self-diagnostic error NIC: PHY IC loop back error
Same as [6101]
An error occurred during
the loop-back test for the
PHY IC on the controller.
[1401] Self-diagnostic error NVRAM
The controller cannot
Loose connection
recognize the standard
Defective standard NVRAM
NVRAM installed or detects Defective controller
that the NVRAM is
1. Check the standard NVRAM is firmly inserted into
defective.
the socket.
826
[D]
Self-diagnostic error - RTC/ Optional NVRAM

The time count difference
RTC defective
between RTC device and
NVRAM without RTC installed
CPU is over 1 second.
Backup battery discharged
1. Replace the NVRAM with another RTC installed
NVRAM.
827
[0201] Self-diagnostic error RAM: Verification error
G139
4-8
SM
CONTROLLER ERROR
Symptom
Error detected during a
write/verify check for the
standard RAM (SRAM
DIMM).
829
[B]
[0302] Self-diagnostic error RAM: Composition error (Slot 0)

The result of checking the
Not specified RAM DIMM installed
composition data of the
Defective RAM DIMM
RAM in Slot 0 on the
controller is incorrect.
[0401] Self-diagnostic error RAM: Verification error (Slot 1)
The data stored in the RAM Same as SC 829 [0302]
in Slot 1 does not match the
data when reading.
[0402] Self-diagnostic error RAM: Composition error (Slot 1)
Same as SC 829 [0302]
The result of checking the
composition data of the
RAM in Slot 1 on the
controller is incorrect.
Verification error
The verification data of the
Defective controller board
clock generator is read via
the communication bus.
The data contradicts the
normal value.
Defective IEEE1394 interface board
detected.
1. Replace the IEEE1394 interface board.
2. Replace the controller
IEEE802.11b error - card not detected (power-on)
The wireless LAN card is
Loose connection
not detected before
1. Check the connection.
communication is
established, even though
the wireless LAN board
itself is detected.
IEEE802.11b error - card not detected (during operation)
The wireless LAN card not
Poor connection
detected during operation.
IEEE802.11b error
The wireless LAN card error Poor connection
detected.
838
[D]
851
[B]
853
[B]
854
[B]
855
[B]
SM
1.
2.

Loose connection
Defective RAM DIMM
Replace the RAM DIMM.
4-9
G139
SC
[D]
G139
CONTROLLER ERROR
SC
856
[B]
Symptom
IEEE802.11b interface board error
Wireless LAN interface
Poor connection
board error detected.
Defective wireless LAN interface board
1. Check the wireless LAN interface board
connection.
2. Replace the interface board.
857
[B]
USB I/F Error

USB interface error
detected.
860
[B]
HDD start-up error

HDD initialization error
detected.
861
[D]
HDD: Reboot error

The HDD does not become
ready within 30 seconds
after the power is supplied
to the HDD.
863
[D]
HDD data unable to read

Data stored in the HDD
cannot be properly read.
864
[D]
HDD data access error

HDD access error detected.
865
[D]
HDD access error

An error detected during
HDD operation.
866
[B]
SD card authentication error

A correct license is not
found in the SD card.
SD card error
The SD card for
applications is ejected from
the SD card slot.
867
[D]
868
G139
1. Check the USB connections, make sure that they
are securely connected.
Defective HDD
3. Replace the HDD.
Loose connection
Defective HDD
2. Check the connection between the HDD and
controller.
3. Replace the HDD.
Defective HDD
3. Replace the HDD.
Defective HDD
1. Replace the HDD.
Defective HDD
1. Replace the HDD.
SD-card data is corrupted.
1. Store correct data in the SD card.
The SD card for applications is ejected from the
SD card slot.
1. Install the SD card.
SD card access error
4-10
SM
CONTROLLER ERROR
SC
[D]
Symptom
SD card error occurs when
an SD card is activated.
870
[B]
Address data error

An error is detected in the
data copied to the address
book over a network.

Defective SD card
Defective SD card controller
1. For a file system error, format the SD card on
your PC.
2. For a device error, turn the mains switch off and
on.
3. Replace the SD card.
Defective software program

Defective HDD
Incorrect path to the sever
1. Initialize the address book data (SP5-846-50).
2. Initialize the user information (format the hard
disk with SP5-832).
3. Replace the HDD.
900
[D]
Electric counter error

Abnormal data is stored in
the counters.
Defective NVRAM
2. Check the connection between the NVRAM and
controller.
920
[B]
Printer function error

The error that causes the
malfunction in the software
application is detected.
Unexpected hardware structure

(insufficient memory or hard disk space.)
1. Turn the main power switch off/on, or install
Printer Application firmware.
Printer font error

No font is detected in the
machines that have the font
in the SD card when the
printer application is run.
990
1. Install the System, Printer Application, NIB, and

Web System firmware.
G139
921
[B]
SM
4-11
G139
CONTROLLER ERROR
SC
[D]
Symptom
detected.

1. Replace the controller if the error is frequent.

991
[C]

detected, which does not
affect operation of the
machine.
998
[D]
Application start error

No applications start within
60 seconds after the power
is turned on.
The machine does not stop and the SC code is not

displayed. The machine automatically recovers.
However, the SC code is logged in the engine
summary sheet (SMC).
Loose connection of RAM-DIMM, ROM-DIMM

Software problem
2. Check if the RAM-DIMM and ROM-DIMM are
properly connected.
NOTE: If a problem always occurs in a specific situation (for example, same printer
driver settings, same image file), the problem may be caused by a software
error. In this case, send the following data and information to your hotline
product specialist.
Symptom/Possible causes/Action taken

Summary sheet (SP mode 1 Service, [Print Summary])
SMC All (SP 5990 2)
Logged data (SP 5990 4)
Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program
address where the problem is logged.)
Image file which causes the problem, if possible
G139
4-12
SM
4.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

NOTE: When replacing the engine control board, remove the NVRAM from the
4.3.1 BLANK PRINT

Symptom
No image is printed.
Possible cause
Defective PCU
tension unit
drive unit
agitator
roller
Defective high voltage
supply board
board
Necessary actions
unit.
Replace the PCU.
unit.
tension unit.
Replace the toner cartridge
drive unit.
Check the guide and the
transfer roller.
supply board.
board.
4.3.2 ALL-BLACK PRINT

Symptom
Solid black image covering
entire sheet of paper.
Possible cause
Incorrectly installed PCU
Defective PCU
Defective high voltage supply
board
G139

board
Defective main board
Necessary actions
Install the PCU correctly.
Replace the PCU.
supply board.
unit.
board.
Replace the main board.
SM
4-13
G139
4.3.3 MISSING CMY COLOR

Symptom
C, M, or Y is missing.
Possible cause
Defective PCU
printer cartridge and engine
control board
PCU
Defective cable on belt
tension unit
Defective PCU motor
board
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
Replace the connection
spring.
Replace the belt tension unit.
Replace the PCU motor.
board.
4.3.4 LIGHT PRINT

Symptom
Printed images are too light
in density.
Possible cause
transfer roller and high
voltage supply unit
PCU
Defective PCU
board
G139
4-14
Necessary actions
Check the connection
between the transfer roller
and the high voltage supply
unit.
Replace the PCU.
Repair the transfer roller.
board.
SM
4.3.5 REPEATED SPOTS OR LINES ON PRINTS

Symptom
The same spots or lines
appear at regular intervals.
(1.114 inches)
(1.236 inches)
(1.417 inches)
(1.496 inches)
(1.759 inches)
(1.795 inches)
(1.82 inches)
(2.721 inches)
(2.933 inches)
(2.968 inches)
(2.968 inches)
(3.740 inches)
(5.6 inches)
Possible cause
Defective transfer roller unit

Defective charge roller
Defective belt transfer roller
Defective development roller
Defective transfer belt drive
roller
Defective waste toner
disposal screw
Defective registration roller
Necessary actions
Replace the transfer roller

assembly.
Replace the PCU.
unit.
Replace the PCU.
unit.
Replace the PCU.
Replace the registration

roller.
Defective toner supply roller
Replace the PCU.
Defective OPC drum
Replace the PCU.
Defective belt tension roller

Defective pressure roller

unit.
Defective fusing belt
4.3.6 DARK VERTICAL LINE IN PRINT

Symptom
A dark line appears. The line
is parallel to the paper feed
direction.
Of only one CMY color
or black
Of any combination of
colors (not just C, M, or
Y)
Possible cause
Necessary actions
Defective PCU
Replace the PCU.


unit.
G139
SM
4-15
G139
4.3.7 WHITE HORIZONTAL LINES OR BANDS

Symptom
White lines or bands appear
in images of all toner colors.
They are vertical to the
paper feed direction.
Possible cause
Defective PCU
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
unit.
4.3.8 MISSING PARTS OF IMAGES

Symptom
Some areas of the printed
image are missing.
Possible cause
Defective PCU
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
unit.
4.3.9 DIRTY BACKGROUND

Symptom
Possible cause
Necessary actions
Backgrounds are too dense.
Of only one CMYK color Defective PCU
Replace the PCU.
or black
Of more than one CMYK Defective high voltage supply Replace the high voltage
color
board
supply board.
4.3.10 PARTIAL CMY COLOR DOTS

Symptom
Unexpected dots of the
Possible cause
Defective PCU
Necessary actions
Re-seat PCU
Replace the PCU.
unit.
4.3.11 DARK IRREGULAR STREAKS ON PRINTS

Symptom
Unexpected streaks appear
at irregular intervals.
G139
Possible cause
4-16
Necessary actions
unit.
SM
4.3.12 CMY COLOR IRREGULAR STREAKS

Symptom
Unexpected streaks of the
Possible cause
Defective PCU
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
unit.
Possible cause
Defective PCU
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
4.3.13 GHOSTING
Symptom
The same or similar image
appears two or more times.
They get weaker and
weaker.
NOTE: 1) Ghosting is sometimes unavoidable. This is because the charge is not

completely quenched while the transfer belt makes one rotation.
2) Older toner cartridges tend to cause ghosting.
4.3.14 UNFUSED OR PARTIALLY FUSED PRINTS

Symptom
not fused very well.
Possible cause
Nonstandard paper in use
Incorrect media type mode
Necessary actions
Use recommended paper.
Select an appropriate media
mode.
4.3.15 IMAGE SKEW

Possible cause
position
Defective intermediate or
registration roller
roller
board
Defective corner separator
Defective spring
Necessary actions
correctly.
Repair the paper feed unit.
Check the transfer roller.
board.
Replace the corner separator
Replace the spring
G139
Symptom
Images are skewed
SM
4-17
G139
4.3.16 BACKGROUND STAIN

Symptom
The reverse side of the
paper is not clean.
Possible cause
Unclean transfer roller
Unclean paper path
Unclean intermediate or
registration roller
Unclean fusing unit exit
Necessary actions
Clean the transfer roller.
Clean the paper path.
Clean the intermediate or
Clean the fusing unit exit.
4.3.17 NO PRINTING ON PAPER EDGE

Symptom
Images are not printed in the
areas around the paper
edges.
Possible cause
Defective PCU
PCU
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
unit.
4.3.18 IMAGE NOT CENTERED WHEN IT SHOULD BE

Symptom
Printed images are not
properly centered.
G139
Possible cause
position
Incorrect margin setting
board
4-18
Necessary actions
correctly.
Adjust the margin setting.
board.
SM
4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.4.1 SENSORS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
BK PCU Virgin Sensor
Board
CMY PCU Virgin
Sensor Board
Detection Switch
Black Toner Empty
Sensor
Cyan Toner Empty
Sensor
Yellow Toner Empty
Sensor
Magenta Toner Empty
Sensor
Toner Cartridge
Access Cover
Detection Switch
CMY PC Home
Position Sensor
Black PC Home
Position Sensor
Accumulator Cam
Home Position Sensor
Fusing Unit Detection
Sensor
Thermistor 1
Thermistor 2
Pressure Roller
Thermistor
Sensor
Fusing Jam (Paper
Ejection) Sensor
Signal Name
Active
CN No./
Pin No.
(Switch)
PIKFUSEK
Analog
CN6/1
Black PCU
PIKFUSEYMC
Analog
CN6/3
CMY PCU
DOPEN
CN7/1

(front side)
NEMPK
CN10/1
NEMPC
CN10/2
NEMPY
CN10/7
NEMPM
CN10/8
TCDOPEN
CN11/2
Top Cover
YMCZPH
CN13/2
KZPH
CN13/3
OPC Cam Home

Position Sensor Board
on Main Drive Unit
ITHOME1
CN14/2
FSRFUSE
CN15/1
TH1HIGH
TH2HIGH
Analog
Analog
CN15/4
CN15/3
THFUSE
Analog
CN15/5
ROTATE
CN15/6
NFSRJAM
CN15/7
18
Paper Full Sensor
EXITFULL
CN17/3
19
Paper Empty Sensor
STPNON
CN18/2
20
Registration Sensor
NREGSEN
CN18/3
MPTHOME
CN23/3
MPPSEN
CN23/5
TBFUL
CN27/8
21
22
23
SM
MPT Home Position

Sensor
MPT Paper Empty
Sensor
Waste Toner Full
Sensor
4-19
Position
Toner Empty Sensor

Board on Toner
Cartridge Drive Unit
Accumulator Tension
Unit
Fusing Unit
Paper Full Sensor

Board in paper exit
block
Paper
Empty/Registration
Sensor Board on
Paper Feed Unit
Left side of Chassis
(front side)
G139
No.
By Power Switch
G139
No.
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
30
Left Side Color

Registration Sensor
Waste Toner Detection
Sensor
Right Side Color
Registration Sensor
Paper Size 1 Switch
Paper Size 2 Switch
Paper Cassette
Detection Switch
Temperature Sensor
31
Humidity Sensor
32
ADU Detection Sensor

ADU Jam Detection
Sensor
Paper Jam Sensor
Paper Empty Sensor
Size 1 Switch
Size 2 Switch
Option Cassette
Detection Switch
24
25
26
27
28
29
33
34
35
36
37
38
Signal Name
Active
CN No./
Pin No.
(Switch)
SNS_L
Analog
CN27/1
WTB_NON
CN27/6
SNS_R
Analog
CN27/3
STPSZ1
STPSZ2
Table 1
Table 1
CN28/1
CN28/2
STNON
CN28/4
TEMP
Analog
CN29/4
HUM
Analog
CN29/2
ADUNON
CN39/2
NADUJAM
CN39/5
ACFJAM
ACFPNON
H
H
CN6/3
CN6/2
STPSZ1
Table 2
CN5/1
STPSZ2
Table 2
CN5/2
STNON
CN5/3
Position
Color Registration
Sensor Board
Rear side of Chassis

(paper size detector)
Humidity/Temperature
Sensor Board at left
side of Chassis
Inner Cover (at Front
side of Chassis)
Option Feeder
NOTE: Refer to the Connector Layout Tables for additional details.
Table 1
Paper Size
STPSZ2
STPSZ1
Letter
L
L
A4
L
H
B5
H
L
Legal
H
H
Letter
L
L
A4
L
H
B5
H
L
Legal
H
H
Table 2
Paper Size
ACFPSZ2
ACFPSZ
G139
4-20
SM
BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
4.5 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

Power supply unit
Fuse
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Rating
120 V
220 240 V
8 A/125 V
4 A/250 V
4 A/125 V
4 A/250 V
4 A/125 V
4 A/250 V
4 A/125 V
4 A/250 V
4 A/125 V
4 A/250 V
4 A/125 V
4 A/250 V
4 A/125 V
4 A/250 V
Symptom when turning on

the main power switch
No response
No response
No response
No response
No response
No response
No response
High voltage unit

Fuse
IP101
Rating
120 V
220 240 V
1.5 A/50 V
1.5 A/50 V
Symptom when turning on

the main power switch
No response
4.6 LEDS
G139
No LEDs are used for this model (except for the Network Interface).
SM
4-21
G139
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
CAUTION
Before accessing the service menu, do the following:
Confirm that there is no print data in the printer buffer (the Data In LED
must not be lit or blinking).
If there is some data in the buffer, wait until all data has been printed.
5.1.1 SERVICE MODE OPERATION

NOTE: The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only so
that they can properly maintain product quality. If this mode is used by
anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be
deleted or settings might be changed. In this condition, product quality
cannot be guaranteed.
Online
From Feed
Escape
Job Reset
Enter
Menu
Power
Data In
Alert
G139S501.WMF
Entering the Service Mode

The following show the two ways to enter the service mode.
Method 2: With the machine already on, press the Up/Down arrow keys together
for about 5 seconds. Then release and press the #Enter key.
The above message shown in the illustration shows on the display.
NOTE: The machine automatically goes off line when you enter the service mode.
SM
5-1
G139
G139
Method 1: Turn the machine on while pressing the Online key and Escape key
together until the message "SYSTEMver x.xx" shows on the display.
NOTE: If you switch the machine off, all jobs stored on the hard disk using the
sample print and protected print features will be deleted.
Prior to switching the printer off, access User Tools to see if there are any
jobs stored.
(Menu key - Sample Print, or Protected Print).
Accessing the Required Program

Use the Up/Down arrow keys to scroll through the menu listing.
1. Service Menu: Controller service modes
2. Engine Maintenance: Engine service modes
3: End: Exit service mode
To select an item, press the Enter key. Then the sub-menu shows.
Scroll through the sub menu items with the Up/Down arrow keys.
Press the Escape key to go back to a higher level.
Inputting a Value or Setting for a Service Program

Enter the required program mode as explained above. The setting shown on the
display is the current setting.
Select the required setting with the Up/Down arrow keys. Then press the Enter
key. The previous value stays if the Enter key is not pressed.
Exiting Service Mode

Select 3. End from the service mode main menu. Then press the Enter key.
NOTE: To save any modified settings, turn the main switch off and on after you
exit the service program mode.
G139
5-2
SM
5.2 PRINTER CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE

NOTE: In the Function/[Setting] column:
The related pop-up screen name and function name (if any) shown in
parenthesis following the function description.
Comments are in italics.
The setting range is enclosed in brackets, with the default setting shown
in bold.
An asterisk (*) after the mode number means that this modes value is
stored in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM reset, all SP modes return to their
factory settings.
DFU stands for Design/Factory Use only. Values marked DFU should not
be changed.
FA stands for Factory Adjustment only. Values marked FA should not be
changed.
5.2.1 SERVICE (CONTROLLER SERVICE MODES)

1
001*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Bit Switch]
1
Bit Switch 1
2
Bit Switch 2
Bit Switch 3
Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU
Bit 0 to 2: Not used. Do not change settings.
Bit 3: Changing print language (PCL <-> PS)
0: Enabled 1: Disabled (No change)
Bit 0: PostScript3 Euro glyph
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Even if there is no Euro Glyph in ROM,
it is possible to load the Euro Glyph data.)
Bit 1: Not used. Do not change setting.
Bit 2:PCL5e/5c (HP4000/HP8000)
The left space command is set to 0, the machine is
changed to 1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Bit 3: PCL5e/GL2: pen # of PW
0: Normal
1: Patch
Bit 4: Tray selecting
0: Select tray is determined auto tray selecting
1: Like HP
Machines can take different actions depending on this
setting when a tray is selected using PCL5e commands,
and if the tray does not have any paper.
If this bit is set to "0", the machine goes to alert status

another tray that has the same paper size or type.
SM
5-3
G139
G139
and waits for the user to take action.
If this bit is set to "1", the machine searches for

1
4
5
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Bit Switch 4
Bit Switch 5
Bit 3: Enabled the %% command of the PostScript
detection condition for the auto print language selection
function.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
003
004
005
101
102
6
Bit Switch 6
7
Bit Switch 7
8
Bit Switch 8
[Clear Setting]
1
Init System
3
Delete Program
[Print Summary]
1
Print Summary

Initializes the settings in the System menu of the user

tools.
DFU
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the

controller settings).
[Disp. Version] Display Version
1
Printer Version
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
[ToneCtlSet] Toner Control Setting

Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a)
1
Tone (Factory)
the factory setting, b) the previous setting, or c) the
2
Tone (Prev.)
current setting.
3
Tone (Current)
[ToneCtlSet] Toner Control Setting
1
ToneCtlSet
Sets the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma
adjustment. The asterisk (*) shows which mode is set.
*1200x1200Photo 600x600Text
1200x600Text
600x600Photo
1200x600Photo
103
[PrnColorSheet] Print Color Sheet

1
ToneCtlSheet
Prints the test page to check the color balance before
and after the gamma adjustment.
2
ColorChart
104
[ToneCtlValue] Toner Control Value

Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected with the Tone Ctl Set setting.
1
Set Black 1
[0 ~ 255 / 16 / 1/step]
21 Set Cyan 1
41 Set Magenta 1
61 Set Yellow 1
2
Set Black 2
[0 ~ 255 / 32 / 1/step]
22 Set Cyan 2
42 Set Magenta 2
62 Set Yellow 2
[0 ~ 255 / 48 / 1/step]
3
Set Black 3
23 Set Cyan 3
43 Set Magenta 3
63 Set Yellow 3
G139
5-4
SM
104
SM
4
24
44
64
5
25
45
65
6
26
46
66
7
27
47
67
8
28
48
68
9
29
49
69
10
30
50
70
11
31
51
71
12
32
52
72
13
33
53
73
14
34
54
74
15
35
55
75
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Set Black 4
Set Cyan 4
Set Magenta 4
Set Yellow 4
Set Black 5
Set Cyan 5
Set Magenta 5
Set Yellow 5
Set Black 6
Set Cyan 6
Set Magenta 6
Set Yellow 6
Set Black 7
Set Cyan 7
Set Magenta 7
Set Yellow 7
Set Black 8
Set Cyan 8
Set Magenta 8
Set Yellow 8
Set Black 9
Set Cyan 9
Set Magenta 9
Set Yellow 9
Set Black 10
Set Cyan 10
Set Magenta 10
Set Yellow 10
Set Black 11
Set Cyan 11
Set Magenta 11
Set Yellow 11
Set Black 12
Set Cyan 12
Set Magenta 12
Set Yellow 12
Set Black 13
Set Cyan 13
Set Magenta 13
Set Yellow 13
Set Black 14
Set Cyan 14
Set Magenta 14
Set Yellow 14
Set Black 15
Set Cyan 15
Set Magenta 15
Set Yellow 15
[0 ~ 255 / 64 / 1/step]
[0 ~ 255 / 80 / 1/step]
[0 ~ 255 / 96 / 1/step]
[0 ~ 255 / 112 / 1/step]
[0 ~ 255 / 128 / 1/step]
[0 ~ 255 / 144 / 1/step]
[0 ~ 255 / 160 / 1/step]
[0 ~ 255 / 176 / 1/step]
[0 ~ 255 / 192 / 1/step]
[0 ~ 255 / 208 / 1/step]
[0 ~ 255 / 224 / 1/step]
[0 ~ 255 / 240 / 1/step]

G139
5-5
G139

1
105
106
107
108
G139
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[ToneCtlSave] Toner Control Value Save
1
ToneCtlSave
Stores the print gamma adjusted with the Toner Ctl
Value menu item as the current setting. Before the
machine stores the new current setting, it moves the
data currently stored as the current setting to the
previous setting memory storage location.
[Toner Limit]
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
1
TonerLimitPhot
[100 ~ 400 / 260 / 1%/step]
2
TonerLimitText
[100 ~ 400 / 200 / 1%/step]
[FactoryTestPrt] Factory Test Page Print
1
Image Density
Prints the image density test page for the factory line.
DFU
[Ext. TonerSave]
1
Mode 1: Text
DFU
2
Mode 2: Text
3
Mode 1: Image
4
Mode 2: Image
5
Mode 1: Line
6
Mode 2: Line
7
Mode 1: Paint
8
Mode 2: Paint
5-6
SM
Bit Switch Settings

NOTE: These bit switches are all for use in Japan only.
How to Change Bit Switch Settings
1. Select 1. Service.
NOTE: ver x.xx shows the machines
firmware version.
SYSTEMver
1.Service
x.xx
G139S502.WMF
2. Press the enter key 2 times.
SP1001-001
Bit Switch 1

display bit switches 1 through 8.
G139S502A.WMF
SP1001-004
Bit Switch 4
G139S503A.WMF
4. Press the enter key.
Sw#4
bit0

select a column.
6. Press the enter key. The current value shows

in the column.

change the value.
8. Press the enter key. The changed value is

stored.
00000000
_
G139S504A.WMF
Sw#4
bit3
00000000
_
G139S505.WMF
Sw#4
bit3
00000000
0
G139S506.WMF
Sw#4
bit3
00000000
1
G139S507.WMF
Sw#4
bit3
00001000
_
G139S508.WMF
9. Press the escape key 3 times.
SYSTEMver
1.Service
x.xx
SYSTEMver
3.End
x.xx
G139S503.WMF
SM
5-7
G139
G139
G139S502.WMF
10. Select 3. End.
Gamma Adjustment
NOTE: To correct color quality problems, clean and/or replace related parts first.
Then, if adjustments are required, follow the procedure in this section.
Overview
To adjust the printer gamma:
Select the print mode that needs calibrating
Print a color calibration test sheet
Make the gradation scales on the printout smooth from the lowest to the
highest density. Adjust the CMY gradation scale at the top of the chart by
balancing the density of the C, M, and Y gradation scales the CMY gray
scale should change smoothly from minimum to maximum, and there should
be no coloration.
The color adjustment sheet is as follows.
[C]
[B]
[A]
G081S914.PCX
For each color, you can adjust 15 density levels (adjustment points) (example [A])
between 0 (lowest density) [B] and 255 (highest density) [C]. For each adjustment
point, you can adjust the density between values 0 and 255.
G139
5-8
SM
The gradation scales marked Default are printed according to the default gamma
settings in the flash ROM in the controller. The gamma adjustment changes the
densities at the adjustable points within the gradation scale. The gradation scale
marked Current shows the current settings.
During the adjustment procedure, compare the Current gradation scale with the
Default. Select the density for each of the 15 adjustable points, excluding points 0
and 255, from the Default gradation scale.
The NVRAM holds three sets of controller gamma settings:
Those saved this time: ToneCtlSet - Tone (Current)
Those saved in the previous adjustment: ToneCtlSet - Tone (Prev)
The factory settings: ToneCtlSet - Tone (Factory)
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter the controller service mode.
2. Use the down arrow key to select ToneCtlSet (there are two of these in the
menu; select the second one SP1102) and press the Enter key.
3. Use the up/down key to select the mode that requires calibrating (Press the
Enter key to select), then press the Escape key until you get back to the
controller service mode menu.
4. Use the down arrow key to select SP1103 PrnColorSheet and press the Enter
key.
5. Use the up/down key to select SP1103-001 ToneCtlSheet (normally this is
displayed by default) and press the Enter key.
6. When Execute? is displayed, press the Enter key to print out the color
calibration test sheet.
7. When Execute OK is displayed, press the Escape key 2 times to exit from the
menu. (You are then returned to the PrnColorSheet in the controller service
menu.)
G139
8. Use the down arrow key to select ToneCtlValue (SP1104) and press the
Enter key.
SM
5-9
G139
9. Carefully examine the printed Color Calibration Test Sheet and determine
where along the test sheets 15 adjustment points an adjustment is necessary.
Use the up/down arrow key to select the setting you are adjusting, then press
the enter key. The three digits in the display (example 016) indicate a position
on the color calibration test sheet.
Operation Panel
Display
Set Black 1
Set Black 2
Set Black 3
:
:
Set Black 13
Set Black 14
Set Black 15
Set Cyan 1 ~ 15
Set Magenta 1 ~ 15
Set Yellow 1 ~ 15
Color Calibration
Test Sheet
Adjustment Point 16
Adjustment Point 32
Adjustment Point 48
:
:
NOTE: The indicated

Adjustment Points
on the gradation
scale are also the
Default Values.
Using SP1104-XX, adjust the color density at each of the 15 adjustment points
(default values 16 to 240) for each of the four colors.
NOTE: To decide what density value to input, do the following.
1) Look at the color adjustment sheet.
2) For the color you are adjusting, look at the gradation scale entitled
Default.
3) Go along the scale until you reach the density that you wish to
adjust.
4) Read off the value on the scale and store it in the machine.
a) Use the up/down key to move the cursor along the three-digit
display, then press the Enter key.
b) Use the up/down key to change the digit at the cursor, then press
the Enter key.
c) Press the Escape key to exit from the menu.
5) If necessary, repeat this procedure for all 15 adjustment points for
each color and black.
10. When the density setting is complete for all colors, print out a color adjustment
sheet again and make sure that the gradation scale for each printed color is
smooth and that the CMY gradation scale is gray. Repeat the adjustment if
there is an anomaly (normally, repeat this procedure 3 to 5 times).
NOTE: Adding a new value (0 to 255) to any of the adjustment points will not
change the calibration sheets scale. In other words, the density value
entered for any adjustment point is not shown numerically on the gradation
scale.
11. When the adjustment results are satisfactory, do the following:
1) Use SP1105 ToneCtlSave in the controller service menu, to store the new
settings in the controller.
G139
5-10
SM
2) Reset the controller (press the [Job Reset] key when the machine is off
line) to use the new settings.
G139
NOTE: The new settings will not be saved in the controller NVRAM unless you
reset the controller.
Entering SP1101 ToneCtlSet allows you to select the Factory (SP1101001), Previous (SP1101-002) or Current (SP1101-001) controller
settings.
SM
5-11
G139
5.3 PRINTER ENGINE SERVICE MODE

An asterisk symbol (*) after the mode number means that this modes value is
stored in the NVRAM.
The pound or sharp symbol (#) indicates that this mode's value is stored in the
EEPROM. If you do a RAM reset, these SP modes return to their factory settings.
5.3.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE (2. ENGINE)

SP1-XXX (Feed)
1
001
#
002
#
003
#
105
#
G139
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Lead Edge Reg.] Leading Edge Registration
Process Speed
1
TOP 100
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the
registration clutch operation timing for each mode.
2
TOP 124
[30 ~ 30 / 0 / 2 line/step]
3
TOP 50
[S-to-S Reg.] Side-to-Side Registration
1
Paper Tray 1
Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser
main scan start position for each mode.
2
By-pass Table
[15 ~ 15 / 0 / 2 pixel/step]
3
Paper Tray 2
4
Paper Tray 3
5
Duplex
[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle
(Process Speed, Tray)
1
100 Tray1
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration
roller by changing the paper feed timing.
2
100 Bypass
[5 ~ 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
3
100 Tray2
4
100 Tray3
5
100 Dpx
6
124 Tray1
[5 ~ 5 / 0 / 1.24 mm/step]
7
124 Bypass
8
124 Tray2
9
124 Tray3
10 124 Dpx
11 50 Tray1
[5 ~ 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
12 50 Bypass
13 50 Tray2
14 50 Tray3
15 50 Dpx
[Fusing Temp.] Fusing Temperature
(Paper Type, Process Speed)
Paper Type N: Normal, Thin OHP. Card Envelope Label Coated Paper
Japanese PostCard(DFU)
1
N 100
2
N 124
paper type.
3
N 50
4
Thin 100
5
Thin 124
6
Thin 50
[10 ~ 10 / 0 / 1oC/step]
7
OHP
8
Card
9
Envelope
5-12
SM
1
105
#
10
11
12
13
14
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Coated Paper
Label
PostCard Doc
PostCard Adr
Index
paper type.
[10 ~ 10 / 0 / 1oC/step]
G139
SM
5-13
G139
SP2-XXX (Drum)
2
201
#
208
#
310
#
G139
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Dev. Bias] Development Bias ([Color], Process Speed)
1
[K] Over All
Adjusts the development bias.
2
[C] Over All
[10 ~ 10 / 0 / 1 V/step] DFU
3
[M] Over All
4
[Y] Over All
5
[K] 100
6
[C] 100
7
[M] 100
8
[Y] 100
9
[K] 124
10 [C] 124
11 [M] 124
12 [Y] 124
13 [K] 50 600dpi
14 [C] 50 600dpi
15 [M] 50 600dpi
16 [Y] 50 600dpi
17 [K] 50 1200dpi
18 [C] 50 1200dpi
19 [M] 50 1200dpi
20 [Y] 50 1200dpi
21 OHP [K] 50
22 OHP [C] 50
23 OHP [M] 50
24 OHP [Y] 50
[Toner Control]
1
Set Flag
Sets the toner supply control flag. Toner is supplied to
the development unit at the following times when the flag
is set:
When the main power switch is turned off and on.
When the machine recovers from the energy saver
mode.
After the toner has been supplied to the development
unit, the toner control flag is reset (the flag is turned off).
DFU
2
Reset Flag
[Transfer Bias] Transfer Bias
( Paper Type, Process Speed, Tray)
Paper Type N: Normal, Thin, OHP, Card, Envelope, Coated Paper, Label, PostCard
Tray B: By-pass Tray Postcard DFU (used in Japan only)
1
N 100
print mode.
2
N 124
[15 ~ 15 / 0 / 63.16 V/step ]
3
N 50
4
Thin 100
5
Thin 124
6
Thin 50
7
OHP B
8
Card B
9
Envelop 1 B
10 Coated Paper B
11 Label B
5-14
SM
2
310
#
G139
311
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
12 PostCard Doc
(Postcard Document)
print mode.
[15 ~ 15 / 0 / 63.16 V/step ]
13 PostCard Adr
(Postcard address)
14 Index
[STR Type] Second Transfer Roller, Bias Type Selection
Selects the bias type for the paper transfer roller.
1
STR Type
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Center (Middle), 1: High, 2: Low
SM
5-15
G139
SP5-XXX (Mode)
5
024*
045*
049*
051*
055*
150
302*
307*
G139
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[mm/inch display]
1
mm/inch display
Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.

0: mm (Europe/Asia)
1: inch (USA)
[Accounting count] Accounting Count Adjustment
1
Counter Method
Switches the counter display.
The setting can only be changed once.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Developments
1: Prints
[LCDcontrast] (May not be present in final firmware)
1
LCD contrast
Adjusts the contrast of LCD.
[16 ~ 31 / 25 / 1/step]
[Toner Refill Displ] Toner Refill Display Adjustment
1
Toner Refill Displ
Enable or disable the warning display when you install a
toner bottle that has been refilled by third party venders.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: enable, 1: disable
[Display IP add] IP Address Display Setting
1
Display IP add
Display or does not display IP address on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: No, 1: Yes
[Bypass Length Se] Bypass Length Setting
1
Bypass Length Se
Lets or does not let the by-pass tray feed extra long
paper (up to 1260 mm).
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
[Set Time]
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the
local time zone.
[1440 ~ 1440 / NA, EU, CH / 1 minute/step]
NA: 300, EU: 60, CH: 480
[Summer Time] Daylight Saving Time Adjustment
1
Setting
Enables or disables the daylight saving time mode.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric
0: Off, 1: On
5-16
SM
307*
404
501*
504*
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
Rule Set(Start)
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0"
cannot be input in the first digit, so the eight-digit setting
for SP 5307 2 or 5307 3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]

3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week.
[0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time.
[0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time.
[0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th
Sunday in March
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP 5307 1 is set to "1".
4
Rule Set(End)
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week.
[0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP 5307 1 is set to "1".
[UCodeCtrClr] Use Code Counter Clear
UcodeCtrClr
Clear all counters for users.
[PM Alarm] PM Alarm Level
Sets the PM alarm Interval.
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1k prints/step]
The alert is sent to the e-mail address that is specified
for the system administrator using a browser and web
server (Web Image Monitor).
0: Disables the PM alarm
When SP 5866 1 is set to "1", this SP is enabled.
[Jam Alarm] Jam Alarm Level
1
Jam Alarm
Sets the jam alarm level. If a paper jam occurs, the jam
alarm counter increases by +1. If no paper jam occurs
while the set number of paper is output, the jam alarm
counter decreases by -1. The jam alarm occurs when the
jam alarm counter gets to +10.
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]
0: Disables the jam alarm
1: 1.5K, 2: 3K, 3: 6K
The alert is sent to the e-mail address that is specified for
the system administrator using a browser and web server
(Web Image Monitor).
When SP 5866 1 is set to "1", this SP is enabled.
5-17
G139
G139
5
505*
507*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Error Alarm]
Sets the error alarm level. If an SC code occurs, the error

alarm counter increases by +1. If no SC code occurs
while the set number of paper is output, the jam alarm
counter decreases by -1. The error alarm occurs when
the error alarm counter reaches +5.
[0 to 255 / 30 / 1/step]
0: Disables the error alarm
When SP 5866 1 is set to 1, this SP is enabled.
[Supply Alarm]
1
Paper Supply Ala
2
Toner Supply Ala
128
133
134
142
164
166
172
801
Engine Setting
8
10
SCS (System Control

Service)
IMH (Image Memory
Handler)
MCS (Memory Control
Service)
PRT
Web Service
11
NCS
14
15
16
17
DCS Setting
Clear UCS Setting
MIRS Setting
CSS
G139
Interval: Others
Interval: A4
Interval: A5
Interval: B5
Interval: LG
Interval: LT
Interval: HLT
[Memory Clear]
1
All
803
804
[Input Check]
[Output Check]
Enables or disables the supply alarm.

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Sets the paper supply alarm level. A paper supply alarm
counter increases by +1 when a sheet of the related size
is used. The paper supply alarm occurs when one of the
paper supply alarm counters gets to the set value.
[250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1/step]
When SP 5866 1 is set to 1, this SP is enabled.
Resets the SP 5801 2 through 16 except the security
related data in 801-3, -10, -11and -15. These cannot be
reset with SP mode.
Clears all the engine settings.
Engine settings and engine counters can be cleared
independently with SP 5998 1 and -2.
Clears the system settings.
Clears IMH data. DFU
Clears MCS data. DFU
MCS is for network settings.
Clears the printer application settings.
Clears the web service data and the network application
data.
Initializes the system default and interface settings (IP
address also), SmartNetMonitor for Admin,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
Resets or deletes the DCS-related data.
Resets or deletes the UCS-related data.
Resets or deletes the MIRS-related data.
Resets or deletes the CSS-related data.
FA
See section 5-3-2.
See section 5-3-3.
5-18
SM
5
808
811
812*
816*
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Destination] Destination Code Display
1
Destination
Displays the destination code.
[ 0 = JP, 1 = NA, 2 = EU, 3 = AS ]
[Serial Number] Serial Number Display
2
DispCntl SN (Display
Display the machine serial number
Controller Serial
Number)
10 DisEng SN (Display
Display the mechanical engine serial number
#
Engine Serial Number)
11 SetEng SN (Set
Set the mechanical engine serial number when the
Engine Serial Number) EEPROM on the engine control board is replaced.
[TEL No. Setting] Telephone No. Setting
1
Service
Sets the telephone number for a service representative.
This number is printed on the Counter List, which can be
printed with the users Counter menu. This can be up to
16 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters
can be input).
2
FAX TEL No.
Sets the fax or telephone number for a service
representative by using the enter key and the down
arrow key.
Both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input.
[Remote Service] These settings are used for NRS.
1
I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.
[0 or 2 / 2 / 1/step]
0: Off, 2: Network (The remote service function is on.)
2
CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Start, 1: End
3
Function Flag
Enables or disables the remote service function.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6
Device Informati
Shows or does not show the device information call in
the user tools mode.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
7
SSL Disable
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when
calling the RCG.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification
1: Does no use the RCG certification
8
RCG Connect Time
Specifies the timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second /step]
9
RCG Write Timeou
Specifies the timeout interval when writing to the RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
10 RCG Read Timeout
Specifies the timeout interval when reading from the
RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
11 Port 80 Enable
Enables or disables the access to the SOAP method via
port 80.
[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
5-19
G139
G139
5
821*
824
825
828*
G139
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Remote Service A] Remote Service Address
1
CSS-PI Device Co
[0 ~ 4 / 0 / 1/step] DFU
2
RCG IP Address (used Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote Communication
for NRS)
Gate).
[00000000h ~ FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1/step]
[NVRAM Upload] NVRAM Data Upload
Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters
and the serial number) from the NVRAM to an SD card.
See the 5.4.5 about details.
[NVRAM Download] NVRAM Data Download
Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card
to the NVRAM.
See the 5.4.5 about details.
[Network] Job spool settings/ Interface selection for Ethernet and wireless LAN
Switches Centronics IEEE1284 compatibility on/off for
50 1284 Compatible
the network.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
Selecting 0 disables bi-directional data transmission.
52 ECP
Switches the ECP setting for Centronics off/on.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
With 1 selected, SP5-828-50 must be enabled for 1284
mode compatibility.
65 Job Spool
Switches the job spool on/off.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
66 HD job Clear
Selects the treatment of the job when a spooled job
exists at power on.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: OFF (Data is cleared.)
1: ON (Automatically printed)
69 Job Spool (Protocol)
Switches job spooling off or on and enables settings for
job spooling protocols.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Off, 1: On
Bit switch:
Bit 0: LPR
Bit 1: FPT
Bit 2: IPP
Bit 3: SMB
Bit 4: Not used.
Bit 5: DIPRINT
Bits 6 and 7: Reserved
84 Print Settings List
Prints a list of NCS related parameters.
90 TELNET
Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / ]
91 Web
Enables or disables the Web monitor.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
5-20
SM
5
832
839*
840*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[HDD Init.] HDD Initialization
1
HDD Init.
[IEEE1394]
4
Host Name
7
Cycle Master
BCR mode
IRM 1394a Check
10
Unique ID
11
Logout
12
Login
13
Login MAX
[IEEE802.11b]
6
Channel Max
Channel Min
Initializes the hard disk.

Use this SP mode only for hard disk error recovery.
Shows the 1394 host name.
[Text up to 64 bytes / NULL / /step]
Turns the cycle master function on/off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Selects either Standard, 'IRM Color Copy', or 'Always
Effective'.
Turns the IRM 1394a check on/off.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON
If the IRM is not defined as 1394a standard, its node is
used as IRM.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Prevents initiators from logging on, or, makes initiators
log off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF
(Prevents the initiators, having already logged on, to
log on if they try to log on.)
1: ON
(Makes initiators, having already logged on, to log off
if they try to log on.)
Allows/disallows an initiator to exclusively log on.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF (Disallows), 1: ON (Allows)
Specifies the maximum initiators able to log on.
[0 ~ 63 / 8 / 1 /step]
Sets the maximum value for the wireless LAN channel
adjustment. DFU
[1 ~ 11 or 13 / 13 / 1 /step]
USA: 1 to 11
NOTE: Do not change the setting, or the machine may
be out of compliance with local regulations.
Sets the minimum value for the wireless LAN channel
adjustment. DFU
[1 ~ 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
USA: 1 to 11
NOTE: Do not change the setting, or the machine may
be out of compliance with local regulations.
G139
SM
5-21
G139
5
840*
842*
844*
845*
846*
848*
856
857*
G139
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
11 WEP key number
Selects the WEP key.

[00 ~ 11 / 00 / 1 binary]
00: Key #1
01: Key #2 (Reserved)
[NFA analysis] Net File Application Analysis DFU
Default: 00000000 do not change
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server
using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
[USB] USB settings
1
Transfer Rate
Adjusts the USB transfer rate.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Auto Change
1: Full speed
Do not change the setting unless there is a data transfer
error using the USB high speed mode.
2
Vendor ID
Displays the vendor ID. DFU
3
Product ID
Displays the product ID. DFU
4
Dev Release Num
Displays the development release version number. DFU
[Delivery Srv] Delivery Server
3
Retry Interval
Specifies the retry interval.
[60 ~ 900 / 300 / 1 second/step]
4
No. of Retries
Specifies the maximum number of retries.
[0 ~ 99 / 3 / 1/step]
[UCS Setting]
3
Maximum Entries
Displays the number of maximum entries.
50 Init All Dir
Initializes all address information data except the
administration account.
[Web Service]
4
ac: ud
Enables or disables the udirectory access limitation.
11 ac: dm
Enables or disables the device management access
limitation.
[Remote Update]
2
Local Port
Allows the technician to update the firmware with a
parallel cable.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: disable, 1: enable
[Save Debug Log]
1
On/ Off
Enables or disables the debug log saving function.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
2
Target
Sets the storage location for the debug log.
[2 or 3 / 2 / 1/step]
2: HDD, 3: SD
5
Save to HDD
Sets the key number of the debug log.
6
Save to SD
Sets the key number of the debug log.
9
HDD to SD (4MB)
Copies the most recent 4 MB of the debug log from the
hard disk to the SD card.
5-22
SM
857*
858*
859*
860*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
10 HDD to SD (Any)
11
12
13
14
Erase HDD Log

Erase SD Log
Free Space on SD
SD to SD (4MB)
15
SD to SD (Any)
16
17
Make HDD Log File

Make SD Log File
[Debug Save When]

1
Engine SC Error
System SC Error
Any SC Error
Jam
[Log Save Key No.]

1
Key 1
2
Key 2
3
Key 3
4
Key 4
5
Key 5
6
Key 6
7
Key 7
8
Key 8
9
Key 9
10 Key 10
[SMTP/ POP3/ IMAP]
2
SMTP Srv Port No
3
SM
SMTP Auth.
Sets the key number of the debug log copied from the
hard disk to the SD card.
Deletes the debug log from the hard disk.
Deletes the debug log from the SD card.
Shows the free space on the SD card.
Copies the most recent 4 MB of the debug log from an
SD card to a different SD card.
Sets the key number of the debug log copied from an SD
card to a different SD card.
Makes a log file on the HDD to save debug logs. To save
debug logs, the controller makes a log file first, then
writes data in the file. (This procedure can take a long
time). The user can switch off the main power switch
before the log is written in the file. To prevent this
possible problem, prepare a log file in advance. By doing
this, the controller uses less time to save logs because
the log file is prepared.
Saves debug logs to the specified location with SP 5857
2 when an engine-related SC code occurs.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
2 when a controller-related SC code occurs.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Sets the SC code whose log is saved.
[00000 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
2 when a paper jam occurs.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Sets the key number of a specific event ( NOTE)
whose log is saved in the specified storage ( NOTE).
When multiple key numbers are assigned, the logs are
collected in this order: Key 1, Key 2, ..., Key 9, Key 10.
NOTE: The event is set with SP5-857-2. The storage is
set with SP5-858.
[0000000 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
Adjusts the number of the SMTP server ports.

[1 ~ 65535 / 25 / 1/step]
Enables or disables the SMTP authentication for mail
transfers.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
5-23
G139
G139
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
SMTP Auth. Encryp
POP before SMTP
POP to SMTP Wait
Rcv Protocol
13
POP Auth. Encryption
14
POP Srv Port No.
15
IMAP Srv Port No
17
Receive Interval
19
Mail Keep Sett.
20
Part. Mail Rcv Tm
21
MDN Res RFC2298
22
SMTP From Replace
5
860*
G139
Encrypts or does not encrypt passwords for
POP3/IMAP4 authentications.
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Automatic, 1: Not encrypt, 2: Encrypt
Enables or disables the authentication that is executed
on the POP server before the communication is
established with the SMTP server to transfer mails.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Adjusts the waiting time to access the SMTP server after
the authentication on the POP server.
[0 ~ 10000 / 300 / 1 ms/step]
Sets the protocol for receiving e-mail.
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Not receive, 1: POP3, 2: IMAP4
Encrypts or does not encrypt passwords for
POP3/IMAP4 authentications.
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Automatic, 1: Not encrypt, 2: Encrypt
Adjusts the port number for the POP server.
[1 ~ 65535 / 110 / 1/step]
Adjusts the port number for the IMAP4 server.
[1 ~ 65535 / 143 / 1/step]
Adjusts the interval for receiving e-mail.
[2 ~ 1440 / 3 / 1 minute/step]
Sets the method to keep e-mail on the server.
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Not keeping
1: Keeping All
2: Keeping the only error e-mail
Adjusts the time to keep partial e-mails. These emails get
deleted if the partial e-mails are not received during the
set time.
[1 ~ 168 / 72 / 1 h/step]
Uses or does not use the RFC2298 standard when
transmitting the MDN response mail.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not use the RFC2298 standard.
1: Use the RFC2298 standard.
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is
switched to the validated account after the SMTP server
is validated.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: No. From item not switched,
1: Yes. From item switched.
5-24
SM
5
860*
866*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
25 SMTP Auth Direct
[E-Mail Alert]
1
Notice Func E-Ma
5
Add Date Field
Selects directly the way of SMTP authentication if all
SMTP authentications fail due to the error in the SP5860-6.
This SP is activated only when SP 5860 3 is set to
Enable.
Bit switch 0: LOGIN
Bit switch 1: PLAIN
Bit switch 2: CRAM MD5
Bit switch 3: DIGEST MD
Bit switch 4 - 7: Not used
Enables or disables the alert notice function by e-mail.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Off, 1: On
Enables or disables the add the date field on the alert
notice e-mail.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Off, 1: On
869*
[RAM Disk Setting]

1
Mail Function
Enables or disables the e-mail transfer function. This SP

sets the RAM disk size for the e-mail transfer function.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: ON, 1: OFF
870
[Common Key Info W] Common Key Information Writing

1
Writing
Writes the authentication data (used for NRS) to the
memory.
3
873
[SD Card Appli Move]

1
Move Exec
2
876
Undo Exec
[Security]
1
All Clear
11 Clear
15 Clear
[ROM update]
1
ROM update
Initializes the authentication data in the memory.
5.5.2
5.5.3
Resets NCS or UCS Security

NCS Security
UCS Security
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
0: Yes, 1: No
G139
886*
Initialize
SM
5-25
G139
907*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Plug/Play] Plug and Play
1
Plug/Play
917
#
[Printable Area]
1
Extended
Specifies the Plug and Play setting.
[0 ~ 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Ricoh Aficio CL3500N
1: SAVIN CLP22
2: GES
C7521n
3: NRG
C7521n
4: LANIER LP222cn/LP221c
Enlarges the width of the printable area.
The sides of images are sometimes not printed even if
Wide-A4 is selected with PCL. Set this SP mode to 1 to
enlarge the printable area, but the quality of the image
will be slightly poorer.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: No, 1: Yes
920
#
[Pre Heat Mode]

1
Pre Heat Mode
This feature warms the fusing belt when in standby mode

to reduce the first page print time.
[0 or 1 / 1 / ]
0: Off, 1: ON
930*
[Meter Charge]
1
On/Off
Enable or disable meter-charge mode.

Important: Turn the main switch off/on after changing
this setting.
On: Enabled
OFF: Disabled
"Replace Maintenance Kit" is not shown on the
technician replaces the maintenance kit items)
The meter charge counter is shown immediately after
the Menu key is pressed.
The technician must reset the PM counter after
replacing the fusing unit.
"Replace Maintenance Kit" is displayed on the
user replaces the maintenance kit items)
The meter charge counter is not shown when the
Menu key is pressed.
The PM counter resets automatically after the user
replaces the fusing unit.
G139
5-26
SM
5
945*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
2
MenteStyle
(Maintenance Style)
[PlainPaperType]
1
Bypass tray
2
Tray 1
3
Tray2
4
Tray3
Selects "Year Contract / Click Charge / M-Pac".
Defines whether a tray contains normal or thin paper,

when the user tool setting for the tray is set to plain.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Yes (Thin)
1: Normal
The user tool setting defines whether each tray contains
normal, thin, or OHP. SP 5945 defines what normal
means for each tray (either normal or thin).
The paper thickness terminology reflects Japanese
market conditions.
Normal (plain): Use this for thin paper
Middle thick: Use this for normal paper
Thick: Use this for paper heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb)
946
[EnvelopeType]
1
Bypass Tray
950
[Exit Tray Full]

1
Print Action
990*
[SP Print Mode]

1
All (Data List)
2
SP (Mode Data List)
4
Logging Data
5
Diagnosic Report
6
Non-Default
991
992
993
SM
7
NIB Summary
[Jam OFF] Jam ON/OFF
1
Jam OFF
Selects where the printing stops or does not stop when

the exit tray full sensor detects paper full.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Stop, 1: Continue
Does SP 5990 2, 4, 5, 6, and 7.
Prints an SMC report on all SP modes.
Prints an SMC report on the SPs that save logs.
Prints the Self-Diagnosis Report.
Prints an SMC report on the SPs that have settings,
which are different from the defaults.
Prints the network configuration report.
Executes the no Jam detection function mode. This SP is

reset when you turn off the main power.
[Supply Alert] Supply Alert Setting
Selects the near end alert timing for each maintenance unit.
[1 ~ 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
1
PC (PCU)
2
TC (Toner cartridge)
3
AU (Transfer belt)
1: Earlier (Near end message shows earlier than the
4
FSR (Fusing unit)
specified timing.)
2: Default (Near end message shows at a specified
timing.)
3: Nearly Limit (Near end message shows later than the
specified timing.)
[Line Adj.] Line Point Adjustment
1
Timing(pages)
The automatic line position adjustment is done after
#
printing the number of pages that is set with this SP.
[ 0 ~ 2000 / 250 / 1/page ]
NOTE: 0: Never done
2
Manual
Use to make a line position adjustment.
5-27
G139
G139
990*
Selects the default envelope type from "Envelope 1

(default)" or "Envelope 2".
5
994
995
#
996
997*
998
G139
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[Eng Err Stat] Engine Error Status
1
(7) 00000000 (0)
Display the engine error status.
Bit 7: The fuse did not blow after installing a new PCU(K)
Bit 6: The fuse did not blow after installing a new
PCU(YMC)
Bit 5: By-pass tray and duplex unit motor error
Bit 4: The color registration sensor cannot be calibrated.
Bit 3: Cannot measure the color registration sensor
value.
Bit 2: Cannot correct the color registration.
Bit 1: PCU(YMC) home position error.
Bit 0: Not used
[Skew Adj.] Skew Adjustment
1
Skew Adj.
Select color skew correction ON or OFF.
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Off, 1: On
[Engine Print] (May not be present in final firmware)
1
Composite Line
Prints the engine pattern to check the color registration,
vertical line or four solid colors.
2
Streaks Check
3
4C Single Solid
[Eng Control Type] Engine Control Type
1
Eng Control Type
Displays the engine type. DFU
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Rated voltage, 1: Rated current
[ENG Mem Clear] Engine Memory Clear
2
Color Mis-Reg
Clears the correction values for the color registration. Do
this SP mode after replacing the color registration board.
The correction values are set after the main power has
been turned on.
3
PJ Counter
Clear the P/J counter.
5-28
SM
SP7-XXX (Data Log)

401*
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
[SC Counter]
1
SC Counter
Shows how many times SC codes have been output.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 time/step]
502*
[Total Jam]
1
Total Jam
504*
[Jam Location]
Displays the number of jams according to the location where they were detected.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
1
Initial
Paper is not fed at power on.
19 Fuser : OFF1
Paper arrives at the fusing exit sensor and then goes
back to the fusing unit.
20 Fuser : OFF2
Paper does not pass the fusing exit sensor.
24 PaperSizeErr (Paper
The registration sensor recognized that paper was too
Size Error)
short.
25 Tray 2: ON2
26 Tray 3: ON2
27 Duplex: ON
Paper does not get to the duplex unit sensor.
32 Tray 1: ON1
Paper does not reach the registration sensor.
33 Tray 2: ON1
34 Tray 3: ON1
35 Multi: ON1
Paper from the by-pass tray does not reach the
registration sensor.
36 Duplex: ON1
Paper does not reach the duplex unit sensor.
37 Regist: ON1
Paper from the by-pass tray does not pass the
38 Regist: ON2
Paper from the tray 1, 2 or 3 does not pass the
39 Fuser: ON1
Paper from the by-pass tray does not reach the fusing
exit sensor.
40 Fuser: ON2
Paper from the tray 1, 2 or 3 does not reach the fusing
exit sensor.
[Jam Paper Size]
133 A4 SEF
Shows the number of jams according to paper size.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
134 A5 SEF
142 B5 SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
[PM Counter Displ] PM Counter Display
Shows the number of pages printed for each current maintenance unit.
1
Paper
DFU
2
Page Total
Shows the total number of pages printed.
[ 0 ~ 99999999 / 0 / 1 page ]
3
Page Mono
Shows the total number of monochrome pages printed.
[ 0 ~ 99999999 / 0 / 1 page ]
Shows the number of pages calculated from drum
4
PC(K) Page
rotation.
5
PC(YMC) Page
[ 0 ~ 99999999 / 0 / 1 page ]
506*
803
#
SM
Shows the total number of jams detected.

[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
5-29
G139
G139
7
803
#
804
805
807
832*
833
#
834
#
G139
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
6
Toner(K) Pixel
7
Toner(C) Pixel
8
Toner(M) Pixel
9
Toner(Y) Pixel
10 Fusing Page
11 Trans Page
[PM Counter Reset]
(Unit [Color])
1
Paper
2
PC [K]
3
PC [YMC]
[ 0 ~ 9999999999 / 0 / 1/1024 pixel ]
[ 0 ~ 99999999 / 0 / 1 page ]
Shows the number of pages calculated from the transfer
belt rotation.
[ 0 ~ 99999999 / 0 / 1 page ]
DFU
Press the Enter key after the machine prompts
Execute?.
The machine automatically detects that the new unit is
installed when a unit is replaced. Then, the current PM
counter value is automatically reset to 0.
4
Fusing
5
Transfer
6
Toner:Bk
7
Toner:C
8
Toner:M
9
Toner:Y
[TonerBotolInfo] Toner Bottle Information
Shows how much toner remains in the bottle.
17 TonerRest:Bk
[0 ~ 1 / 100 / 1 %]
18 TonerRest:C
19 TonerRest:M
20 TonerRest:Y
[SC/Jam Clear]
1
SC/Jam Clear
Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.
[Diag. Result ] Diagnosis Result
1
Diag. Result
Shows the result of the diagnostics. Refer to section 4.2
for the error codes.
[Covrage] Pixel Coverage Ratio
1
Last: Bk
Shows the pixel coverage ratio for each color of
2
Last: C
the last output.
3
Last: M
[ 0 ~ 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step ]
4
Last: Y
Shows accumulated average value of pixel coverage
5
Average: Bk
ratio for each color.
6
Average: C
[ 0 ~ 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step ]
7
Average: M
8
Average: Y
[P/J Count] Paper per Job Counter
Shows the number of printed pages with each job
1
1 Page
command.
2
2 Page
[0 ~ 99999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
3
3 Page
4
4 Page
5
5 Page
6
610 Page
7
1120 Page
8
21 Page
9
Dplx 2 Page
Shows the number of duplex printed pages with each job
5-30
SM
834
#
901
905
#
910
911
SM
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
10 Dplx 4 Page
command.
[0 ~ 99999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
[Assert Info] Assert Information
Records the location where the last problem (SC990)
1
File Name
was detected in the program. The data stored in this SP
2
# of Lines (Number of
is used for problem analysis.
lines)
3
Location
[Alert Display]
51 PC(K) Page
Shows the threshold of the number of pages for the alert
display for each maintenance unit.
52 PC(YMC) Page
53 TC(K) starter
54 TC(K) option
55 TC(3C) starter
56 TC(3C) opt 3K
57 TC(3C) opt 6K
58 Fusing Page
60 Trans Page
[ROM No] ROM Number Display
Shows the part number.
1
System
18 NIB
131 Bluetooth
150 RPCS
151 PS
152 RPDL
153 R98
154 R16
155 RPGL
156 R55
157 RTIFF
158 PCL
159 PCLXL
160 MSIS
161 MSIS (OPTION)
162 PDF
163 BMLinks
180 FONT
181 FONT1
182 FONT2
183 FONT3
200 Factory
202 Net File
204 Printer
209 Test Suite
210 MIB
211 WebSystem
[Firmware Ver.] Firmware Version display
Shows the firmware version.
1
System
18 NIB
131 Bluetooth
150 RPCS
151 PS
152 RPDL
153 R98
5-31
G139
G139
7
911
950
#
G139
Mode No.
(Class 1, 2, and 3)
154 R16
155 RPGL
156 R55
157 RTIFF
158 PCL
159 PCLXL
160 MSIS
161 MSIS (OPTION)
162 PDF
163 BMLinks
180 FONT
181 FONT1
182 FONT2
183 FONT3
200 Factory
202 Net File
204 Printer
209 Test Suite
210 MIB
211 WebSystem
[Page Count]
1
PC(K) Page
2
PC(YMC) Page
3
Toner(K) Page
4
Toner(C) Page
5
Toner(M) Page
6
Toner(Y) Page
7
Trans Page
8
WTB Page
Shows the firmware version.
Shows the number of pages for each PCU.

Shows the number of pages for each toner bottle.
Shows the number of pages for the transfer belt unit.

Shows the number of pages for the toner collection
bottle.
5-32
SM
SP8-XXX (Data Log 2)

The counters provided in Data Log 2 are commonly used in multiple machines.
This section of the service manual includes the counters of functions or units that
are supported by all the machines. As a result some of the counters shown here
will not be available in this machine. The counters in Data Log 2 are cleared by SP
5801 (Memory Clear) or SP 7808 (Counter Reset).
Keys and abbreviations in Data Log 2
Program-related keys and abbreviations
The grand total of the counters of all application programs
T:
The counter of the printer application program excluding the events related
P:
to the document server
The counter of other application programs including remote application
O:
programs
8001
8004
*CTL
[T: 1001]
Total jobs
*CTL
[P: 1001]
The number of times the application program starts a job
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Jobs interrupted by paper jams or some other errors are also counted.
Jobs executed by SPs are not counted.
8021
8024
8027
Print job
*CTL
[T: 1003]
/ Local storage; document server
*CTL
[P: 1003]
*CTL
[O: 1003]
The number of times the application program stores data on the document server
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including

Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
8031
8034
8037
*CTL
[T: 1004]
Print job/ Designated application program
*CTL
[P: 1004]
*CTL
[O: 1004]
The number of times the application program retrieves data from the document
server
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
G139
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the
counter of the application program that executes the print job increases.
SM
5-33
G139
8061
8064
8067
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
8071
8074
8077
-001
-002
-003
-004
-005
-006
-007
*CTL
[T: 1007]
Finish, post-print processing jobs
*CTL
[P: 1007]
*CTL
[O: 1007]
The number of times the application program uses the finisher
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Sort
The number of times the application program starts the
sort mode
Stack
tack mode
Staple
staple mode
Booklet
booklet mode
NOTE: The counter of the staple mode (003) can also
increase.
Z-Fold
Z-fold mode
NOTE: The booklet mode is not included.
Punch
punch mode
NOTE: The counter of the printer application program
(P:) can also increase.
Other
(Reserved)
*CTL
[T: 1008]
Jobs/ Pages
*CTL
[P: 1008]
*CTL
[O: 1008]
The number of jobs that try to output a specific number of pages
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
1 Page
-008 21~50 Pages
2 Pages
-009 51~100 Pages
3 Pages
-010 101~300 Pages
4 Pages
-011 301~500 Pages
5 Pages
-012 501~700 Pages
6~10 Pages
-013 701~1000 Pages
11~20 Pages
-014 1001~ Pages
Jobs interrupted by paper jams or some other errors are also counted.
Job is suspended and restarted later, the job is seen as one job.
G139
5-34
SM

8381
8384
8387
*CTL
[T: 2201]
Total print pages
*CTL
[P: 2201]
*CTL
[O: 2201]
The number of sheets that the application program tries to print (excluding the
pages printed in the SP mode)
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The following pages are not counted as printed pages:

Blank pages in a duplex printing job
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip
sheets
Reports printed to confirm counts
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine
maintenance reports, etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment
Error notification reports
Partially printed pages as the result of a printer jam
8391
8411
[T: 2202]
Large size print pages
*CTL
The number of sheets printed on A3/DLT and

larger sizes
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
[T: 2204]
Prints/Duplex
*CTL
The number of sheets used in duplex printing

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
G139
The counter increases by +1 when both sides (front/back) are printed. The
counter does not increase when one of the two sides is not printed (e.g., the last
page of the documents that have three pages, five pages, seven pages, and so
on).
SM
5-35
G139

8421
8424
8427
001
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
*CTL
[T: 2205]
Print pages/ Duplex printing combine
*CTL
[P: 2205]
*CTL
[O: 2205]
The number of sheets used in binding and combining
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Simplex> Duplex
*CTL
Simplex Combine
*CTL
Duplex Combine
*CTL
2>
*CTL
2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
4>
*CTL
6>
*CTL
8>
*CTL
9>
*CTL
16>
*CTL
Booklet
*CTL
Magazine
*CTL
These counters let users know how much paper they have saved.
Partially printed sheets are also counted as 1 page (e.g, the last page in the 4-Up
mode is only partially printed when the documents have 5, 6, or 7 pages, 9, 10,
or 11 pages, 13, 14, or 15 pages, and so on.).
The following is a summary of how the counters work in the booklet and
magazine modes.
Booklet
Original Pages
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8431
8434
8437
001
002
003
G139
Magazine
Original Pages
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Count
1
2
2
2
3
4
4
4
Count
1
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
*CTL
[T: 2206]
Print pages/ Image editing performed on the
*CTL
[P: 2206]
original with the copier GUI
*CTL
[O: 2206]
The number of pages that the application program handles in a specific way
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Cover/Slip Sheet
*CTL
The number of cover sheets or slip sheets
inserted
NOTE: A duplex-printed cover is counted as
two.
Series/Book
*CTL
The number of pages printed in series (one
side) or in the booklet mode
User Stamp
*CTL
The number of pages where stamps were
applied (including page numbering and date
stamping)
5-36
SM
8441
8444
8447
001
002
003
004
005
006
*CTL
[T: 2207]
Print pages/ Paper size
*CTL
[P: 2207]
*CTL
[O: 2207]
The number of sheets of a specific paper size that the application program uses
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
A3
007 LG
A4
008 LT
A5
009 HLT
B4
010 Full Bleed
B5
254 Other (Standard)
DLT
255 Other (Custom)
These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.

8451
8451 001
8451 002
8451 003
8451 004
8451 005
8451 006
8451 007
8451 008
8451 009
8451 010
8461
8464
001
002
003
004
*CTL
Print pages/ Paper tray
[2208]
The number of sheets fed from a specific tray
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Bypass Tray
*CTL
By-pass Tray
Tray 1
*CTL
Printer
Tray 2
*CTL
Paper Tray Unit/LCT (Optional)
Tray 3
*CTL
Paper Tray Unit (Optional)
Tray 4
*CTL
(Not used)
Tray 5
*CTL
(Not used)
Tray 6
*CTL
(Not used)
Tray 7
*CTL
(Not used)
Tray 8
*CTL
(Not used)
Tray 9
*CTL
(Not used)
*CTL
[T: 2209]
Print pages/ Paper type
*CTL
[P: 2209]
The number of sheets of specific paper types
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Normal
005 Normal (Back)
Recycled
006 Thick (Back)
Special
007 OHP
Thick
008 Other
G139
These counters increase when the paper is output. On the other hand, the PM
counter increases (to measure the service life of each feed roller) when the
paper is fed.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, a sheet printed on two sides and a sheet printed on one
side are both counted as 1.
SM
5-37
G139
8471 001
8471 002
*CTL
Print pages/ Magnification
[2210]
The number of pages magnified or reduced
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
~49%
8471 004 101%~200%
50%~99%
8471 005 201% ~
8471 003
100%
8471
Some application programs (on the computer) can specify the magnification
setting of the printer driver (e.g., MS Excel). In a case like this, SP 8471
recognizes the setting and increases the corresponding counter. Other
application programs can magnify or reduce the print images on their own. In this
condition, SP 8471 does not recognize the magnification setting of the
application programs and increase the counter of 100%.
Magnification adjustment conducted on the document server is not counted.
Blank cover sheets and slip sheets are regarded as 100%.
*CTL
[T: 2211]
Print pages/ Toner save
*CTL
[P: 2211]
The number of pages printed with the toner save feature activated
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8481
8484
These counters show the same result.
001
002
*CTL
[T: 2212]
Print pages/ Color mode
*CTL
[P: 2213]
The number of pages printed in a specific color mode
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
B/W
003 Full Color
Single Color
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
*CTL
[T: 2214]
Print pages/ Emulation
*CTL
[P: 2214]
The number of pages printed by the printer emulation mode
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
RPCS
008 RTIFF
RPDL
009 PDF
PS3
010 PCL5e/5c
R98
011 PCL XL
R16
012 IPDL-C
GL/GL2
013 BM-Links (for local models only)
R55
014 Other
8501
8504
8511
8514
These counters show the same result.
G139
5-38
SM

8521
8524
001
002
003
004
*CTL
[T: 2215]
Print pages/ Finish post-print processing
*CTL
[P: 2215]
The number of pages processed by the finisher
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Sort
005 Z-Fold
Stack
006 Punch
Staple
007 Other
Booklet
All pages get counted (including unstapled pages) even if the pages are more
than the finisher can staple.
The stapling counter (003) increases by +1 when the paper is transported from
the printer to the tray of the finisher. Counter (003) increases even if a paper jam
occurs on this path. If the same job is done again, the counter (003) also
increases again.
8531
8581
001
002
003
004
005
008
009
8584
8584 001
8584 002
8591
8591 001
8591 001
*CTL
Staples
[T: 2216]
The number of staples
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
*CTL
Total counter
[T: 2223]
The number of outputs in a specific color mode
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Total
010 Total: Color
Total: Full Color
011 Total: B/W
B&W/Single Color
012 Full Color: A3
Development: CMY
013 Full Color: ~B4
Development: K
014 Full Color Prin
Print: Color
015 Mono Color Prin
Print: B/W
*CTL
Print counter
[P: 2223]
The number of outputs in a specific color mode
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
B/W
8584 003 Full Color
Single Color
*CTL
Other counter
[O: 2223]
The number of A3/DLT, duplex printing, or staples
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
A3/DLT
8591 001 Staple
Duplex
G139
Note that these counters are not for the printer application program.
SM
5-39
G139
8771 001
8771 002
8771 003
*CTL
Development counter
[3001]
The number of rotations of the development rollers
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Total
8771 004 M
K
8771 005 C
Y
8801
8801 001
8801 001
8801 001
8801 001
[3005]
K
Y
M
C
8771
8831
8831 001
8831 002
8831 003
8831 004
8841
8841 001
8841 002
8841 003
8841 004
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
Toner remain
The percentage of the remaining toner
[0~100/ 0 / 1/%]
[Coverage] Coverage Display

(Average, [Color])
Average: [K]
*EGB
Average: [Y]
*EGB
Average: [M]
*EGB
Average: [C]
*EGB
The average coverage

[0~100/ 0 / 0.01]
[Coverage] Coverage Display

(Last Page, [Color]) L: Last Page
Last: [K]
*EGB
Last: [Y]
*EGB
Last: [M]
*EGB
Last: [C]
*EGB
The coverage of the latest print

[0~100/ 0 / 0.01]
SP8-841 displays the image coverage ratio for each color of the last output. This
SP mode displays the coverage ratio of the output, i.e. the ratio of the total pixel
area of the image data to the total printable area on the paper. Note that this
value is not directly proportional to the amount of toner consumed, although of
course it is one factor that affects this amount. The other major factors involved
include: the type, total image area and image density of the original, toner
concentration and developer potential.
8902
8902 001
8902 002
[PM Count PREV1] PM Counter Previous1 Setting Clear

PC(K)
Clear the last PM counter of the PCU (K).
PC(YMC)
Clear the last PM counter of the PCU (YMC).
8903
8903 001
8903 002
[Page Count PREV1] PM Counter Previous1 Setting Clear

PC(K)
Clear the last page counter of the PCU (K).
PC(YMC)
Clear the last page counter of the PCU (YMC).
G139
5-40
SM
8912
8912 001
8912 002
8913
8913 001
8913 002
8941
8941 001
8941 002
8941 003
8941 004
8941 005
[Page Count PREV2] PM Counter Previous2 Setting Clear

PC(K)
Clear the last page counter of the PCU (K) but
one.
PC(YMC)
Clear the last page counter of the PCU (YMC)
but one.
*CTL
Machine status
[3601]
The amount of time the machine spends in a specific mode
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Operation Time
*CTL
The engine is operating. The counter does not
include the time when the data is being saved
in the HDD (while engine is not operating).
Standby Time
*CTL
The engine is not operating. The counter
includes the time when the data is being saved
in the HDD. The counter does not include the
time when the machine is n the Energy Saver
Mode, the Low Power Mode, or the Off Mode.
Energy Save Time
*CTL
The machine is in the Energy Saver Mode. The
counter includes the time when the background
printing is being executed.
Low Power Time
*CTL
The machine is in the Low Power Mode. The
counter includes the time when the engine is
on in the Energy Saver Mode. The counter also
includes the time when the background printing
is being executed.
Off Mode Time
*CTL
The machine is in the Off Mode. The counter
includes the time when the background printing
is being executed. The counter does not
include the time when the main power switch is
off.
Down Time/SC
*CTL
The total downtime caused by SC codes
Down Time/PrtJam
*CTL
The total downtime caused by paper jams
Down Time/OrgJam
*CTL
The total downtime caused by original jams
Down Time/TonEnd
*CTL
The total downtime caused by toner ends
G139
8941 006
8941 007
8941 008
8941 009
[PM Count PREV2] PM Counter Previous2 Setting Clear

PC(K)
Clear the last PM counter of the PCU (K) but
one.
PC(YMC)
Clear the last PM counter of the PCU (YMC)
but one.
SM
5-41
G139
5.3.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE

When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits show the result for a section. Each
digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No.
Result
7
0 or 1
6
0 or 1
5
0 or 1
4
0 or 1
3
0 or 1
2
0 or 1
1
0 or 1
0
0 or 1
SP5-803
Reading
Bit
Description
-XXX
0
1
1
Paper detected
Paper end
0 Paper End Sensor
[Regist] Registration Sensor
2
0 Registration Sensor
Paper detected
No paper
0 Tray set
Not set
Set
3
See Table 1.
1: Pushed
[By-pass Paper] By-pass Paper Sensor
4
0 By-pass Paper Sensor
No paper
Paper detected
[By-pass Home] By-pass Home Position Sensor
5
0 By-pass Home Position Sensor
Not home position
Home position
6
0 Paper End Sensor
Paper detected
Paper end
7
0 Jam Sensor
Paper detected
No paper
0 Tray set
Not set
Set
8
See Table 1.
1: Pushed
9
0 Paper End Sensor
Paper detected
Paper end
10
0 Jam Sensor
Paper detected
No paper
0 Tray set
Not set
Set
11
See Table 1.
1: Pushed
[P Exit Full] Exit Paper Full Sensor
12
0 Exit Paper Full Sensor
Not full
Paper full
[Paper Exit] Exit Sensor (may not be available in final firmware)
13
0 Exit Sensor
Paper detected
No paper
[Dpx Jam] Duplex Jam Sensor
14
0 Duplex Jam Sensor
Paper detected
No paper
[Dpx Unit] Duplex Unit Sensor
15
0 Duplex Unit Sensor
No unit
Duplex unit detected
[Fusing JAM] Fusing Exit Sensor
16
0 Fusing Exit Sensor
Paper detected
No paper
17
[Fusing Roller] Fusing Roller Rotation Sensor
0 Fusing Roller Rotation Sensor
Not rotating
Rotating
G139
5-42
SM
G139
SP5-803
Reading
Bit
Description
-XXX
0
1
[F Temp. Center] Fusing Temperature (Center)
18
[F Temp. Left] Fusing Temperature (Side)
19
[WstToner Full] Waste Toner Full Sensor
20
0 Waste Toner Full Sensor
Not full
Near full
[Toner Empty[Y]] Toner Empty Sensor (Y)
21
0 Toner Empty Sensor (Y)
Empty
Not empty
[Toner Empty[M]] Toner Empty Sensor (M)
22
0 Toner Empty Sensor (M)
Empty
Not empty
[Toner Empty[C]] Toner Empty Sensor (C)
23
0 Toner Empty Sensor (C)
Empty
Not empty
[Toner Empty[K]] Toner Empty Sensor (K)
24
0 Toner Empty Sensor (K)
Empty
Not empty
[Front/SideDoor] Front/Side Door Switch
25
0 Front/Side Door Switch
Open
Closed
[Toner Door] Top Cover Switch
26
0 Top Cover Switch
Open
Closed
27
10
28
10
[Temperature] Temperature Sensor
29
0-7 Temperature Sensor
[Humidity] Humidity Sensor
30
0-7 Humidity Sensor
Data range: 0 to 99, Unit:1%
[Accumulator] Transfer Belt Unit
33
0 Cam Home Position Sensor
Not home position
Home position
[PC(K) First]
34
10
[PC(YMC) First]
35
10
[F Press Temp.] Fusing Pressure Roller Temperature
37
0-7 Fusing Pressure Roller Temperature
SM
5-43
G139
Table 1: Paper Size Switch

0: Not Pushed, 1: Pushed
Models
North America
Letter SEF
A4 SEF
B5 SEF
Legal SEF
1: Pushed
Switch
Location
1
2
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
5.3.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE

SP5804-XXX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
G139
Description
Check Reset (Initialize
mechanical position)
P1 SOL (Pickup
Solenoid: Tray1)
Regist CL
B Motor 100 (By-pass
Pickup Motor: 100mm/s)
B Motor 124 (By-pass
B Motor 50 (By-pass
B Motor OFF (By-pass
Pickup Motor: OFF)
P2 SOL (Pickup
Solenoid: Tray2)
P2 Motor 100 (Tray 2
Feed Motor: 100mm/s)
P2 Motor 50 (Tray 2
Feed Motor: 50mm/s)
P2 Motor OFF (Tray 2
Feed Motor: OFF)
P3 SOL (Pickup
Solenoid: Tray3)
P3 Motor 50 (Tray 3
Feed Motor: 50mm/s)
P3 Motor OFF (Tray 3
Feed Motor: OFF)
Do this SP mode before printing after you finish the

output checks.
Turns the paper pickup solenoid for paper tray 1 ON for
1 second.
Turns the registration clutch ON for 1 second.
speed of 100 mm/s.
speed of 124 mm/s.
speed of 50 mm/s.
Turns the by-pass pickup motor OFF.
1 second.
Turns the tray 2 feed motor ON with a process speed of
100 mm/s.
124 mm/s.
50 mm/s.
1 second.
100 mm/s.
124 mm/s.
50 mm/s.
5-44
SM

SP5804-XXX
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
D SOL (Duplex Exit

Solenoid)
Belt Cam SOL (Transfer
Unit Cam Solenoid)
B/C SOL (Transfer Unit
Changer Solenoid)
PC(K) SOL
(Bk Solenoid)
PC(K) M 100 (Bk Motor:
100mm/s)
124mm/s)
50mm/s)
PC(K) M OFF
(Bk Motor: OFF)
PC(YMC) M 100
(PC/YMC Motor:
100mm/s)
PC(YMC) M 124
(PC/YMC Motor:
124mm/s)
PC(YMC) M 50
(PC/YMC Motor:
50mm/s)
PC(YMC) M OFF
(PC/YMC Motor: OFF)
Toner SOL ON (Toner
Supply Solenoid)
Toner SOL OFF (Toner
Supply Solenoid)
Turns the duplex unit paper exit solenoid ON for 1

second.
Turns the transfer unit cam solenoid ON for 1 second.
Turns the transfer unit changer solenoid ON for 1
second.
Turns the PC(K) drive solenoid ON for 1 second.
Turns the Bk motor ON with a process speed of 100
mm/s.
mm/s.
mm/s.
Turns the Bk motor OFF
Turns the PC(YMC) motor ON with a process speed of
100 mm/s.
124 mm/s.
50 mm/s.
Turns the PC(YMC) motor OFF.
Turns the toner supply solenoid on.
Turns the toner supply solenoid off.
G139
31
Description
SM
5-45
G139
5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

5.4.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE
The table lists the programs used by this machine
Type of firmware
1
Engine - Main
System
Printer Application
NIB
Web System
Location of
firmware
Printer engine control
EGB flash
ROM
Printer system management Controller
flash ROM
Feature application
SD card
NIB management
SD card
Web service application
SD card
Function
Message
displayed
Engine
Onboard Sys
Opt SD1 Prn
Opt SD1 Prn
Opt SD1 Prn
5.4.2 PRECAUTIONS
Handling SD Cards
Make sure you do the following precautions when you handle SD cards:
Turn off the main power switch before you insert or remove a SD card. Data in
the SD card can get corrupted if you insert or remove a SD card while the main
power switch is on.
Do not turn off the main power switch during downloading.
Keep SD cards in a safe location. Do not store SD cards in the following areas:
Areas that get exposed to high temperature, high humidity, direct sunlight,
or strong vibration
Areas where there are effects from magnetic forces
Do not bend or scratch SD cards.
Do not drop SD cards or expose them to shock or vibration.
NOTE: For the arrangement of files in SD cards, see 5.4.3.
Upload or Download
In this section (5.4), upload and download have the following meanings:
Upload: To copy data from the printer to the SD card
Download: To copy data from the SD card to the printer
Network Connection
Before you start, tell the user that they cannot use the printer during firmware
update. Also, the user must disconnect the printer physically from the network. If a
print job comes in, this can cause problems with the firmware update.
G139
5-46
SM
5.4.3 FILE ARRANGEMENT

How the Program Works
The firmware-update program for this machine searches the folder romdata for the
necessary firmware file. When you save the firmware to a SD card, be sure to save
it in a folder labeled romdata. You must not make the folder romdata in another
folder.
NOTE: Do not make another firmware-update program folder in the folder romdata.
Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction for the firmware update procedure.
Keep only one firmware update program folder in the folder romdata.
The firmware program contains the file information. The firmware-update program
reads the file information before you download the firmware from a SD card. The
firmware gets downloaded only when the file information is correct.
NOTE: The file information can identify the firmware. However this information
does not guarantee that the data is not corrupted.
Example
We recommend that you arrange folders and
files as follows when you save the firmware:
In the folder romdata, make only one folder
and use this folder for one model. Use the
machine code (G139) as the name of this
folder.
Make a new folder outside romdata if you
save some files other than firmware files.
Save the files in this folder. Do not save any
file outside the folders. (The diagram shows
an example. Three folders, log, nvramdata,
and prt, are outside romdata. These folders
can store debug logs, NVRAM data, and
captured files respectively.)
log
nvram
prt
romdata
G139
G1391111.fwu
G1392222.fwu
G1393333.fwu
G139
G139S901.WMF
SM
5-47
G139
5.4.4 UPDATING
Procedure
1. Turn off the main power switch.
2. Disconnect the printer from the
network ( 5.4.2).
3. Remove the slot cover [A].

NOTE: Do not use slot 1. Slot 1 is for
customer use.
4. Turn the SD card face to the front side
of the printer, and insert it into slot 2.
[A]
2
5. Slowly push the SD card into the slot

until it clicks.
6. Make sure that the SD card is locked
in place.
G139S903.JPG
NOTE: To remove the SD card, push
it in until it clicks, and release it slowly. The slot pushes the SD card out.
7. Turn on the main power switch.
8. Wait until the firmware name shows on the display (about 1 minute).
NOTE: The firmware name is read from inside the firmware. The firmware
name does not change even if you change the file name on your PC.
9. Go to the next step if the necessary firmware name shows on the display. To
use a different firmware, push the up-arrow key or the down-arrow key to find
the necessary firmware.
10. To select the firmware, push the enter key. Make sure that a star (4) is added
to the firmware name. You can confirm the parts number and version number
of each firmware, refer to the "Confirmation for firmware part and version
number" as following this updating procedures.
11. If you update more than one firmware program at the same time, find each of
them and select each of them. Make sure a star is added to each firmware
name.
12. To select Update Date, push the up-arrow key or the down-arrow key.
NOTE: You need an empty slot for this procedure. If the customer has used all
three slots, ask the customer to temporarily remove one of the SD cards in
slots 1 or 2.
13. To start firmware update, push the Enter key. While each firmware is
downloaded, the underscores on the operation panel are replaced by stars.
14. Wait until the message Updated shows.
G139
5-48
SM
16. Remove the SD card from the slot.

17. Attach the slot cover.
18. Connect the printer to the network physically.
20. Print the Configuration Page to check that the every firmware is correctly
updated: Menu > List/Test Print > Config.P/Er.Log
Error Handling
An error code shows if an error occurs during the download. Error codes have the
letter E and a number. If an error occurs, the firmware is not correctly downloaded.
In this condition, examine the error code table (5.4.6) and do the necessary steps.
Then download the firmware again.
Power Failure
If firmware update is interrupted by power failure, the firmware is not correctly
downloaded. In this condition, machine operation is not guaranteed. Download the
firmware again.
Confirmation for Parts and Version Number of Firmware

You can confirm the parts and version number of each firmware during updating
procedures.
1. Do the updating procedures from the step1 to 8.
2. Select a firmware to be confirmed with the up-arrow key or down-arrow key.
3. Press "Menu" key to show the parts number of a firmware.
4. Two lines parts number shows.
NOTE: The upper number indicates the parts number of a firmware, which the
machine has. The lower number indicates the parts number of a
firmware, which as an SD card has.
5. Press "Menu" key again to show the version number of a firmware.
NOTE: The upper number indicates the version number of a firmware, which
the machine has. The lower number indicates the version number of a
firmware, which as an SD card has.
G139
6. Press "Menu" key again to return to the firmware selection mode.
SM
5-49
G139
5.4.5 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch before you insert or remove an SD card.
Make sure that the controller and the EGB are correctly connected.
Uploading NVRAM Data

Copy the data from the NVRAM to an SD card (referred to as to upload NVRAM
data in this section) before you replace the NVRAM. If you cannot upload NVRAM
data, manually input the necessary settings after you replace the NVRAM.
1. Start the SP mode.
2. Select SP 5-990-1 (ALL (Data List)).
3. Do the SP.
4. Make sure the SMC Report is correctly output.
NOTE: You may need the SMC Report if the machine does not complete an
NVRAM data upload or download ( Downloading NVRAM Data)
correctly.
5. Go out of the SP mode.
1
7. Remove slot cover [A].

8. Insert a SD card into slot 2.
[A]
11. Select SP 5-824-1(NVRAM Upload).

2
12. Push the enter key.
13. Push the enter key again after

"<NVRAM Upload> execute?" has
G139S903.JPG
showed. Then the upload starts.
When uploading ends correctly, the following file is made:
a) NVRAM\serial_number.nv where nvram is the folder name in the SD
card and serial_number.nv is the file name with the extension .nv. The
serial number of the printer is used as the file name. For example, if the
serial number is G1350017, the file name is G1350017.NV.
14. "<NVRAM Upload> result = OK" shows if it is uploaded correctly.
17. Remove the SD card, and then reattach the slot cover.
18. Mark the SD card with, for example, the machine code. You need this SD card
when you download NVRAM data ( Downloading NVRAM Data).
NOTE: One SD card can store the NVRAM data from two or more machines.
G139
5-50
SM
Downloading NVRAM Data

Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM (referred to as to download
NVRAM data in this section) after you replace the NVRAM. If you cannot
download NVRAM data, manually input the necessary settings.
NOTE: Be sure not to turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or
application SD card on the machine. Otherwise, A download error (e.g.
Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade.
1. Make sure that the main power switch is off.
2. Make sure that you have the correct SD card that contains the necessary
NVRAM data.
3. Remove slot cover [A].
4. Insert the SD card into slot 2.
7. Select SP5-825-1 (NVRAM Download).
8. Push the enter key.
9. Push the enter key again after "<NVRAM Download> execute?" has showed.
Then the download starts.
NOTE: The machine cannot do the download if the file name in the SD card is
different from the serial number of the printer ( Uploading NVRAM
Data).
10. "<NVRAM Download> result = OK" shows if it is downloaded correctly.
13. Remove the SD card, and then reattach the slot cover.
G139
15. Make sure that the NVRAM data is correctly downloaded.

This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
Total Count
Serial Number
SM
5-51
G139
5.4.6 ERROR CODE TABLE FOR FIRMWARE UPDATING

These error codes are used by more than one model. Some codes are not used by
this machine.
Code
20
21
22
23
24
30
31
32
33
Cause
Cannot map logical address
Cannot access memory
Cannot decompress
compressed data
Error occurred when ROM
update program started
SD card access error
No HDD available for stamp
data download
Data incorrect for continuous
download
Data incorrect after download
interrupted
Incorrect SD card version
35
Module mismatch - Correct

module is not on the SD card)
Module mismatch Module on
SD card is not for this machine
36
Cannot write module Cause

other than E34, E35
34
40
42
43
44
50
G139
Engine module download

failed
Operation panel module
download failed
Stamp data module download
failed
Controller module download
failed
Electronic confirmation check
failed
Solution
Make sure the SD card inserted correctly, or use
another SD card.
HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is
corrupted.
Controller program abnormal. If the second attempt
fails, replace controller board.
Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use another
SD card.
HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
Insert the SD card with the remaining data required
for the download, the re-start the procedure.
Execute the recovery procedure for the intended
module download, then repeat the installation
procedure.
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is
corrupted.
SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct data
(Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install again.
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card
is for another machine. Acquire correct update data
then install again.
then install again.
Replace the update data for the module on the SD
card and try again, or replace the EGB board.
card and try again, or replace the LCDC.
card and try again, or replace the hard disks.
card and tray again, or replace controller board.
then install again.
5-52
SM
SD CARD APPLI MOVE
5.5 SD CARD APPLI MOVE

5.5.1 OVERVIEW
The service program SD Card Appli Move (SP5-873) lets you copy application
programs from one SD card to another SD card.
There are two SD card slots. This machine uses slot 1 to store application
programs. Slot 2 is for maintenance work. Because of this, if the application
programs are stored in two SD cards or more, choose one SD card from these
SD cards and store all the application programs on one card.
Use extreme caution when you use the SD Card Appli Move:
1. The authentication data is transferred with the application program from one
SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card
after you copy the application program from this card to another SD card.
2. Do not use a SD card if it has been used for some other work, for example, on
a computer. Normal operation is not guaranteed if a SD card in this condition is
used.
G139
3. Keep the SD card in the place ( Note) after you copy the application program
from one card to another card. This is because: The SD card can be the only
proof that the user is licensed to use the application program. You may need
to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
NOTE: Refer to Keeping the SD card at the end of this chapter.
SM
5-53
G139
SD CARD APPLI MOVE
5.5.2 MOVE EXEC

The menu Move Exec (SP5-873 1) lets you copy application programs from the
original SD card to another SD card. The application programs are copied as
follows:
From slot 2 to slot 1 when SD cards are in slots 2, or in all slots
Note that the authentication data is also copied with the application program (
5.5.1).
3. Make sure that an SD card is in slot 1.
The application program is copied to SD
card in slot 1.
4. Insert the SD card (with the stored
application program) to slot 2. The
application program is copied from this
SD card.
[A]

G139S903.JPG
7. Select SP5-873-1 Move Exec.

8. Follow the messages that show on the operation panel.
11. Remove the SD card from slot 2 and then reattach the slot cover [A].
13. Make sure that the application programs run correctly.
G139
5-54
SM
SD CARD APPLI MOVE
5.5.3 UNDO EXEC

The menu Undo Exec (SP5-873-2) lets you copy back application programs from
a SD card to the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example,
you have mistakenly copied some programs with Move Exec (SP-5873-1). The
application programs are copied as follows:
From slot 1 to slot 2 when SD cards are in slots 2 or in all slots.
NOTE: 1) Be sure not to turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or
application SD card on the machine. A download error (e.g. Error Code
44) occurs during an application merge.
2) Note that the authentication data is also copied with the application
program ( 5.5.1).
3. Insert the original SD card in slot 2. The
application program is copied back to
this card.
4. Make sure that the SD card (with the
stored the application program) is in slot
1. The application program is copied
back from this SD card.
[A]
2

G139S903.JPG
7. Select SP 5873 2 Undo Exec.

8. Follow the messages that show on the operation panel.
11. Remove the SD card from slot 2, and then reattach the slot cover [A].
13. Make sure that the application programs run correctly.
Keeping the SD card

[A]
G139
You must keep the original SD card after you do

the Move Exec. Store the SD card in the location
[A] shown in the picture.
G139S905.JPG
SM
5-55
G139
POWER ON SELF-TEST
5.6 POWER ON SELF-TEST

5.6.1 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
Overview
There are two types of self-diagnostics for the controller.
Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics
just after the power has been turned on.
SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or
during operation.
The following shows the workflow of the power-on self-diagnostics.
Power ON
Diagnostic RAM
Check
NG
Not initialized
Optional NVRAM
Check
NG
Error Logged
CPU Check
NG
NG
Font Header Check
SC820
Error Logged
ASIC Check
NG
SC821
Real Time Clock

Check
Standard RAM
Conection Check
NG
SC827
Network Check
SC826
NG
NG
Error Logged
Optional RAM
Connection Check
NG
Engine I/F Check
SC829
NG
Error Logged
Clock Generator
Check
NG
Interrupt Check
SC838
NG
Error Logged
Standard NVRAM
Check
NG
Memory Chip
Check
SC824
NG
Error Logged
END
G139S504.WMF
G139
5-56
SM
POWER ON SELF-TEST
5.6.2 ENGINE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

Power ON
Primary error check
Some processes of the engine self-diagnostic test

are executed whenever the main power switch is
turned on, until the printer goes in to the ready
status. Others are executed only when a print job
comes to the printer, when the printer goes in to
the printing status.
Belt tension unit cam

position check
Toner cartridge
check
By-pass tray check
Color adjustment
Ready
Printing
G139
G139S517.WMF
SM
5-57
G139
USER PROGRAM MODE
5.7 USER PROGRAM MODE

Press the Menu button and use the Up/Down arrow keys to scroll through the
menu listing. To go back to a higher level, press the Escape key. Press the On
Line key after you change a setting. The user menu list can be printed using
Menu List in the List/Test Print user mode.
User Menu Chart
Category
Counter
Sample Print
Locked Print
Paper Input
List/ Test Print
Maintenance
System
Function Menu
*1
*2
*2
Bypass Size
Paper Type
Tray Locking
Tray Priority
Config.P/Er. Log
Config. Page
Error Log
Menu List
Color Demo Page
PCL Config. Page
PS Config. Page
Hex Dump
Color Regist.
Color Calibrate
Image Density
Registration
Plain Paper
Maint. Reset
HDD Format *2
ROM Update *3
4C. Graphic Mode
Replacmnt Alert
WL. LAN Signal *4
WL. LAN Defaults *4
Key Repeat
Menu Protect *5
Series Print. Job *5
Prt. Err Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Copies
Category
System
Host Interface
PCL Menu
Function Menu
Printer Lang.
Sub Paper Size
Page Size
Def. Print Lang.
Duplex *6
Blank Pages
Energy Saver 1
Energy Saver 2
Auto Reset Time
Unit of Measure
B& W Page Detect
Letterhead Mode
Spool Printing *2
Bypass Priority
RAM Disk
Notify by Email
I/ O Buffer
I/ O Timeout
Network Setup
IEEE 1394 Setup *7
IEEE 802.11b *4
Orientation
Form Lines
Font Source
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbol Set
Courier Font
Ext. A4 Width
Append CR to LF
Resolution
Language
NOTE:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Meter charge mode must be ON in SP mode.

Option HDD required
ROM Update is not currently used.
IEEE802.11b option required
G139
5-58
5) Displayed after pressing [Enter], [Escape]

and then [Menu]
6) Duplex unit option required.
7) IEEE1394 option required.
SM
DIP SWITCHES
5.8 DIP SWITCHES

Controller Board
OFF
ON
DFU: Keep this switch ON.
Factory Use Only: Keep these switches OFF.
G139
DIP SW No.
1
2 to 4
SM
5-59
G139
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
G139

Service Manual.
SM
6-1
G139
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration:
Desktop
Print Process:
Dry electrostatic transfer system
Printer Languages:
RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)

PCL5c/e
PCL-6
Adobe PostScript 3
PDF
Resolution:
RPCS:
1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
PCL5c/e:
600 x 600 dpi 300 x 300 dpi
PCL-6:
1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
Adobe PostScript 3:
1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
PDF:
1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
Gradation
1 bit/pixel
Printing speed:
Monochrome
Color
Resolution
600 x 600 dpi
1200 x 600 dpi
1200 x 1200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1200 x 600 dpi
1200 x 1200 dpi
Plain paper
21 ppm
21 ppm
9 ppm
21 ppm
21 ppm
9 ppm
Thick/OHP
8 ppm
8 ppm
8 ppm
8 ppm
8 ppm
8 ppm
Resident Fonts:
PCL5c:
35 Manager Intelli fonts
10 TrueType fonts
1 Bitmap font
Adobe PostScript 3:
136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)
Host Interfaces:
Ethernet (10/100 Base-TX): Standard

USB2.0: Standard
Network Protocols:
SM
G139
IEEE1394 (SCSI print, IP over 1394): Optional

IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN): Optional
Parallel (IEEE1284: Optional): Optional
Bluetooth (Wireless): Optional
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk
7-1
G139
SPECIFICATIONS
First Print Speed:
Color: 14.5 seconds or less (from tray 1)

B/W: 13.5 seconds or less (from tray 1)
Warm-up Time
Less than 30 seconds (at 23 C/50%)
Print Paper Capacity:

(80 g/m2, 20lb)

Print Paper Size:
(Refer to Supported Paper Sizes.)

Minimum
Maximum
A4/B5/81/2" x 11"/81/2" x 14" (SEF)
90 x 148 mm
216 x 356 mm
A4/B5/81/2" x 11"/81/2" x 14" (SEF)
Standard Tray
By-pass
Optional Tray
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
60 to 199 g/m2 (16 to 53 lb.)
Printing Paper
Weight:
Standard tray:
Optional paper tray:
By-pass tray:
Output Paper
Capacity:
Standard exit tray: 250 sheets (face down)
Memory:
Standard 128 MB, up to 512 MB with optional DIMM
Power Source:
120 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A (for North America)

220 V - 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 6 A (for Europe/Asia)
Power Consumption:
Maximum
Energy Saver
120V
1200 W or less
9 W or less
230V
1300 W or less
9 W or less
Mainframe Only
Full System
63 dB or less
49 dB or less
63 dB or less
49
Noise Emission:
(Sound Power Level)
Printing
Stand-by
NOTE: The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO9296 at the
operator position.
Dimensions (W x D x H):419 x 536 x 398 mm (16.5" x 21.1" x 15.7")
Weight:
G139
Less than 32kg (70.5 lb.)
7-2
SM
SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES

Paper
Size (W x L)
A3
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
A6 SEF
B4 SEF
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
B6 SEF
Ledger
Letter SEF
Letter LEF
Legal SEF
Half Letter SEF
Executive SEF
Executive LEF
F SEF
Foolscap SEF
Folio SEF
8K
16K SEF
16K LEF
Custom
Com10 Env.
Monarch Env.
C6 Env.
C5 Env.
DL Env.
297 x 420 mm
210 x 297 mm
297 x 210 mm
148 x 210 mm
210 x 148 mm
105 x 148 mm
257 x 364 mm
182 x 257 mm
257 x 182 mm
128 x 182 mm
11" x 17"
8.5" x 11"
11" x 8.5"
8.5" x 14"
5.5" x 8.5"
7.25" x 10.5"
10.5" x 7.25"
8" x 13"
8.5" x 13"
8.25" x 13"
267 x 390 mm
195 x 267 mm
267 x 195 mm
Minimum:
90 x 148 mm
Maximum:
216 x 356 mm
4.125" x 9.5"
3.875" x 7.5"
114 x 162 mm
162 x 229 mm
110 x 220 mm
Paper Trays
Main Unit/Options
US
Eur/Asia
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
By-pass
Tray
Duplex
N
Y#
N
Y#
N
Y#
N
Y#
N
N
N
Y#
N
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
Y#
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y#
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
N
N
N
N
Remarks:
Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.
Supported: the user specifies the paper size.
Supported: depends on a technician adjustment
Not supported
G139
Y
Y#
Y*
N
SM
7-3
G139
SPECIFICATIONS
2. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run
installer allows you to select which components to install.
2.1 PRINTER DRIVERS

Printer
Language
PCL 5c/6
PS3
RPCS
Windows
95/98/ME
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows
NT4.0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows
2000
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows XP
Macintosh
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
NOTE: 1) The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86
platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC,
Alpha, or MIPS platforms.
2) The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows
2000, which uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each operating system is
provided with the driver.
3) The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS 7.6 or later versions.
2.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE

Software
Font Manager 2000
(Win95/98/Me, NT4.0,
2000, XP, Server2003)
Smart Device Monitor for
Admin
(Win95/98/Me, NT4.0,
2000, XP, Server2003)
Smart Device Monitor for
Cloant
(Win95/98/Me, NT4.0,
2000, XP, Server2003)
Description
A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer
A printer management utility for network administrators. NIB
setup utilities are also available.
A printer management utility for client users.

A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP/IP
network.
A peer to peer print utility over a TCP/IP network. This
provides the parallel printing and recovery printing features.
Printer Utility for Mac
This software provides several convenient functions for printing
from Macintosh clients.
(Mac)
IEEE1394 Utility
This utility solves problems with Windows 2000, XP,
(Win2000, XP, Server2003) Server2003.
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite itself can be used as personal document
(Win95/98, 2000, NT4, XP, management software and can manage both image data
converted from paper documents and application files saved in
Server2003)
each clients PC.
G139
7-4
SM
SPECIFICATIONS
3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
G139V900.WMF
Item
Main Unit
Options
Duplex Unit
Paper Feed Unit
Internal Options
128 MB DIMM Memory
256 MB DIMM Memory
NVRAM Memory
IEEE1284 I/F Board
IEEE1394 I/F Board
IEEE802.11b Board
Bluetooth Board
HDD Type 3000
Network Data Protection
Unit Type A
Machine
Code
G139
No.
Remarks
G837
G836
B584
B818
G395
B679
B581
G813
B736
G345
Common with G081/G120/G121/G122

Common with G081/G120/G121/G122
Up to two tray units can be installed.
Common with model G104
Common with model G081/G120/G121/G122
G820
G139
NOTE:
1.) The IEEE1394, IEEE802.11b, Bluetooth, and IEEE1284 cannot be installed at
the same time.
2.) A second model, G149 with duplexing standard was not marketed in the U.S.
SM
7-5
G139

Ms Cl3500n Ing

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Ms Cl3500n Ing

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

G081/G120/G121/G122/G139

It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained

2006 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1

2.1 USER REPLACEABLE ITEMS..................................................................2-1

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ......................................................3-1

3.4 EXTERIOR COVERS ................................................................................3-3

4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................4-1

5.3.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE (2. ENGINE) ........................................5-10

6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1

Tray Lock ............................................................................................6-49

CN3 (on ECB)/CN2 (on LSU) .............................................................6-69

PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 3000 G342

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

Conventions in this Manual

Lengthwise, SEF (Short Edge Feed)

Sideways, LEF (Long Edge Feed)

PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 3000 G342

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT

A (left side) : Over 10 cm (4")

C (right side) : Over 55 cm (22")

1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

1.2 MACHINE INSTALLATION

1. Open the right cover [A] of the printer.

2. Pull out the green levers on the left

3. Lift the inner cover [A] until it stays up.

4. Remove the black photoconductor unit from its

5. Peel off the tape surrounding the

NOTE: After taking the new

7. Slide the front of the photoconductor

8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to install the color photoconductor unit.

10. Push the green lever to fasten the

1.2.2 INSTALLING THE TONER CARTRIDGE

1. Open the upper left cover [A] of the

3. Locate and remove from the packing

4. Check that the toner color and location

5. Push the toner cartridge [A] in the

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to install the other cartridges.

1.2.3 LOADING PAPER

2. Remove any and all shipping tape

4. Adjust the side guides to the paper

5. Load paper into the paper tray with the

6. Slide the paper tray completely into the printer.

1.2.4 CONNECTING THE POWER CORD

NOTE: After the machine warms up, Ready

NOTE: The message appears on the panel

1.2.5 SELECTING THE PANEL DISPLAY LANGUAGE

3. Press the # or $ key to display

4. Press the Enter key. The message appears on

5. Press the # or $ key to display the language you want to select.

7. Press the On Line key or Menu key. Ready

NOTE: After the machine warms up, Ready

2. Press the Menu key.

3. Press the # or $ key to display "List/Test

4. Press the Enter key. The message appears on

1.2.6 PRINTING THE TEST PAGE

6. The test printing starts shortly after.

NOTE: If you cannot complete the test print,

8. Turn off the printer's power switch.

1.2.7 ADJUSTING THE IMAGE DENSITY